This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
TYPE OF ACTIVITY'
REFER TO SECTION N.
TITLE COMPLETION DESIGN MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION LIST Eni - Agip Division Italian Districts Eni - Agip Division Affiliated Companies Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Drilling & Completion Units STAP Archive Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Subsurface Geology Units Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Reservoir Units Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Italian Activities Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Foreign Activities
NOTE: The present document is available in Eni Agip Intranet (http://wwwarpo.in.agip.it) and a CD-Rom version can also be distributed (requests will be addressed to STAP Dept. in Eni - Agip Division Headquarter) Date of issue:
B A @ ? >
Issued by M. Bassanini 28/06/99 REVISIONS PREP'D C. Lanzetta 28/06/99 CHK'D A. Galletta 28/06/99 APPR'D
The present document is CONFIDENTIAL and it is property of AGIP It shall not be shown to third parties nor shall it be used for reasons different from those owing to which it was given
2 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL OBJECTIVES FUNCTIONS OF A COMPLETION MANUAL UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION
8 12 13 13
2.1. 2.2. INTRODUCTION CHARACTERISTICS OF RESERVOIR ROCKS 2.2.1. Porosity 2.2.2. Permeability 2.2.3. Relative Permeability 2.2.4. Wettabilty 2.2.5. Fluid Distribution 2.2.6. Fluid Flow In The Reservoir 2.2.7. Effects Of Reservoir Characteristics 2.2.8. Reservoir Homogeneity HYDROCARBON DATA 2.3.1. Oil Property Correlation RESERVOIR/PRODUCTION FORECAST 2.4.1. Inflow Perfomance 2.4.2. Reservoir Simulation For IPR Curves 2.4.3. IPR Selection 2.4.4. Outflow Performance 2.4.5. Flow Rate Prediction
14 14 14 14 15 16 17 18 24 27 28 28 29 31 42 44 46 55
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. INTRODUCTION 3.1.1. Types of Tests DST OBJECTIVE DST STRING RESERVOIR CHARACTERISTICS 3.4.1. Pressure Build-Up Analysis 3.4.2. Basics Of DST Operations 3.4.3. Common Test Tools Description 3.4.4. Tools Utilised With Permanent Packer Systems 3.4.5. Sub-Sea Test Tools Used On Semi-Submersibles 3.4.6. Deep Water Tools 3.4.7. Downhole Pressure Recording
60 60 63 64 69 69 77 77 80 80 81 82
3 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
3.5. WELL PRODUCTION TEST OBJECTIVES 3.5.1. Periodic Tests 3.5.2. Productivity Or Deliverability Tests 3.5.3. Transient Tests
83 83 84 84
4.1. CASING DESIGN 4.1.1. Casing Profile 4.1.2. Casing Specifications 4.1.3. Casing Connections WELL DEVIATION SURVEYS CASING CEMENTING CONSIDERATIONS 4.3.1. Production Casing Cementing 4.3.2. Production Casing Cement Evaluation
87 87 88 89 89 90 90 91
WELL COMPLETION DESIGN
5.1. FACTORS INFLUENCING COMPLETION DESIGN 5.1.1. Reservoir Considerations 5.1.2. Mechanical Considerations 5.1.3. Safety Considerations RESERVOIR-WELLBORE INTERFACE 5.2.1. Open Hole Completions 5.2.2. Uncemented Liner Completions 5.2.3. Perforated Completions 5.2.4. Multi-Zone Completions CASING-TUBING INTERFACE 5.3.1. Packer Applications 5.3.2. Packer-Tubing Interfaces 5.3.3. Annulus Circulation TUBING-WELLHEAD INTERFACE 5.4.1. Tubing Hanger Systems 5.4.2. Xmas Trees 5.4.3. Metal-To-Metal Seals FUTURE CONSIDERATIONS 5.5.1. Stimulation 5.5.2. Formation Management 5.5.3. Well Servicing Techniques OPTIMISING TUBING SIZE 5.6.1. Reservoir Pressure 5.6.2. Flowing Wellhead Pressure 5.6.3. Gas-Liquid Ratio 5.6.4. Artificial Lift
94 94 96 96 97 97 98 100 101 104 106 107 108 109 109 115 115 117 118 118 119 121 123 123 123 124
4 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. DEVELOPMENT WELLS CONTRIBUTING FACTORS TO CORROSION FORMS OF CORROSION 6.3.1. Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) 6.3.2. Corrosion Caused By CO2 And Cl 6.3.3. Corrosion Caused By H2S, CO2 And ClCORROSION CONTROL MEASURES CORROSION INHIBITORS CORROSION RESISTANCE OF STAINLESS STEELS 6.6.1. Martensitic Stainless Steels 6.6.2. Ferritic Stainless Steels 6.6.3. Austenitic Stainless Steels 6.6.4. Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels 6.6.5. Duplex Stainless Steel COMPANY DESIGN PROCEDURE 6.7.1. CO2 Corrosion 6.7.2. H2S Corrosion MATERIAL SELECTION 6.8.1. OCTG Specifications 6.8.2. DHE Specifications 6.8.3. Wellhead Specifications ORDERING SPECIFICATIONS
126 126 128 128 135 137 138 139 139 139 140 140 140 142 142 142 142 144 145 146 147 152
6.4. 6.5. 6.6.
7.1. 7.2. POLICIES THEORY 7.2.1. Mechanical Properties of Steel 7.2.2. Temperature 7.2.3. Tubing Movement/Stress Relationship WELL DATA. 7.3.1. Casing Profile/Geometry 7.3.2. Tubing Data 7.3.3. Bottom-hole Pressure 7.3.4. Temperatures (Static and Flowing) 7.3.5. Reservoir Fluids 7.3.6. Completion Fluid PRESSURE INDUCED FORCES 7.4.1. Piston Effect 7.4.2. Buckling Effect 7.4.3. Ballooning Effect 7.4.4. Temperature Effect EVALUATION OF TOTAL TUBING MOVEMENT
153 153 154 158 158 160 160 160 160 160 161 161 161 162 163 167 168 169
5 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
7.6. ANCHORED TUBING 7.6.1. Tubing Permitting Limited Motion 7.6.2. Packer Setting 7.7. TUBING LOAD CONDITIONS 7.7.1. Pressure Testing 7.7.2. Acid Stimulation 7.7.3. Fracturing 7.7.4. Flowing 7.7.5. Shut-In 7.7.6. Load Condition Summary TUBING SELECTION 7.8.1. Critical Factors 7.8.2. Tubing Size And Weight 7.8.3. Anchoring Systems TUBING CONNECTIONS 7.9.1. Policy 7.9.2. Class of Service 7.9.3. Selection Criteria 7.9.4. NACE And Proximity Definitions 7.9.5. CRA Connections 7.9.6. Connection Data
170 172 174 174 174 175 175 177 177 181 181 182 182 184 185 185 185 186 189 190 190 190 191 193 195 195 196 205
7.10. TUBING STRESS CALCULATIONS 7.10.1. Calculation Methods 7.10.2. Safety Factor 7.10.3. External Pressure Limit 7.10.4. Packer Load Limits 7.10.5. Example Manual Calculation 7.10.6. Example Computation
8.1. PACKERS 8.1.1. Selection Procedure 8.1.2. Selection Criteria 8.1.3. Well Classification 8.1.4. Packer Selection For Single String Completion 8.1.5. Single Selective Completion Packers SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES 8.2.1. Policy 8.2.2. Applications 8.2.3. Wireline Retrievable Safety Valves 8.2.4. Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valves 8.2.5. Valve Type/Closure Mechanism Selection
206 207 207 209 209 217 223 223 223 223 224 224
10.3. Tubing Conveyed Perforating GUN PERFORMANCE 9.3.A. ESP Performance 10.9.6. Control/Injection Line Selection Procedure Flow Chart WIRELINE NIPPLE SELECTION 8. SHAPED CHARGE PERFORATING GUN TYPES 9.1. Operating Conditions Summary 10.3. Perforating Procedures 240 240 241 241 243 243 243 244 244 246 247 247 126.96.36.199.3. 9. Protectors 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. Injection Lines 8.4. Common Problems 10. SCSSV Hydraulic Control fluid 8.p.3.1.2. Artificial Lift Considerations 250 251 253 254 254 256 259 259 260 262 262 265 265 265 268 268 270 272 . Wireline Conveyed Casing Guns 9.1. GAS LIFT 10.2.3. PLUNGER LIFT 10.4.1.3.3. ELECTRICAL SUBMERISBLE PUMPS 10. Fittings 188.8.131.52.184.108.40.206.8.3. SUMMARY ARTIFICIAL LIFT SELECTION CHARTS 10.3.3.3.220.127.116.11. Common Problems 10. PERFORATING 9.5.4. 9. Firing Heads 18.104.22.168. Impact On Completion Design 10.4.7. HYDRAULIC PUMPING SYSTEMS 10.1.2.1.5. Selective Nipple Configuration REVISION 0 225 225 225 226 228 230 230 231 233 236 237 238 239 8.3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 6 OF 295 ENI S. Impact On Completion Design 10.2. Through-Tubing Hollow Carrier Guns 22.214.171.124. Underbalanced Perforating 9. ROD PUMPS 10.3. Control Lines 8. Through-Tubing Strip Guns 9.1. SCREW PUMP SYSTEMS 10. Encapsulation 126.96.36.199. Impact On Completion Design 10. Design Considerations And Comparisons 10. Impact On Completion Design 10.3.2.4.188.8.131.52.1.3.4. ARTIFICIAL LIFT 10. Tapered Nipple Configuration 8.7. API And Performance Data 9. Tube Specifications 8.4. Material Selection 8. CONTROL/INJECTION LINE SELECTION 8.
6. A. BARRIER PRINCIPLES 11. USE OF UNDERBALANCE COMPLETION FLUIDS 11.4.A. A.REPORT FORMS A.1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 7 OF 295 ENI S. INITIAL ACTIVITY REPORT (ARPO 01) DAILY REPORT (ARPO 02) WASTE DISPOSAL MANAGEMENT REPORT (ARPO 06) PERFORATING REPORT (ARPO 07) GRAVEL PACK REPORT (ARPO 08) MATRIX STIMULATION/HYDRAULIC FRACTURE REPORT (APRO 09) WIRELINE REPORT (ARPO 11) PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE SURVEY REPORT (ARPO 12) WELL PROBLEM REPORT (ARPO 13) WELL SITUATION REPORT (ARPO 20) 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 APPENDIX B . Completions 274 274 274 274 275 275 275 APPENDIX A . RISK ASSESSMENT 11.4. APPLICATION 11.7.NOMENCLATURE FOR TUBING CALCULATIONS APPENDIX C .9.3. A. A. Well Testing 11. POLICY 11.ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX D .2.3. A.4.BIBLIOGRAPHY APPENDIX E .1.p.8.TUBING MOVEMENT/STRESS COMPUTER PROGRAMMES 287 289 292 294 . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 11.1. A. A. A.184.108.40.206. A.3.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 8 OF 295 ENI S. This. hence profit. Many of the decisions made by the various disciplines are interrelated and impact on the decisions made by other disciplines. The design process consists of three phases: • • • Conceptual Detailed design Procurement.c. It is essential that this is an accurate statement including all the foreseen requirements. methodologies and rules that enable to operate uniformly and in compliance with the Corporate Company Principles.b and figure 1. involving Reservoir Engineering. For instance. raised by the interrelated decisions. These in consequence. The activities in each phase are illustrated in figure 1. This is vital in order to obtain the optimum completion design utilising the process described in this manual. the decision on the well architecture may subsequently be changed due to the availability of well servicing or workover techniques.A. however. have a large impact on costs and field profit. Petroleum Engineering. well servicing capabilities and completion life. within the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliated Companies.a. at an early time. quality and costs. During this phase. Production Engineering and Drilling Engineering.1. This does not mean that the process is sequential and many decisions can be made from studies and analysis run in parallel. The conceptual design process begins at the field appraisal stage when a Statement Of Requirements (SOR) of the completion is produced. figure 1. The Corporate Standards in this manual define the requirements. while providing all personnel involved in Drilling & Completion activities with common guidelines in all areas worldwide where Eni-Agip operates. The final aim is to improve performance and efficiency in terms of safety. The approach to completion design must be interdiscipline. 1. as it has a fundamental effect on the field final design and development. . The final conceptual design will be used as the basis for the detailed design process. The manual will provide the engineers within the various disciplines with a system to guide them through the process with the objectives of helping them make the key decisions and obtaining the optimum design to maximise productivity and. The conceptual design process guides the engineers through analysis and key questions to be considered. The process of well preparation and installation of completions is fully described in the ‘Completions Procedures manual’. in the completion design process and its importance on well productivity. the user will resolve many of the dilemmas.p. Agip Division STAP-M-1-P-7100 0 REVISION 1. INTRODUCTION PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL The purpose of this manual is to guide experienced engineers of all technical disciplines. still enables each individual Affiliated Company the capability to operate according to local laws or particular environmental situations.
increased knowledge of the field and incorporate new technologies.A. the statement of requirements need to reviewed and altered to modify the conceptual design for future wells.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 9 OF 295 ENI S. Figure 1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As more information is gleamed from further development wells and as conditions change. This provides a system of ongoing completion optimisation to suit changing conditions.A .Conceptual Completion Design Process .
p.Detailed Completion Design Process .B . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 10 OF 295 ENI S.A.
Procurement Process .p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 11 OF 295 ENI S.C .A.
Be as flexible as possible for future operational changes in well function. Be as simple as possible to increase reliability. Provide adequate maintenance and surveillance programmes.p. Figure 1.2. Provide adequate safety in accordance with legislative or company requirements and industry common practices.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 12 OF 295 ENI S. in reality is not simple and many critical decisions are needed to balance long term and short term cash flow and sometimes compromises are made. In conjunction with other wells.Completion Design Versus Profitability . This. effectively contribute to the whole development plan reservoir plan. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 1. OBJECTIVES The fundamental objectives for a completion are: • • • • • • • 0 REVISION Achieve a desired (optimum) level of production or injection. These may be summarised as to safely provide maximum long term profitability. An expensive completion may derive more long term profit than a low cost completion but the initial capital costs will be higher (Refer to figure 1.D . Achieve the optimum production rates reliably at the lowest capital and operating costs.d). however.A.
AMENDMENT. This is its primary function.3. An inherent problem is that the Reservoir Engineering Department’s objectives do not coincide with the Completion Engineering Department’s in that Reservoir Engineering’s objectives are for the whole field performance whereas the Completion Group’s is to optimise for profit on a long term well by well basis which includes well servicing/workover. however. still enables each individual Affiliated Company the capability to operate according to local laws or particular environmental situations. well maintenance or detailed operations. however a completion must also satisfy a great many other functions required for safety. while providing all personnel involved in Drilling & Completion activities with common guidelines in all areas worldwide where Eni-Agip operates. Producing single or multiple zones.A. servicing. but are not concerned about production problems. Protecting the production casing from formation pressure. quality and costs. Preventing hydrocarbon escape if there is a surface leak. pressure monitoring and reservoir maintenance. Inhibiting scale or corrosion. . in the early stages. optimising production. This. 1. MANUAL UPDATING.4. Reservoir and geoscience groups often have to set plans and objectives for the field on well performance based on limited information. These main functional requirements must be built into the conceptual design and include: • • • • • • • 1. The final aim is to improve performance and efficiency in terms of safety. the estimate of some well performance and characteristics throughout the life of the well may be wrong and early workover or well intervention operations will impact on well profitability. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION On the other hand if the data available is not accurate. methodologies and rules that enable to operate uniformly and in compliance with the Corporate Company Principles. FUNCTIONS OF A COMPLETION The main function of a completion is to produce hydrocarbons to surface or deliver injection fluids to formations. Protecting the casing from corrosion attack by well fluids.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 13 OF 295 ENI S. Permanent downhole pressure monitoring.p. Perforating (underbalanced or overbalanced). CONTROL & DEROGATION The Corporate Standards in this manual define the requirements.
2. limestone or dolomite rocks.2. Darcy’s Law states that the rate of flow through a given rock varies directly with permeability (measure of the continuity of inter-connected pore spaces) and the pressure applied.1. Darcy. a completion conceptual design must take into account all the well objectives to produce the optimum design to maximise profitability. developed the first relationship which described the flow through porous rock which is still used today.A . shales.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 14 OF 295 ENI S. Many rocks such as clays. however some reservoirs even occur fractured shale. Permeability Permeability is a measure of the ability of which fluid can move through the interconnected pore spaces of the rock.1. K= qµL A∆p Eq.2. oil or gas even although they may be quite porous. if the pressure across the rock is 1 atmosphere. working with water filters. As pointed out in section 1. 2.p.2.2.A. 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 2. CHARACTERISTICS OF RESERVOIR ROCKS Porosity Porosity or pore space in reservoir rocks provides the container for the accumulation of oil and gas and gives the rock characteristic ability to absorb and hold fluids. The purpose of this section is to consider the characteristics of reservoir fluids and the flow of these in the area around the wellbore to allow these parameters to be tied into the well completion design and well intervention/workover operational requirements. In a rock having a permeability of 1 Darcy. anhydrite and some highly cemented sandstones are impervious to movement of water. Most commercial reservoirs have sandstone. 2. 2.1. 1cc of a 1cp viscosity fluid will flow each second 2 through a portion of rock 1cm in length and having a cross-section of 1cm . a French engineer. RESERVOIR CONSIDERATIONS INTRODUCTION Oil and gas wells are expensive faucets that enable production of petroleum reservoirs or allow injection of fluids into an oil or gas reservoir. and varies inversely with the viscosity of the fluid flowing. chalk.
the gas rate continues to increase and less oil flows through the pores until finally only gas flows. This same principle governs the flow of oil in the presence of water. . in comparison to the ease that it would flow if there was no other fluid. To understand this. Significant oil may still occupy the pores but cannot be recovered by primary production means as the permeability to oil has dropped to zero. some lighter components of the oil will evolve as gas in the pore spaces. psi Outlet pressure. Flow of oil is reduced but gas saturation is too small for it to flow through the pores.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 15 OF 295 ENI S. 2. If reservoir pressure is allowed to decline. md 3 Flow rate. The gas-oil or water-oil relative permeability relationships of a particular reservoir rock depend on the configurations of the rock pore spaces and the wetting characteristics of the fluids and rock surfaces.3. psi Formation volume factor. With further increases in gas saturation. res bbl/stb kA(p 1 −p 2 ) BµL Eq.B Relative Permeability As normally two or three fluids exist in the same pore spaces in a reservoir. If pressures to continue to decline.2. the relative permeability to oil is significantly greater when the rock is ‘water wet’. = = = = = = = = Flow rate.p. assume a rock filled with only with oil at high pressure where gas has not been able to come out of solution: • • • • • All available space is taken up by the oil and only oil is flowing. relative permeability relationships must be considered. ft Inlet pressure. gas saturation continues to increase and at some point (equilibrium gas saturation) gas begins to flow and the oil rate is further reduced. The saturation of each fluid present affects the ease of fluid movement or relative permeability. cp Flow length. Relative permeability represents the ease at which one fluid flows through connecting pore spaces in the presence of other fluids.127 ×10 −3 where: q k A µ L p1 p2 B 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In oilfield units the linear form of Darcy’s Law for flow of incompressible fluid through a rock filled with only one fluid is: q=1.A. stb/day Permeability. In an oil-water system. ft Viscosity.
md Relative permeability to oil k abs k ro A(p1 −p 2 ) B o µL Eq. The productivity of oil in this condition is maximised. it is important when completing or servicing the well in that any foreign substance which may come into contact with the rock may alter its wettability characteristic and reduce the relative permeability to hydrocarbon fluids and cause emulsion which may block flow. However. the permeability in eq. Wettabilty Most reservoirs were formed or laid down in water with oil moving in later from adjacent zones to replace a portion of the water. cp Formation volume factor for oil.127 ×10 −3 where: qo kabs kro = = = Oil flow rate. the ‘water cut’ or fraction of water in the total flow stream at standard conditions of temperature and pressure can be calculated by: fw = 1 k o µw Bw 1 × + + k w µo Bo Eq.C For a well producing both water and oil.2. 2. 2. res bbl/stb Formation volume factor for water. stb/day Absolute permeability. This can be achieved by multiplying absolute permeability of the rock by the relative permeability of the rock to the desired fluid.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 16 OF 295 ENI S. This means that the grains of the rock matrix are coated with a film of water permitting hydrocarbons to fill the centre of the pore spaces.A.p. it is not important as this characteristic is included in the permeability measurements. most reservoir rocks are considered to be ‘water wet’.4. Although it is extremely difficult to determine wettability of cores due to the cutting and preparing specimens for laboratory testing which alters the wettability characteristics. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Where two or more fluids are present. res bbl/stb . For this reason. 2. = = = = = = Relative permeability to oil Relative permeability to water Viscosity of oil. cp Viscosity of water.b represents the permeability of the rock to the desired fluid.D where: ko kw µo µw Bo Bw 2. q=1.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. A well completed in the transition zone will be expected to produce both oil and water.5. The nature and thickness of the transition zones between the water and oil. depending on the saturations of each fluid present at the completion level. the capillary pressure in two different pore sizes will be the same. Relative permeability permits both water and oil to flow within the transition zone. the transition zones will be thicker than in higher permeability sands. hence more oil will be contained in larger pore spaces. and water and gas are influenced by several factors: uniformity.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 17 OF 295 ENI S. only oil will flow in an oil-water system. In rock the capillary forces. Fluid Distribution 0 REVISION The distribution of fluids vertically in the reservoir is very important as the relative amounts of oil.a summarises oil. figure 2. water and gas saturation in a typical homogeneous rock example. Above the transition zone.2. oil and gas. In lower permeability sands. . Connate water is related to permeability and pore channels in lower rocks are generally smaller. work to change the normal sharp interfaces between the fluids separated by density.A. which are related to water wettability. permeability.p. wettability. therefore the water film between the water and the oil will have the same curvature. gas and water present at a particular level determines the fluids that produced by a well completed at that level and also influence the relative rates of fluid production. surface tension and the relative density differences between the fluids. Water saturation above the transition zone is termed ‘irreducible water saturation’ or more commonly the ‘connate water saturation’. For a given height. the higher will be the connate water saturation. From the point in a zone of the free water level upward to some point where water saturation becomes constant is called the ‘transition zone’. Due to the greater density difference between gas and oil as compared to oil and water. These can be summarised in three statements: • • • The lower the permeability of a given sand. the transition zone between the oil and gas is not as thick as the transition zone between oil and water.
A .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 18 OF 295 ENI S. in associated free gas caps. or in associated aquifers.6.2. It is produced principally by pressure inherent in gas dissolved in oil. Oil and Gas Cap) 2.p.Example Fluid Distribution in a Uniform Sand Reservoir (Containing Connate Water. Pressure distribution around a producing oil well completed in a homogeneous zone will gradually drop from the reservoir pressure some distance from the wellbore until closer to the wellbore where it will decline quite sharply. Pressure Distribution Around the Wellbore Pressure distribution in the reservoir and factors which influence it are of great of significance in interpreting well production trends caused by pressure characteristics.A. The wellhead pressure will be much lower due to the influence of hydrostatic pressure and tubing frictional effects. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2. . Fluid Flow In The Reservoir Oil has little natural ability to produce itself into the wellbore.
most of the pressure drop in the reservoir occurs fairly close to the wellbore. .B . in a uniform sand.Pressure Distribution Near Wellbore In Radial Flow Radial Flow Around The Wellbore Steady state radial flow of incompressible fluid is described by Darcy’s Law: q= 0. the pressure drop across the last 15ft of the formation surrounding the wellbore is about one half of the total pressure drop from the well to a point 500ft away in the reservoir.p. 2. As shown in figure 2.A. Figure 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In a radial flow situation.00708kh(p o −p w ) r Bµ1n( o ) rw Eq. This area around the wellbore is the ‘critical area’ and as much as possible should be done to prevent damage or flow restrictions in this critical area.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 19 OF 295 ENI S. Obviously flow velocities increase tremendously as fluid approaches the wellbore.E Corrections are required to account for the flow of compressible fluids and for turbulent flow velocities.b. where fluids move towards the well from all directions.
which is the usual case.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 20 OF 295 ENI S. k= k 1h1 +k 2 h 2 +k 3 h 3 h1 +h 2 +h 3 Eq.A.Radial Flow In Parallel Combination of Beds . 2.C.D .F Figure 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2. permeablities must be averaged for flow through parallel layers of differing permeabilities.p.Units For Darcy’s Law Equation For non-homogeneous zones.
curve C. curve B.E . Actual test data with very high permeability sand.Radial Flow In Series Combination Of Beds Linear Flow Through Perforations Ideally perforating tunnels should provide be large and deep enough to prevent any restriction to flow. the tunnels are packed with gravel to hold the formation in place. 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Varying permeabilities around the well in series can be averaged as follows: ro ) rw k= r r r 1n( 1 ) 1n( 2 ) 1n( 3 ) rw r1 r2 + + k1 k2 k3 1n( Eq. Flow through perforating tunnels is linear rather radial and Darcy’s equation must be corrected as turbulent flow usually exists.G Figure 2. predict. which will cause a restriction. In cases where there may be sand problems and a gravel pack is used.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 21 OF 295 ENI S.A. Curve A indicates that plugging with even high permeability (1 Darcy) sand gives a large pressure drop.p. proves turbulent flow results in higher pressure drop than Darcy’s Law calculations. Investigators have provided turbulence correction factors which can be applied to Darcy’s equation to permit calculation of pressure drop through perforating tunnels.f below. . Experiments have shown that pressure drop through gravel filled perforations compared with uncorrected linear flow Darcy’s Law calculations is substantial as shown in figure 2.
F . Low permeability is often caused by damage close to the wellbore through drilling. These are permeability and producing rate. two factors may cause low flowing bottomhole pressures.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 22 OF 295 ENI S. This is particularly detrimental as the effect close to the wellbore is greatly magnified.p. With low permeability or excessive rate of production. .A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2. pressure drawdown will be appreciable higher than normal thus reducing flowing bottom-hole pressures and causing the well to be placed on artificial lift if higher productions rates are necessary. completion or intervention operations.Pressure Drop Versus Flow Rate Through Perforation Causes Of Low Flowing Bottom-Hole Pressure In a well with uniform sand and fluid conditions.
H Other terms which are used to quantify formation damage are Damage Ratio and Flow Efficiency. 2. 2. Flow profiling may highlight zones. production logging techniques may provide helpful data.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 23 OF 295 ENI S. The skin effect (abnormal pressure drop) or the normal radial flow pressure drop can be calculated by: ∆p s = 141. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The existence of damage can be calculated by well test results analysing the pressure build-up periods. which are not contributing to the total flow.I Flow efficiency: FE= = Jideal Jactual p−p wf −∆p s p−p wf Eq. Non-contributing zones are likely to have been damaged. 2. .K In multi-zone completion intervals. Damage ratio calculation is: DR= where: qt qa also: DR= = Jideal Jactual p−p wf p−p wf −∆p s Eq.p. 2.2qBµ ×s kh Eq. where transient pressure testing techniques may give questionable results concerning formation damage.A.J = = Theoretical flow rate without damage Actual flow rate observed qt qa Eq. in an otherwise productive interval.
therefore lose pressure less rapidly.p. Most reservoirs in actuality produce by a combination of all three mechanisms. gas-oil ratio peaks rapidly and then declines rapidly. . the investment will have already been made. figure 2. This does not usually present an insurmountable problem as a field of any considerable size will require a minimum number of wells to be drilled in any case to define the reservoir.e. In a dissolved gas drive reservoir without any artificial pressure maintenance technique. establish the detailed geological picture regarding zone continuity and locate oil-water and gas-oil contacts.2. pressure declines rapidly. A gas drive reservoir’s primary pressure source is the expansion of a gas cap over the oil zone. therefore if development drilling proceeds on the basis of close spacing before the drive mechanism is identified. In a dissolved gas reservoir. i. A water drive reservoir’s principle pressure source is an external water hydrostatic pressure communicated to below the oil zone. and primary oil recovery is relatively low.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 24 OF 295 ENI S.7. these can be drilled at the appropriate spacing to maximise recovery with the least amount of wells. Well intervention or recompletion to shut-off up-structure intervals may control the gas-oil ratio. to systematically recover reservoir hydrocarbons. pressure declines less rapidly and gas-oil ratios increase as the gas cap expands into the up-structure well completion intervals. This is controlled by well interventions or re-completions to shut-off the water production or the well is shut-in. Well spacing. The effect of the drive mechanism on the producing characteristics must be evaluated in the completion design process. however the main factors concentrate on the reservoir itself and the procedure used to exploit hydrocarbon recovery. There are three basic drive mechanisms: • • • Dissolved gas Gas cap Water drive. Water drive reservoirs pressure remains high and gas-oil ratios are lower but downstructure well intervals quickly begin to produce water. show typical reservoir pressures versus production trends and gas-oil ratio production trends for the three basic drive mechanisms. In a gas cap drive reservoir.h. and also for later re-completions. Re-completing would not reduce the gas-oil ratio.g and figure 2. primary production results from existing pressure in the reservoir. Effects Of Reservoir Characteristics Reservoir Drive Mechanisms 0 REVISION In an oil reservoir. is fundamental and the cost of time. labour and materials consumed in the drilling are largely non-recoverable. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. Obviously many factors must be considered in developing a reservoir. the source of pressure is principally the liberation and expansion of gas from the oil phase as pressure is reduced. By careful planning when enough information is gained to determine the well locations. or well location.A. Gradually even the up-structure wells will water out to maximise oil recovery.
Reservoir Pressure Trends For Various Drive Mechanisms Figure 2.H .p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Many case histories are available to show problems resulting from reservoir development without having sufficient information about the stratigraphy of the reservoir.G .A. Figure 2.Gas-Oil Ratios Trends For Various Drive Mechanisms .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 25 OF 295 ENI S.
the wells in thin sands with a high angle of dip is likely to be more efficiently controlled by having the completion irregularly spaced and low to conform to the shape of the reservoir. Due to the low recovery by the primary drive mechanism.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 26 OF 295 ENI S. provided the rock is stratified. Completion intervals should be selected high on the structure to permit long production life while oil is displaced up to the completion intervals by invading water from below.A. Significant levels of water production are unavoidable in later field life when maximising production rates. A water reservoir in a thin sand with high angle of dip may best be developed with irregular well spacing because of the structural characteristics. A regular spacing can also be used for dissolved gas reservoirs with high angle of dip. Again completion intervals should be low in the structure to permit the gas cap to grow for maximum recovery and minimum gas production. . Such reservoirs are common where multiple this sands are found on a single structure and the oil column is only a fraction of the total productive relief. Gas cap drive reservoirs: Wells are generally spaced on a regular pattern where the sand is thick.p. some general statements can be made: Dissolved gas drive reservoirs: Well completions in reservoirs with low structural relief can be made in a regularly spaced pattern throughout the reservoir and. Regular spacing would place many completions too near the gas-oil contact. can be set low in the reservoir bed. Again the completion intervals should be structurally low because of the angle of dip and the exact sub-surface location would vary with well location on the structure. Like the dissolved gas drive reservoir. Water drive reservoirs: Wells can be spaced on a regular pattern on a thick sand and low angle of dip. Regular spacing of the wells may cause early water production and possible early abandonment in conjunction with reducing the drive effectiveness through excessive water production. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION With regard to drive mechanisms. the well locations must be changed quickly to take full advantage of the situation. In this scenario it would be expected that oil recovery would be greater with the minimum well investment as the oil will drain down-structure through time. some means of secondary recovery will almost certainly be required at some point in life of the reservoir and the initial well completion design should take this into account. If this is recognised after drilling begins. dip angle is low and gas cap is completely underlayed by oil.
This is demonstrated in figure 2. In thin beds or highly stratified beds. as described in the previous section is to complete water drive reservoirs high and for dissolved gas drive reservoir low on the structure to obtain an adequate number of wells without excess. Vertical staggering of the completion can be effected during development to obtain proportionate depletion of the various strata.I . it will probably be necessary to stagger the completion intervals in various members of the reservoir to be sure that each is drained properly. Most sandstone reservoirs were originally laid down as stratified layers of varying porosity and permeability. If the reservoir is stratified. or water from a water basin. Figure 2.Irregular Water Encroachment and Breakthrough . especially if the interval is short and production rates are high.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 27 OF 295 ENI S. Single string/single zone completions are preferred to facilitate thorough flushing for higher recovery and flexibility of re-completion to control reservoir performance. is a distinct possibility. Completions with more than one zone are termed multi-zone completions and are required for long completion intervals for obtaining sufficient volumes of production. Additional distribution of intervals in the various members can then be made during later well interventions on the basis of data obtained.A.j. ‘fingering’ of the free gas down from a gas cap. Fluids from such reservoirs will flow through the various layers at different restrictions to flow and often there are impervious beds between the layers so that fluid cannot flow between the bed to bed. However this is only practical if the reservoir is uniform. Similar assumptions can be made for carbonate and even reef type reservoirs which results in reservoirs of a highly stratified nature.8. Reservoir Homogeneity 0 REVISION The general procedures. experience and operating conditions.2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2.p. intervals should be produced independently wherever practical (usually determined by economics). either by shale breaks or by variations in permeability. To maximise recovery.i and figure 2.
the changes occurring in the reservoir samples. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2. 2. the information is less complex. by laboratory tests. The surface samples are then recombined in the laboratory in proportions equal the gas-oil ratio measured at the separator during well testing. Two general methods are used to obtain samples of reservoir oil for laboratory examination purposes. and to measure. . depends upon the type of gas and the nature of the problem.1. HYDROCARBON DATA The practical approach to the study of reservoir fluid behaviour is to anticipate pressure and temperature changes in the reservoir and at surface during production.A. Information concerning the characteristics and behaviour of gas needed for gas reservoirs.High GOR Production by Encroachment of Gas 2.J . by means of subsurface samplers and by obtaining surface samples of separator liquid and gas. If the gas is wet with no retrograde condensation.3. If retrograde condensation is involved. it may require numerous tests and measurements.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 28 OF 295 ENI S. or if dry gas. Oil Property Correlation Several generalisations of oil sample data are available to permit correlations of oil properties to be made (refer to the Compant Well Test Manual for sampling techniques).p.3. The results of these tests then provide the basic fluid data for estimates of fluid recovery by various methods of reservoir operations and also to estimate reservoir parameters through transient pressure testing.
such as gravel packs for unconsolidated sands. Alternatively. the outflow performance can be determined which takes into consideration the relationship between the surface flowrate and pressure drop in the tubing.A. Flow behaviour in the near wellbore region may cause a dramatic effect on the IPR curve which results in greatly reduced flow capability. RESERVOIR/PRODUCTION FORECAST 0 REVISION To obtain the optimum performance from a well. Some completion designs to deal with reservoir conditions. The inflow performance relationship (IPR) provides the flow potential of the reservoir into the wellbore against the resistance to flow of the formation and near wellbore region. shape and permeability of the producing zone and the properties of the produced fluids.k which requires continuous repetition during field life to account for changing conditions. Two phase flow. is mainly caused by the drilling and completion practices. The results of the outflow performance analysis are usually produced graphically depicting how bottom hole flowing pressure (BHFP). effective fluid density. in undamaged near wellbore regions also reduce the IPR curve.k. or pump intake pressure. Good drilling and completion practices can or may minimise this damage allowing use of the idealised IPR curve to be used for completion design. These curves are termed tubing performance curves (TPC) and the point of intersection is the natural flowing point as demonstrated earlier in figure 2. The process of this analysis is shown in figure 2. analysis of the outflow performance requires predictions of phase behaviour. varies with flowrate against a fixed back-pressure which is normally the wellhead or separator pressure. The theoretical IPR is an idealistic assumption of flow performance without pressure drop due to skin effect in the near wellbore region and governed only by the size. The determination of the well’s performance entails analysing the following: • • • • In-flow performance Near wellbore performance and design Multiphase flow of tubing performance Artificial lift. friction losses and flowing temperatures.4.p. will also cause reduced IPR curves which must be anticipated during the design phase. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 29 OF 295 ENI S. Once the IPR is completed. it is first necessary to determine its full potential and which way this can be fully exploited within any technical or economic constraints. The prediction of this relationship is complicated by the nature of multi-phase fluid flow. This is characterised by a damaged IPR curve and the amount of damage or skin effect. Hence. velocity effects in gas wells. The basic theory of this is described in this section along with some simplified IPR relationships from observed field data. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. stimulation procedures which can provide a negative skin are desirable as this increases production. high rate or high GOR oil wells.
Process of Determining Optimum Well Performance Selecting.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 30 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.A. the tubing size is necessary to optimise the well performance over the life of the well and should include the potential benefits of artificial lift systems and/or stimulation to reduce near wellbore skin effects.K . .p. or optimising.
p.1. however for larger projects. ∆p=p R −p wf Eq. is: J= where: q = Total liquid flow rate at surface under stock tank conditions (14. The use of IPRs generated from reservoir simulation models is also described as is the technique for the applications of the various techniques for predicting inflow performance. the flow rate is directionally proportional to the drawdown. an empirical expression can be validated and applied. o 60 F) q p R − p wf Eq. In situations which allow the use of a straight line IPR.M . psi.7psia. 2. 2. psi Bottom-hole flowing pressure. reservoir simulation is usually employed. With a straight line IPR.4. PI defined as J by the API.g. psi Reservoir pressure. the more appropriate it is to use theoretical radial flow equation. e. The linear relationship can be substantiated from theoretical arguments for a single incompressible fluid (i. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. above the bubble point). As more data becomes available. Essentially the less data which is available. Inflow Perfomance 0 REVISION This section addresses the fundamental principles of inflow performance for oil and gas wells.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 31 OF 295 ENI S. low drawdowns and damaged wells.Straight Line IPR The simplest IPR equation assumes that inflow into a well is proportional to the pressure differential between the reservoir and the wellbore which is termed the ‘drawdown’. However.e. it has been verified that the straight line approach also provides the accuracy needed for well performance calculations in situations which exceed the theoretical basis.L where: ∆p pR pwf = = = Drawdown pressure.A. the constant of proportionality is termed the productivity index (PI). Oil Well .
Oil PI. bbl/stb Drainage radius. dimensionless (S ’= S + Dq) . J can be calculated directly from bottom-hole gauges in well test results or estimated pressures from simulation studies. 2.N where: h ko µo Bo ro rw S’ = = = = = = Net pay thickness. or stabilised flow.L . is that well is producing in pseudo-steady state or steady state flow conditions. md Reservoir fluid viscosity.2µ o B o 1n e rw −0. also needs to be treated with caution as Production Engineers and Reservoir Engineers assume different basis for J. as in most well tests. ft Wellbore radius. ft Effective oil permeability.p.75+S′ Eq. Before this the well produces under transient conditions. Production Engineers relate J to gross liquid production (oil and water) whereas Reservoir Engineers relate it to oil productivity.A. cp Reservoir formation volume factor. Productivity Index.Straight Line IPR or Productivity Index J The assumption of stable inflow performance relationship. result in higher estimates of productivity than when under stabilised conditions. J. can also be derived theoretically from Darcy’s radial flow equation: Jo = k oh r 141. ft Total effective skin.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 32 OF 295 ENI S. J. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.
Deviation from the theoretical ideal PI (i. high rate or high GOR oil wells. As water saturation increases. have natural fractures or are highly deviated. Figure 2.M. Ko obviously decreases and as does Jo. S’ = 0) should be expected as a result of additional pressure losses in the near wellbore area due to damage. The PI is very useful for describing the potential of various wells as it combines all rock and fluid properties as well as geometrical issues in a single constant making it unnecessary to consider these properties individually.e.Effect of Damage And Fractures on a Well’s PI .A. fractures. increased gas saturation in oil wells. Straight line IPRs with PIs greater than the ideal are typical of wells with negative skin such as when they have been stimulated. producing below the bubble point. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION This assumes pseudo-steady state flow from a well in the centre of a circular reservoir and it is worth noting that ko is the effective permeability to oil for an oil PI.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 33 OF 295 ENI S. Damaged wells with positive skins have straight line IPRs with PIs less than the ideal PI. changes in radial flow geometry and non-Darcy pressure losses due to high flow velocities in gas wells.p.
8 wf p R 2 Eq. hence the PI J. Once the BHFP falls below the bubble point pressure.O Qmax is a theoretical value sometimes referred to as Absolute Open Flow (AOF) of the oil well. This means the true IPR is curved and.2 wf p qmax R q where: pR pwf q qmax = = = = Reservoir pressure.p. He also presented an approximation using the expression: p =1−0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Oil Well .N . Vogel used a computer programme to model a variety of solution gas reservoirs and developed a generalised IPR reference curve to account for the two phase flow effects below the bubble point.A. decreases with increasing drawdown (slopes 1 and 2 in figure 2.o).Typical IPR Curve for Saturated Reservoir . 2. psi Bottom-hole flowing pressure. gas saturation builds up around the wellbore which reduces the permeability to liquid which of course reduces well productivity at that particular drawdown compared to predicted by linear PI. Figure 2.Vogel’s Two Phase Flow IPR 0 REVISION The previous straight line IPR does not hold with two phase flow (gas and liquid) in the reservoir. stb/d p −0. psi Liquid production. stb/d Maximum liquid production rate when pwf = 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 34 OF 295 ENI S. There may also be some non-Darcy gas flow effects in wells producing below the bubble point.
p. Figure 2. Procedures to correct for skin are available.O . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Vogel’s equation has been validated through observed field data particularly on pumped wells with high drawdowns where pwf approaches zero.A.Vogel’s IPR Reference Curve .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 35 OF 295 ENI S. The model used to develop Vogel’s reference curve did not include skin effects which would tend to straighten the IPR curve.
8 wf p b 2 Eq.T .Q If water production is involved. 2.8 wf p R 2 Eq.2 wf p R p −0. This has been published by Brown. For this.S If oil and water both flow from the same zone then the Vogel equation is used for the gross flow rate: p q o +q w =(q o +q o max )1−0. psi p −0.2 wf p R Eq. it is dependant upon whether it is produced from the same interval or others.A.8 wf p R 2 Eq.R p −0. a straight line IPR is drawn above the bubble point and the curved IPR signifies the two phase flow below this point.2 wf p 1 .8 b where: pb = Bubble point pressure. Vogel’s equation is combined with the PI to develop a general IPR equation.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Where inflow relationship passes through the bubble point. When the BHFP is above the bubble point use the normal straight line equation: q o =J(p R −p wf ) and when it drops below the bubble point use the modified Vogel equation: p Jp qo =J(p R −p wf )+ b 1−0. 2. As oil is normally produced from a different zone to the water. 2. 2. the following equations are applied: q w =J(p R −p wf ) p q o =q o max 1−0.P Eq. 2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 36 OF 295 ENI S.
This non-Darcy flow.Combined Straight Line IPR and Vogel IPR Oil Wells . 2.Generalised IPR Curves As described earlier. Fetkovich recognised that many oil wells could be handled in the same way as gas wells using the curved IPR: q o =C p R −p wf 2 ( 2 n ) Eq. This is where Darcy’s law which is good for moderate to low flow rates is affected by high velocities. or turbulence.p.5 to 1.A.0) .U where: C n = = Linear deliverability coefficient Deliverability exponent (0. is sometimes the most dominant factor especially for gravel packs and high rate gas-liquid ratio wells.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 37 OF 295 ENI S. curvature of the IPR curve is not solely due to the reasons highlighted above but also due to rate dependent skin. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.P .
2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Golan and Whitson showed how this relationship could be expressed in a similar form to Vogel’s reference curve as: p = 1− wf q max p R q 2 n Eq. for two values of the exponent.W .Q . however it requires four points at widely different flow rates to maximise the benefit of this method. If such data is not available. It is recommended that n be assumed to be 1 where no multi-rate data is available.p. n is considered as the means to account for non-Darcy flow but there is no theoretical technique for finding it as it is a function of the rate used during testing. n should be assumed as 1. 2. If multi-rate data is 2 2 available then a log-log plot of q versus (pR .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 38 OF 295 ENI S. Blount and Jones presented an alternative generalised IPR equation which was an extension to the Forcheimer equation to include the non-Darcy flow effects: p R −p wf =aq+bq 2 Eq. the Vogel and Fetkovich IPRs are similar.Vogel And Fetkovich IPR Curve Comparisons Use of this approach will provide better results than Vogel’s method.A.q. It is seen that when n = 1. Figure 2.V This equation is compared with Vogel’s reference curve in figure 2.pwf ) will give a straight line with a slope of 1/n. n.
Standing presented a method of predicting future IPR curves by the equation: k ro µ o B o future = k ro µ o B o present Eq. where two phase flow effects are negligible) . The relative permeability to oil will also decrease due to increased gas saturation further shifting the curve downwards. can also be found theoretically but requires a knowledge of the turbulence factor. which is rarely measured in the laboratory. S.2µ o B o re ln kh rw −0.Y J * future J * present and: q future =J * future p p R future 1−0. The effects of increasing water influx on the gross PI. 2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 39 OF 295 ENI S. a.A.Predicting Future IPRs Estimates of future IPR curves throughout the life of the reservoir are frequently required for production forecasting and planning artificial lift designs. Again. 2.2.pwf)/q versus q gives a straight line with a slope of b and an interception of a.75+S Eq. can be determined theoretically for a well producing at pseudo-steady state flow in the middle of a circular reservoir: a= 141. skin damage during remedial operations and reduced contribution from reduced pay through plugging back. described earlier in Section 2. the reservoir pressure will decline against time. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The Darcy flow coefficient. 2. β. if multi-rate test data is available. shifting the IPR curve downwards resulting in a decline of the production rate and causing flow instability. In very high permeability wells.Z where: J* = PI at minimal drawdown (i.2 wf p R future −0.X The skin term.e. it takes no account of completion non-Darcy effects such as inefficient perforating. coefficient b can be much greater than b and perforating efficiency (shots/ft and penetration) is a very important to productivity. both a and b can be determined using a plot of (q R . b.8 p wf p Rfuture 2 Eq. In solution drive reservoirs. mobilisation of fines.p. Similarly. is relative to all non-rate dependent skin contributions. The liberation of gas also affects the oil fluid properties. Oil Wells . etc. leads to a significant increase in skin due to scaling. The other non-Darcy flow coefficient.
present p Rpresent = q max .future p R future m Eq.66 have been found in actual field studies by Eickmeir. critical that well tests are conducted up to or above the rate of intended production. the simpler approach like Fetkovich relation for predicting qmax in Vogel’s reference curve. The constant C is also found from the log-log plot and varies as a function of flow time until it reaches a constant pseudo-steady state. which in modified form is: q max .5 gives the best fit to the gas drive IPR curves by Vogel while values of 1. 2. The problem with this isochronal test is the time required to reach stabilised flow in tight gas sands which could be months.A. To obtain a value of n. . Relative permeabilities and fluid saturations are determined from special core analysis data and reservoir material balance analysis (using either analytical calculations or a reservoir simulation model). 2. A 2 2 log-log plot of (pR .g. In some instances C can be calculated from reservoir parameters. n .pwf ) versus q is conducted from which the slope gives the value of 1/n. in the equation must be estimated from one of a number of well test methods (e. It is. Gas Wells . While this method is widely used throughout the industry.AA It may be shown theoretically that exponent m could vary between 1 and 3. An exponent of 2.5 for fully turbulent flow. Obviously at low to moderate rates there is little turbulence and n is close to 1. it is normal to test the well at three rates at a fixed period of time followed by a single rate until stabilisation is reached to obtain C.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 40 OF 295 ENI S. If data for Standing’s equation are not available. it is not recommended for estimating IPRs as it lacks the theoretical basis and other rigorous equations are available.0 for laminar flow to 0. Fluid viscosities and volume are determined from PVT correlations. however in high rates this is highly improbable and makes the IPR projections almost impossible and erring on the optimistic side. isochronal test) due to there being no accepted theoretical basis available.p. therefore. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION J* at present conditions is established by carrying out a well test or theoretically. The exponent. using kh and S from build-up data but is only applicable if flow is laminar (n = 1).Simplified Deliverability Relationship Rawlins and Schellardt developed a simplified gas well back-pressure equation which relates gas flow rate to the BHFP and is the well Known AOF equation. This exponent can vary between 1. p g =C p R −p wf 2 ( 2 n ) Eq. Eickmeier first proposed an expression based on Fetkovich’s work.BB This equation was developed empirically using several hundred multi-rate gas well test data and not by theory but satisfactorily describes the behaviour of the gas well tests considered.
The expression below is based on the work of Forchemier and is: p R −p wf = Aqg + Aqg 2 Eq. as for oil wells. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Gas Wells .000psi when µz is proportional to pressure. it must be accounted for properly and a theoretical based method is more often used in modern engineering. 2. A and B. hence: m(p R )−m(p wf )= Aq g +Bqg where: A = 1422 T re ln k gh rw TD k gh −0. It will be seen that the gas IPR is curved even when the non-Darcy term is 0. requires knowledge of the correct turbulence factor.DD Gas viscosity.p. Between 2. The non-Darcy skin is also frequently accounted for by using: m(p R )−m(p wf )=1422 q g T re ln k gh rw −0.CC The Darcy and non-Darcy coefficients.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 41 OF 295 ENI S. For most gas compositions this is valid only at pressures less than approx 2. The non-Darcy coefficient B can also be calculated theoretically but. an equation similar to eq.Generalised Deliverability 0 REVISION Due to the shortcomings of the back-pressure equation described above and since turbulence which is common in gas wells.pwf )/q versus q. In this range the correct inflow equation is written in terms of pseudo-pressures: m(p)=2 where: µg z = = ∫ p dp pb µ z g p Eq. are determined in a similar manner as the 2 2 generalised IPR equation for an oil well.000psi and 3.A.m(pwf)/q versus q to find a value of B from the slope and to check the value of A from the intercept.75+S+Dqg Eq. 2.FF . there is curvature in the plot of µz against p making neither approach applicable. normally pg and pwf for inflow calculations. eq.000psi. cp Gas deviation factor and where the integration limits are substituted with the pressure range being considered. 2.w can be used.000psi or if drawdown pressure changes are small which is the case in high permeability wells above 3.cc is not precisely correct since inherent in its derivation is an assumption that the product of µ and z is constant.75+S 2 Eq. 2. 2.EE B = 1422 Here the results of the multi-rate test would be plotted as m(pg) . however the straight line plot is (pR . β. 2.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 42 OF 295 ENI S. but also to generate IPR curves for determination of how current and future well IPRs will vary across the field. artificial lift or use of compression. workovers and movement of fines will have on near wellbore performance causing changes of skin during the life of the project. WORs and GORs to obtain production targets. To obtain the best use of simulation studies. Outflow performance curves should be derived from an accurate computer programme as some programmes are not rigorous in the handling of two phase flow. If a PI is entered in rather than skin.p. With the use of simulation the production engineer is able not only to predict pressures. 2. predict turbulence and two phase flow effects by the use of total skin S’ inclusive of near wellbore and rate dependent skin effects. mscf/d o Reservoir temperature. a model needs to be set up by the reservoir engineer with input from the production engineer. etc. The value of D (Refer to eq. Long term effects from well interventions. This information is derived from well test results and is input into the models theoretical IPR equations as skin factor.. Typically the following should be addressed: • • Assumptions on the minimum permissible value of Pwf as dictated by the outflow performance altered by varying water-cut. it will be necessary to correct it for the grid block’s size and shape. md 0 REVISION As modern test analysis use computer software.4.2. Reservoir Simulation For IPR Curves Reservoir simulation is commonly used in the development. well radius. Using expected off takes. the pseudo-pressure values are readily available. Future stimulation or any damaging effects need to be considered. planning and reservoir management of many fields today. F The sum of all non-rate dependent skin Rate dependent skin Effective gas permeability. • • • • . 2. therefore there is a growing trend to use gas pseudo pressures for predicting gas well IPRs at all pressure conditions although the pressure squared method has a use in the field for convenience. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 where: D qg T S D kg is = = = = = Derived from well tests Gas flow rate.ff) can also be directly entered into some simulators. Variations between the ideal IPRs and actual IPRs which may be expected from the undrilled well locations.A.
have been considered. They may also be able to advise on possible sudden changes in water cut or gas production due to conning or cusping. pressure and mechanical data.p. saturations. skins. After using measured IPR curves. When and as new well data from log and RFT/DST results becomes available. Ensure that proposed completion effects on near wellbore performance. It is also used to determine the sensitivity of production to drawdown and optimise perforating strategy. production rates and wellbore saturations at various time steps. in extrapolating the shape of the IPR and determining the effects by well operations and production may have on skin. e. the model needs to be updated to include actual log and test results. gravel packing. then the model can be used to evaluate the effect of depletion. reservoir quality. partial completion. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The results from such field models will provide the reservoir pressure. Often more reliable predictions in shape of the well IPR can be achieved by engineers using single well models to study the probability of water or gas conning or to model transient well test results. . deviation. etc.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 43 OF 295 ENI S. water breakthrough and saturation changes on production and used for artificial lift studies. programmes and production forecast. As the use of full field reservoir simulation requires many assumptions and simplifications are made to manage the problem. however. Input on skin is realistic for the period covered. revisions can be made to the completion designs. From this. however judgement is required when using these results. etc.g. Whether rates have been modified for downtime due to maintenance. Care must be exercised. therefore the predicted flow rates should not be considered as precise and the relevant reservoir engineer should be consulted to establish the accuracy. it should be used to update the generalised IPR to reflect the actual pay interval. If the reservoir pressure refers to grid block or to the drainage area. Once this achieved. stimulation. in particular check: • • • • • Confirm if non-Darcy and multi-phase flow effects have been taken into consideration. It is extremely important that production engineers understand that the uncertainties involved and do not give greater reliability on model studies than reasonably can be expected. workover or sales contracts.A.
Jones Pseudo-pressure equation (m(pR) .IPR Selection Based on Reservoir Type The appropriate technique will also depend on the reservoir data that is available which is function of the development stage. These are summarised again in the following table: Type Of Well Undersaturated oil Saturated oil Damaged saturated oil Undersaturated oil at pR but saturated at pwf Wells producing oil and water Producing Conditions Pwf > pb Pwf < pb Pwf < pb S > +3 PR > pb Pwf < pb WC > 0 Use as above for the appropriate oil and linear PI or radial flow equation for water Linear PI or radial flow equation Blount .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 44 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. IPR Selection 0 REVISION In developing representative IPRs for a field.4. the appropriate IPR model needs to be selected based upon the anticipated production conditions.A. The selection of an IPR model based on this is given in table 2.Jones or radial flow equation with turbulence Blount .m(pwf) = Aq + Bq ) Omit B if only single rate data available Table 2.A .b. 2 Recommended IPR Model Linear PI or radial flow equation Vogel or Fetkovich Standing or linear PI if very damaged (S > 7) Composite Vogel and linear Water zone High rate undersaturated oil High rate saturated oil Gas wells WC > 90% q > 25stb/d/ft q > 25stb/d/ft Pwf < pb .p.3.
use for future IPRs. - Reservoir Model IPRs - Empirical IPRs Validate interpretation Validate results. Primary method. Highlight damage risks. Estimate skin and determine cause. Validate results. - Primary method. Validate reservoir model results. Evaluate completion results. Primary method for current IPRs. small field/single well Development plan Primary method. Primary method for current IPRs. Validate results and skin assumptions. Validate results. Optimising Operations/ Workover Well performance assessment Field studies (forecasts/ artificial lift. Validate results. lift/ compression) Workover planning Revised development plan Predict future IPR Predict future IPR Primary method. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Radial Flow Equation Technical Evaluations Prospect evaluation Exploration well results Development Planning Conceptual design.IPR Selection Based on Development Stage . Identify variations geographically with time. Detailed design. Highlight damage risks.p. Highlight damage risks. Evaluate completion methods. Table 2. large field Conceptual design. Validate results. Highlight damage risks. Guestimate potential. If available. large field Detailed design. small field/single well Primary method.A.B . Extrapolate test results. Highlight damage risks. Primary method. Validate results. Define model input Primary method.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 45 OF 295 ENI S. Primary method for post workover IPR Primary method for post workover IPR.
PVT Relationships With most modern software programmes there are four methods of obtaining PVT properties for oil wells which are listed in order of preference. Each model uses differing methods to determine the densities and viscosities for each phase and interfacial surface tension. In the vast majority of cases there are sufficient data to use the tuned black oil model correlation method. The methods for predicting pressure and temperature drops are addressed in the following sections.4. Refer to the following sections. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2.4. PVT Relationships There are two PVT methods used in the prediction of mass transfer between oil and gas. Outflow Performance Tubing Performance 0 REVISION Predicting fluid flow behaviour in tubing involves combining the basic fundamentals of mass momentum and energy conservation with complex mass transfer phenomena for multicomponent hydrocarbon mixtures.p. Flowing Temperature prediction. In general the black oil model is easier to use than the compositional model. results in utilising the following interrelated topics: • • • Phase behaviour. Pressure drop prediction. The black oil model assumes a constant composition for the liquid phase and accounts for mass transfer using the parameters gas-oil ratio and formation volume factor. the ‘black oil’ model and the ‘compositional’ model. Tuned black oil model empirical correlations.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 46 OF 295 ENI S. Pressure drop is determined using empirical and semi-empirical correlations and carried out on computer software programmes. The relationship between pressure and temperature drop in wells and PVT behaviour is complex.A. Application of these concepts. • • • • Interpolate directly from experimental data. Oil Well . . Untuned black oil model empirical correlations. Interpolate from compositional simulation data. The variable composition model requires performing vapour-liquid equilibrium (VLE) or ‘flash’ calculations to determine the amount and composition of both the gas and liquid phases.
in gas wells it has amore significant effect. Use black oil model parameters generated from results of compositional simulation if it has been performed for incidental reasons. However. b) c) d) Gas/Gas Condensate Wells . i.e.g. Profile based on conservation of energy that utilises complex wellbore heat transfer calculations. High pour point crude oil wells. Some wells have produced fluids with special properties that are very sensitive to temperatures and more complex heat transfer calculations are required. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The approach adopted when choosing the appropriate method for each application should be: a) Use the black oil model flash vaporisation lab data if they are available. Although the linear approach is unrealistic.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 47 OF 295 ENI S. PVT properties for gas and gas condensate wells must be described with the compositional model.A.PVT Relationships In software programmes. constant temperature throughout the length of the string. Profile based on a simplified version of the complete rigorous calculation involving correlating parameter for which there is unavailable information but with data which are available. . Use the tuned empirical correlations for black oil model variables if the appropriate although limited experimental data are available. e. Profile based on a specified heat transfer coefficient. but only if experimental data is not available. The linear profile is the most widely used due to the complexity of heat transfer calculations in conjunction with the lack of sufficient measured data. reservoir or production reasons. Wells in which hydrate formation can occur. the error has been found to be less than 15% in overall temperature drop in typical wells. Do not use differential separation data since it is not representative of the vaporisation that occurs in the tubing. These are: • • • Gas condensate wells with retrograde condensate. Do not use untuned black oil model empirical correlations unless the data available cannot justify a more rigorous method. Profile based on adiabatic heat transfer. Some software programmes. Black oil models parameters should never be used to predict PVT properties for gas or gas condensate systems. Temperature Drop Calculation Predicting the temperature loss in the wellbore as a function of depth and time is necessary to determine PVT properties for use in calculating pressure drop. temperature profiles may be specified in five ways: • • • • • Linear profile based on measured or assumed wellhead and bottom-hole temperatures.
Eq. Gas and oil phases normally flow at different speeds which is the phenomenon referred to as slippage. 2. The hydrostatic head is the most predominant component of the pressure gradient in oil wells. p vdv dp = g c dL dL ACC is the pressure gradient caused by fluid acceleration.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 48 OF 295 ENI S. 2. Flow patterns are governed primarily by the flow rates of each phase. In multi-phase systems. 2. The equation consists of three components and can be expressed as follows: dp dp dp dp = + + dL dL HYD dL FR dL ACC where: pgsin θ dp = gc dL HYD Eq. f pv 2 dp = dL FR 2g c D is the pressure gradient caused by wall friction. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Pressure Drop Calculation 0 REVISION Calculating pressure drop in tubing involve numerical integration of the steady-state pressure gradient equation over the entire tubing length.p.JJ Eq. therefore.II . referred to as the ‘flow pattern’ or ‘flow regime’. The amount of slippage that occurs is dependent upon the geometrical distribution of the gas and liquid in the pipe. the pressure is sensitive to the relative amounts of gas and liquid present at any location in the tubing. often accounting for 90% of the pressure drop.GG is the pressure gradient caused by the hydrostatic head of potential energy of the multiphase liquid. The friction losses are the remainder of the pressure loss and are more significant in gas wells with acceleration effects being negligible except when near to atmospheric pressure. This slippage causes an additional accumulation of liquid in the tubing which is termed liquid hold up. the variables such as p and v in the pressure gradient equation are normally averages for the gas and liquid phases present.HH Eq. 2. tubing diameter and to a lesser extent PVT properties.A.
Although bubble. Although many of these have been successful to some degree. therefore. diameter and PVT properties. it is possible for oil and gas wells to include all flow patterns in addition to single phase liquid and gas.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 49 OF 295 ENI S. no single method has been universally been accepted. referred to as mechanical models.20psi/ft 0. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Typical flow patterns are: • • • • • Annular flow Churn flow Slug flow Bubble flow Liquid flow. it is seen that prediction of pressure drop in multi-phase systems is complex and has led to the development of different correlations to be used. as listed in the previous section.36psi/ft 0. the total pressure drop is very dependent on flow pattern. Some software programmes use all the correlations available and the more recent promising mechanical models can be added. Flow Patterns Transition between the various flow patterns. Attempts were made to compensate for these errors in the equations by single empirical derived friction factor. The accuracy of existing correlations for predicting flow pattern. Typical pressure gradients in wells for different flow patterns are: • • • • Single phase oil Bubble flow Slug flow Mist flow = = = = 0. The most common maps are empirically derived with coordinates based on dimensionless groups of variables that include volumetric flow rates.0.p.1 . can be identified using flow pattern maps. More recent models developed based on flow mechanisms and conservation principles. 0 REVISION Considering the above. The early developed correlations assumed the flow as homogeneous mixtures ignoring liquid hold up effects. Subsequent correlations were developed to predict liquid hold up but most of these first required an empirical correlation or ‘map’ to predict the flow pattern. slug and churn floe predominate in oil wells. liquid hold up pressure gradient is limited by the ranges of data used in their development and no single method can be applied universally. offer more potential for accurate predictions but these are not readily accepted as standard design methods as yet. it is obvious that the pressure at each point in the well and.A.2psi/ft Hence.25psi/ft 0.
C .8 110.404 1.c presents the overall results below: Absolute Average Error 101. Covier and Fogarasi (1972) Beggs and Brill (1973).3 102. RPC 1.7 Table 2. performed using the TUFFP well databank consisting of 1775 flowing well surveys covering a broad range of production variables and pressure loss methods were also evaluated for each flow pattern.6 134.3 12.5 33.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 50 OF 295 ENI S. Oil Well Correlations Oil well correlations for predicting pressure gradients in oil wells have been published and those most widely accepted in the Industry are: • • • • • Duns and Ros (1963) Hagedorn and Brown (1967) Orkiszewski (1967) Aziz. flow pattern and basic flow mechanisms are considered.2 Relative Performance Factor.8 41.s. As illustrated in figure 2.7 190.8 Standard Deviation 163.p.9 116.3 -28.198 1. Validation and actual field data are the only means of choosing a pressure loss method but this is not available at the time of designing the completions. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Classification Of Methods 0 REVISION Published methods of multi-phase flow pressure gradients in wells can be placed into one of three general categories based on the assumptions from which the method was developed: • • • • Homogeneous flow correlations where slippage and flow pattern are not considered.3 217.r and figure 2.4 -20.9 273. Mechanised models where slippage. table 2.178 1.9 151.132 1.000 1.597 1.4 207.666 Method Ansari Hagbr Dunros Aziz Begbril Orkis Mukbr Average Error 9.9 178. however any one of these may be successful in a given field.3 159. Slip flow correlations where slippage is considered but not flow pattern.Evaluation of Pressure Loss Methods Using TUFFP Well Databank .2 78. these correlations predict different pressure drops for the same application. Ansari recently performed an evaluation of the most widely used correlations and his own proposed mechanistic model.4 177. Flow pattern dependent correlations where liquid hold up and flow pattern are considered..A.
d. Figure 2.c is not appropriate as the best statistical results do not guarantee the best performance for a specific application. The applicability of the various methods is compared in table 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Selecting the best prediction method from table 2.Comparison Lift Curves for High Gas-Oil Ratio Well .A.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 51 OF 295 ENI S.R . The choice must be made on experience.
S . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.Comparison of Lift Curves for Low Gas-Oil Ratio Well .p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 52 OF 295 ENI S.A.
Should be avoided unless well is highly deviated. Tends to under-predict pressure drop. Aziz et al (!972) Flow Pattern Dependent Brill Flow Pattern Variable depending on version Poor Laboratory and field Laboratory Oil.A.D. Optimistic. tends to under-predict pressure drop.p. Gas Flow Pattern Dependent Fair Some Hagedorn and Brown data. Does not predict a TPC minimum. Hagedorn and Brown with Griffith Bubble and restriction on hold up Kleyweg et al Occidental mod (1983) Orkiszewski (1967) Flow Pattern Dependent Field experiment Oil. air Does not predict a TCP minimum. Developed for deviated wells but tends to significantly over-predict pressure drop. Conservative. water Beggs (1973) and Beggs and Brill with Palmer Cornish (1976) Flow Pattern Dependent Homogeneous Fair Good in some flow patterns Good Laboratory Field (annular flow) Laboratory . Poor in bubble flow. Developed to optimise gas lift in o highly deviated wells (>70 ) in Claymore field.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 53 OF 295 ENI S. can cause convergence problems in computing algorithm. water Oil. water. Conservative. water. . gas. Usually not applicable for completion design. water Hagedorn Brown (1965) and Slip Flow Good in some flow patterns Good Oil. Good where several flow patterns exist. Developed for deviated wells but tends to over-predict. gas Table 2.Applicability of Pressure Loss Prediction Methods Gas And Gas Condensate Correlations For gas and gas condensate wells the following methods are frequently used: • • • • Cullender and Smith Single phase gas with modified gravities Multi-phase flow correlations Gray correlation. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Method Ansari 1963) (TUFFP Category Mechanistic Model Accuracy Good Data N/A Fluids N/A Application/Comments Appears a little conservative. Should not be used except for similar conditions. Tends to over-predict pressure drop. gas Air. water. Gives consistent results for all flow patterns and TCP minimum. water. air Slip Flow Field Oil. This is the preferred correlation in the absence of other data. Should be used with caution. Liquid hold up prediction can be less than for no slip flow. Needs to be verified through use. Optimistic. Tends to over-predict pressure drop. water. experiment al plus field data Field experiment Air. Gas Duns (1963) and Ros Flow Pattern Dependent Oil. field Oil.
behaviour is very dependent on geometry and a simple Bernoulli type equation with a discharge coefficient is recommended. as the difference between the predicted pressure drops is generally greater than the effect of the deviation itself. When a multiphase mixture flows through a restriction. These methods have been reviewed by Lea and Tighe.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 54 OF 295 ENI S. simple empirical correlations such as the Gilbert equation are sufficiently accurate. For sub-critical flow. Flow pattern and liquid hold up is very dependent on deviation angle. it is recommended that tubing size be assessed using these methods in addition to lift curve methods and that the most conservative approach be adopted. . vertical correlations perform accurately enough for wells o greater than 45 . the phase velocities dramatically increase. either the Beggs and Brill correlation or a mechanistic model would be necessary. accounting for deviation by simply using the sine in the hydrostatic component of the pressure gradient equation may not be adequate in these cases.p. In any study. wells can quickly ‘load up’ over a few weeks if it is not correctly sized. For wells producing high gas-water or gas-condensate ratios.A. For critical flow. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As with oil wells. critical flow occurs. even in low liquid rates. Care is needed in the selection of tubing in that. For wells with o deviations up to 45 from vertical. Effect Of Deviation Angle Nowadays most wells of interest to operators are directional or deviated wells. similarly. In gas wells. The geometry of these restrictions varies from a simple reduced diameter axial flow path to a tortuous complex path. differing correlations should not be used for different deviations. the Gray correlation is generally recommended although the Ansari model mat prove to be even more accurate since it includes a good model for predicting pressure gradient in annular flow which is the most predominant in gas wells. Effect Of Restrictions Most oil and gas wells contain some types of flow control devices in the completion which choke flow. Although any of the correlations can be used. The accuracy of pressure drop calculations in these circumstances using correlations developed for vertical is obviously extremely questionable. liquid loading can also be predicted using simplified methods presented with Turner et al which are independent of pressure drop calculations. the Gray correlation is recommended based on the work with ‘Reinicke et al’ but results should be used with caution. If this is the case. validation with field data is the only reliable method for determining the most appropriate correlation and. this is never usually available at the time that the completions are designed. If these reach sonic velocity.
5.Combining IPR and TPC Curves .. GLR. etc. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Effect Of Erosion 0 REVISION Erosion in completions occurs when there are high velocities and if there are solids particles in the flow stream. reservoir pressure. 2. Figure 2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 55 OF 295 ENI S. in turn.T . to determine the threshold velocities for erosion to occur in piping systems but the validity of this for all conditions is questionable.4. The API have published a method in API RP 14E. This section describes this analysis.p. Changing the system parameters like the tubing ID. be forecast and analysed for cost/benefit of the completion options. The most common points for erosion is where there are restrictions which cause increased velocities. they must be presented in the same plot from which the intersection of the lines can be used to predict the flow rate of a well at given set of stable flow conditions (Refer to figure 2. Flow Rate Prediction Following the establishment of both the IPR and TPC.A. Systematically varying the system parameters allows comparison of the incremental effects on production and these can. Continuing in this manner provides information on which decisions can be made on optimum well configuration or optimum operating conditions. will effect either or both the IPR and TPC and in consequence alters the production rate.t ).
the gas escapes from the well and the hydrostatic gradient approaches the static pressure of the liquid. or GLR. the well will tend to head and flow at unstable conditions due to the cyclic build up of liquid and periodic slug lifting by accumulated pressure of the trapped gas. occurs due to the gas and liquid phase velocities differ at low flow rates. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Natural Flow Point 0 REVISION The characteristic ‘J’ shape of the TPC means there can be several possible intersections with the IPR as shown in figure 2.Combined IPR and TPC Curves Under Unstable Conditions . i. this is generally not a problem. The optimum tubing size.A. as the flow rate increases.v. the well will flow at a stable rate defined as the natural flow point. will give an intersection well to the right of the pmin and out of the flat portion of the TCP curve. At low flow rates. the IPR and TPC curves intersect well to the right of the minimum and. the hydrostatic component in the total pressure drop predominates. Pmin.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 56 OF 295 ENI S. In figure 2. On the other hand. the start of unstable flow conditions is rarely known especially with large size tubing. The TCP. As liquid velocities tend toward zero. Because of the inaccuracies of the two phase flow correlations and the difficulty in obtaining reliable data in this region.e.t through figure 2. If the intersection is either close to or to the left of the minimum (Refer to Figure).p. under these conditions.U.t. As the usual aim is to keep to the right of Pmin. slippage occurs. but without incurring excessive friction losses. the hydrostatic component reduces due the gas lift effect while the friction component increases until the minimum is reached when the friction pressure drop exactly offsets the decrease in hydrostatic pressure drop. Figure 2.
Where the curves intersect at two rates (Refer to figure 2. it is necessary to kick the well off quickly. Where the IPR and TCP curves intersect close to.V . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION If the natural flow point is in the unstable region.A. Using smaller tubing may result in higher frictional pressure drops and if this reduces flow rates to below uneconomic levels. a smaller size tubing or artificial lift system should be considered. or to the left of the minimum. whereas small tubing may sustain unsteady flow until the IPR and TPC curves become almost tangential. To obtain flow at these conditions. a tapered tubing string may be a consideration.IPR and TPC Curves with Two Apparent Intersection Points . the flow will become increasingly unstable and wells with large size tubing will die quickly.v). the intersection point to the left is always unstable and the well will either die or progressively produce more fluid until it reaches the stable flow point.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 57 OF 295 ENI S. Figure 2.p.
w.e. In a pumping well. Figure 2. velocity and flow regime in the tubing above the operating gas lift valve.w).p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Artificial Lift Effects 0 REVISION A well will not flow naturally if the IPR and TPC curves do not intersect and in this case artificial lift could be used to provide the pressure differential between the curves (Refer to figure 2. By generating an outflow performance curve for each potential system. the TPC is displaced as a result of the effect of the gas on the density. This results in a combined outflow performance curve termed the pump intake curve. pump differential versus rate) which is plotted below the well performance curves as shown in figure 2. An artificial lift system places an injection of energy into the flow system which displaces the TPC curve downwards.Combining Pump Performance and TCP Curves . they can be used to compare the deliverability of the various methods.W.A. the displacement is dependent on the pump performance curve (i.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 58 OF 295 ENI S. It is necessary when carrying out this analysis. to consider the effect of downhole gas separation on pump outflow performance. In gas lifted wells. From this an economic cost analysis can be produced to analyse capital and operating cost differences.
it is apparent that gas lift will maximise the deliverability of good wells (PI = 2.0stb/d/psi) provided there is no drawdown limitation.p.4 to 1.A.x below).5std/d/psi) provided 2 7/8ins tubing is installed.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 59 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As shown in the example (figure 2. while submersible pumping gives the maximum rate from the poorer zones (PI = 0.X . however the operating and capital costs of equipment must be justified against the incremental increase in production rate.Artificial Lift Options for Deep Wells with 5 1/2ins Casing . Artificial lift is often widely used to improve flow stability and increase the production of existing producing wells. Figure 2.
It is not usual to conduct solely a drawdown test on an exploration well as it is impossible to maintain a constant production rate throughout the test period as the well must first cleanup. However. it is not normal nowadays to plan a test on this basis. 3. There are two types of well test methods available: • Drill Stem Test (DST) Where Drillpipe/Tubing in combination with downhole tools is used as a short term test to evaluate the reservoir. • Many designs of well testing strings are possible depending on the requirements of the test and the nature of the well and the type of flow test to be conducted but basically it consists of installing a packer tailpipe. The normal method of investigating the reservoir is to conduct a well test. Types of Tests Drawdown A drawdown test entails flowing the well and analysing the pressure response as the reservoir pressure is reduced below its original pressure. It is normal to conduct a build-up test after a drawdown test. The drawdown data should also be analysed using type curves. This was the original definition of a drill stem test or DST. . This is usually more applicable to gas wells but can be analysed using the Odeh-Jones plot for liquids or the Thomas-Essi plot for gas.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 60 OF 295 ENI S. analysis is still possible. This is termed drawdown.1.1.p.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 3. Multi-Rate Drawdown A multi-rate drawdown test may be run when flow rates are unstable or there are mechanical difficulties with the surface equipment. 3. Production Test Many options of string design are available depending on the requirements of the test and the nature of the well. During a test where reservoir fluids do not flow to surface.1. separates the fluids and measures the flow rates and pressures. WELL TESTING INTRODUCTION The main objective when drilling an exploration well is to test and evaluate the target formation. packer and downhole test tools and a tubing or drill pipe string then introducing a low density fluid into the string in order to enable the well to flow through surface testing equipment which controls the flow rate. in conjunction with the build up test.
The flow rate again is increased at each step. The AOFP is the theoretical fluid rate at which the well would produce if the reservoir sand face was reduced to atmospheric pressure.p. is to conduct a second flow and PBU at a different rate to the first flow and PBU.A. or near to. Isochronal An isochronal test consist of a similar series of flow rates as the flow-on-flow test. Deliverability A deliverability test is conducted to determine the well’s Inflow Performance Relation. except the final flow period which is extended similar to the isochronal test. The final flow period is extended to achieve a stabilised flowing pressure for defining the IPR. Modified Isochronal The modified isochronal test is used on tight reservoirs where it takes a long time for the shut-in pressure to stabilise.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 61 OF 295 ENI S. where there is a flow rate dependant skin. There are three types of deliverability test: • • • Flow on Flow Test Isochronal Test The Modified Isochronal Test. D. and the near wellbore skin can be analysed. kh. the original pressure which is termed the pressure build-up or PBU. This type of test is applicable to high rate gas well testing and is followed by a single pressure build up period. a simple form of test to evaluate the rate dependant skin coefficient. IPR. The flow and shut-in periods are of the same length. This is the simplest form of deliverability test described below. Flow-on-Flow Conducting a flow-on-flow test entails flowing the well until the flowing pressure stabilises and then repeating this at several different rates. and in the case of gas wells the Absolute Open Flow Potential. . and the rate dependant skin coefficient. On low production rate gas wells. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Build-Up 0 REVISION A build-up test requires the reservoir to be flowed to cause a drawdown then the well is closed in to allow the pressure to increase back to. From these the permeability-height product. This is the normal type of test conducted on an oil well and can be analysed using the classic Horner Plot or superposition. The durations of each flow period are equal. AOFP. Usually the rate is increased at each step ensuring that stabilised flow is achievable. each rate of equal duration and separated by a pressure build-up long enough to reach the stabilised reservoir pressure. D. This calculated rate is only of importance in certain countries where government bodies set the maximum rate at which the well may be produced as a proportion of this flow rate.
linear with time. which can be determined by conducting a step rate test.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 62 OF 295 ENI S. After the injectivity test. Pulse testing. is sometimes used to overcome the background reservoir pressure behaviour when it is a problem. and the pressure to which it returns. The difference between the initial reservoir pressure. . also the volume of produced fluid and the effective isothermal compressibility of the system. The analysis of this test is similar to a pressure build-up. usually seawater offshore is injected to establish the formation’s injection potential and also its fracture pressure. is achieved. The reservoir volume may be estimated directly from the depletion. is the depletion. Very high surface injection pressures may be required in order to fracture the formation. based on the maximum reservoir size. if required. The well is produced at a constant rate until an observed pressure drop. which may also be caused by the thermal shock of the cold injection water reaching the sandface. Once a well is fractured. Interference An interference test is conducted to investigate the average reservoir properties and connectivity between two or more wells.p. Injectivity In these tests a fluid. Surface readout pressure gauges should be used in this test. It may also be conducted on a single well to determine the vertical permeability between separate reservoir zones. but is complicated by the cold water bank. these must therefore be of the high accuracy electronic type gauges with negligible drift. The water can be filtered and treated with scale inhibitor. the pressure fall-off is measured. biocide and oxygen scavenger. a short term injection test will generally not provide a good measure of the long term injectivity performance.A. where the flowrate at one of the wells is varied in a series of steps. to provide a measurable pressure difference on the pressure gauges. It is common practice to follow the extended drawdown with a pressure build-up. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Reservoir Limit 0 REVISION A reservoir limit test is an extended drawdown test which is conducted on closed reservoir systems to determine their volume. It is only applicable where there is no regional aquifer support. The volume produced must be sufficient. A well-to-well interference test is not carried out offshore at the exploration or appraisal stage as it is more applicable to developed fields.
The objectives of an exploration well test are to: • • • • • • • • Conduct the testing in a safe and efficient manner Determine the nature of the formation fluids Measure reservoir pressure and temperature Interpret reservoir permeability-height product (kh) and skin value Obtain representative formation fluid samples for laboratory analysis Define well productivity and/or injectivity investigate formation characteristics Evaluate boundary effects. if testing is warranted. should only be conducted for essential data.4) and. . Currently.2. completion practices. therefore. Such inter-disciplinary discussions should be formalised by holding a meeting (or meetings) at which these objectives are agreed and fixed. analysis can provide good data to help evaluate the productivity of the zone. if the flowing pressure gradient in the tubing can be estimated.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 63 OF 295 ENI S. The Petroleum Engineer should discuss with the geologists and reservoir engineers about the information required and make them aware of the costs and risks involved with each method. They should select the easiest means of obtaining data. if possible. The second premise is that. The test objectives must be agreed by those who will use the results and those who will conduct the test before the test programme is prepared. extent of formation damage and if there is a requirement for stimulation. avoiding any operations which entail higher risk. in the most cost-effective manner.p. the Petroleum Engineer should not appear to be negative but work towards obtaining essential data. which the company needs rather than that which is nice to have. such as running wireline or coil tubing through the testing string. The starting premise should be that testing is not required unless it is clearly justified. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3. DST OBJECTIVE 0 REVISION A DST is conducted to determine the productivity characteristics of one specific zone. From this a Productivity Index (PI) or Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) can be established (Refer to Section 2. actual well production rates can be accurately predicted from DST data as it shows what the well will produce against a gradually increasing back-pressure. By adopting this position. then actual producing rates can also be determined. it should be done in the simplest possible manner. such as coring. Testing is an expensive and high risk operation and. In many cases.
the tools should be full opening to allow production logging across perforated intervals. In larger production casing sizes the same tools will be used with a larger packer.A. The list of tools is not exhaustive. temperature and the stimulation programme. and other tools may be included.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3. In the following description. In smaller casing sizes. In general. smaller test tools will be required. For a 5 barefoot test. For more detailed information on well test strings and tooling. test location and relevant planning will dictate which is the most suitable test string configuration to be used. well tests are performed inside a 7ins production liner.3. but similarly. using full opening test tools with a 2. considering packer fluids. DST STRING 0 REVISION The well testing objectives. However.25ins ID. the bottom of the test string should be 100ft above the top perforation to allow production logging of the interval. If conditions allow.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 64 OF 295 ENI S. The tools should be dressed with elastomers suitable for the operating environment. conventional test tools will usually be used with a packer set inside the 9 /8ins casing. refer to the Company ‘Well Test Manual’. prognosed production fluids. Some generic test strings used for testing from various installations are shown overleaf. . tools which are required both in production tests and conventional tests are included. the test string should be kept as simple as possible to reduce the risk of mechanical failure. if applicable.
p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 3.A.A.Typical Jack Up Test String With TCP Guns On Permanent Packer .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 65 OF 295 ENI S.
Typical Test String With TCP Guns Stabbed Through Production Packer .p.A.B . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 66 OF 295 ENI S.
A.p.Typical Jack Up Test String With Retrievable Packer .C .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 67 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 3.
Typical Semi-Submersible Test String . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 3.D .Retrievable Packer .p.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 68 OF 295 ENI S.
Can be detected if the reservoir is small and the test is conducted properly. RESERVOIR CHARACTERISTICS 0 REVISION Reservoir characteristics that may be estimated from DST analysis include: • • • • • • Average Effective Permeability. reservoir bbl/stb/day Formation permeability.4. stb/day Fluid viscosity. psig Flowing time. from the wellbore. Depletion.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 69 OF 295 ENI S. mins Shut-in reservoir pressure. In summary.4. 3. Damage ratio method permits estimation of what the well should make without damage. These reservoir anomalies affect the slope of the pressure build-up plot. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3.1.A where: pws t’ ∆t’ pi q µ B k h = = = = = + = = = Measured pressure in the wellbore during the build-up. Barriers/Permeability Changes/Fluid Contacts. mins Shut-in time. An estimate of how far away. the DST can ‘see’. Reservoir Pressure. Radius Of Investigation. Pressure Build-Up Analysis Horner Equation Transient pressure analysis is based on the Horner pressure build-up equation which describes the re-pressuring of the wellbore area during the shut-in period as the formation fluids moves into the ‘pressure sink’ created by the flowing portion of the test: p ws =p i − 162. psig Rate of flow. This may be better than core permeability since much greater volume is averaged. Measured if shut-in time is adequate.A. cp Formation volume factor. ft . They usually require substantiating data to differentiate one from the other. 3. the DST if properly applied is an essential tool for the Completions Engineer. or calculated if not.6qµB t ′−∆t ′ log10 kh ∆t ′ Eq.p. md Formation thickness. Also effective permeability rather than absolute permeability is obtained. Wellbore Damage.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Conditions which must be assumed during the build-up period for eq. t’p can be assumed to be the total of the flowing times with very little error. this is usually done. however little error is caused by assuming that t’p is the time of the flowing period immediately before the particular shut-in period.a to be strictly correct are: • • • • • Radial flow Homogenous formation Steady state conditions Infinite reservoir Single phase flow.A. since ‘after-flow’ or wellbore storage effects cause deviation from the straight line in the early region.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 70 OF 295 ENI S.p.the slope m of the straight line is numerically the difference between the t’p t ′ + ∆t ′ t ′ +∆t ′ p =0 and at log10 p pressure value at log10 ∆t ′ ∆t ′ =1. figure 3. four points are the fewest to determine a straight line. With a very short initial flow period. An important issue is the time required to approach steady state or straight line conditions. . The ideal plot is where all the points align up in a straight line but is seldom found in actuality. In figure 3.6qµB kh Eq.e. . Horner Build-Up Plot t ′ + ∆t ′ p Assuming these conditions are met. 3. One of these is that generally the shut-in pressure must reach at least 65% of the static pressure. selecting a value for t’p creates some problem mathematically.e shows an idealised Horner Plot with the pressure chart showing very simply how t’p and formation pressure pws at varied shut-in times ∆t’ are picked from the chart and related to the Horner plot.0 If the points are plotted on semi-log paper. In a multi-phase flow period DST.B The constant m is representative of a given fluid having physical properties µB flowing at a rate q through a formation having physical properties kh. Most of these conditions are met on a typical DST although steady state flow is the condition which may cause most concern particularly at early shut-in time. Experience has formulated some certain rules of thumb to help determine the shut-in time. Usually pws is determined at 5min intervals along the shut-in pressure curve. 3. then a plot of pws versus log10 ∆t ′ should yield a straight line and the slope (m) of the straight line should be: m= 162. m is the change in pressure over one log cycle. and flow conditions. depends on reservoir and fluid characteristics. As a rule of thumb. With equal flow periods on a multiple flow period DST.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 71 OF 295 ENI S. no analysis of the plot was possible unless the straight line was achieved. If the net thickness is not available then kh or formation capacity is determined: kh= 162. 3. viscosity. B. Figure 3. can be calculated:: k= 162. and formation volume. Formation thickness.D . h.C Parameters. must be the net thickness of the productive zone.6qµB m Eq. determined from electric log analysis.E . however.A. sometimes reasonable estimates of formation parameters could be made. µ. 3.p.6qµB mh Eq.Idealised Horner Build-Up Plot Reservoir Parameters Obtained By Build-Up Analysis Average permeability. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Prior to type curve matching methods. k. can be estimated from available correlations if the gravity of the crude oil and the gas-oil ratio are determined by measurement.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 If all the parameters are unknown. t ′ + ∆t ′ t ′ + ∆t ′ p = 1. psi (final flowing pressure) Fluid compressibility. Wellbore damage. If the second build-up pressure was lower than st the 1 . cp Well bore radius.G where: pi pff c Φ µ rw k t’p = = = = = = = = Shut-in reservoir pressure.F However. is presented by the empirical equation for the dimensionless value. 3.85 s=1.85 p i −p ff kt′ p Eq. ins Effective permeability. s. DR.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 72 OF 295 ENI S.e. pi.p.0 . 3. transmissibility kh 162. skin factor: kt ′ p −p p +2. q. to the theoretical flow rate without damage: DR= qt qa An another equation.A. 3. is: DR= m log φµcr 2 w −2.151 i ff −log m φµcrw Eq.E Static reservoir pressure. for calculation of DR based on the skin factor relation of Hurst and van Everdingen. ′ ∆t st nd In figure 3. them depletion may have occurred. md Flowing time. is obtained by extrapolating the Horner straight line to an ‘infinite’ shut-in time: At infinite shut-in time. This was carried on a stage further introducing the concept of damage ratio. vol/vol/psi Formation porosity. which compares the flow rate observed. mins .0.e. or as shown in figure 3. log10 ∆t ′ = 0 . psi Formation pressure at flow time T.6q = m µB 0 kh is determined: µB REVISION Eq. this factor cannot be readily applied to specific formations to obtain to show the potential of the zone would be if there was no damage. fraction Viscosity of reservoir pressure. both the 1 build-up and 2 build-up plots extrapolate to the same static pressure lending confidence to the analysis.
A. therefore the fact that a change of slope appears on the build-up plot.A’ in figure 3.f . or existence of a barrier. ‘Seeing’ a gas-liquid contact from an up-structure well would be difficult due to the normally short radius of investigation through a gas column. Alternatively. then the build-up slope will change by a factor of 2. seeing a gas-liquid contact from a down-structure well is a much more likely possibility.Effect of a Fault . a change in permeability.p. In summary.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 73 OF 295 ENI S. can cause a change in the slope of the Horner plot. they can be detected by a change in shape of the slope of the of the line. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Reservoir And Fluid Anomaly Indications 0 REVISION Many times the Horner build-up equation does not hold up under actual case. Figure 3. This must be resolved through other geologic or reservoir information. If the barrier is a straight line as A . Fluid viscosities change by phase change or type of fluid. then permeability k or fluid viscosity µ are likely suspects for change as the wave of increasing pressure travels towards the wellbore. leaves open the question of what caused the anomaly. If changes occur within the radius of investigation of the DST. If it is seen that the rate of flow q remains constant.F . Permeability may change due to natural lensing or formation damage but it is doubtful that formation damage would affect sufficient volume of formation to be detected as a change of slope on the build-up plot. viscosity. A sealing barrier such as a fault or permeability pinchout can cause a change of slope m.
Eq. if the extrapolated pressure from a second build-up is lower than the initial pressure of the first build-up. mins kt i 5.76×10 φµc 4 Eq.A. can be calculated: − 3. .I Needless to point out. Depletion As explained previously. however there is plenty of field examples to prove that it occurs. the longer the flowing time. This effect is termed supercharged which may be caused by leak off of filtrate over-pressuring the formation. hrs Exponential integral value.p. whether it be a barrier. the deeper the radius of investigation. a reservoir would need to be extremely small for this to occur. or a fluid contact. Another reason that a recorded initial shut-in pressure may be higher than true shut-in pressure. change of permeability. This effect needs to be diagnosed to confirm supercharging. ra.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 74 OF 295 ENI S. 3. hrs Shut-in time at the point of slope change. ft Flow time.H Radius Of Investigation The following equation from Van Poollen may be used to estimate the radius of investigation of any particular DST in an infinite radial flow system: ri = where: ri tp = = Radius of investigation Flow time.793r 2 a φµc t + ∆t a =2. 3.303ln p − E ∆t kt p a where: ra Tp ∆ta -E = = = = Distance to anomaly. then depletion may be the cause. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The distance to the anomaly. Obviously.
Gas well Equations for permeability. R = ( F + 460) Horner build-up slope for gas well 1637 q g Tf µZ mg h Eq. Figure 3. during the build-up is t ′ + ∆t ′ p plotted versus ∆t ′ as shown in figure 3. For the Horner build-up plot.G . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Reservoir Parameters .Typical Horner Plot .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 75 OF 295 ENI S. estimated wellbore AOFP for a gas zone are: Permeability: k= where: Z Qg Tf mg = = = = Gas deviation factor Rate of flow. the square of the formation pressure.g. and the absolute temperature factor. Z. If the SG of the gas is known. flow rate is calculated in scf/day or if in large quantities mscf/d. pws. R.p.Gaseous System 0 REVISION When conducting DSTs of gas zones. mscf/day o o Formation temperature. This involves correcting for deviation of the reservoir gas from the o perfect gas law using the gas deviation factor.J . 3. the values of Z and µ can be found from standard testing literature.A.
3.5 and 1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Wellbore Damage: 2 2 p −p i ff EDR = 1 m g log t + 2.p. Although these methods are generally used on longer term production tests.0 qg p 2 i p 2 i −p 2 ff 0 REVISION Eq. they can be used on DST analysis to salvage some information from a test where sufficient data not available to obtain a straight line.5Max AOF= qg p i p 2 i −p 2 ff Eq.L 2 n i −p i ) If n=1. . 3.65 p Absolute Open Flow Potential Using the single point back-pressure test method: AOF= where: n is an exponent varying between 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 76 OF 295 ENI S.K (p qg p 2 i 2 ( ) n Eq.M If n=0. Ramey.A. 3.0Max AOF= Eq. McKinley and Earlougher-Kersch methods have applications with McKinley being the easiest to use but the others perhaps more accurate.N Type Curve Methods There are several type curve methods are available for analysing early time DST data from pressure transient tests. It should be iterated that the Horner should be used whenever possible and type curves used to in picking correct straight line by indicating when wellbore storage effects have ended. 3.
Figure 3. The downhole tester valve is opened to flow the well to clean up perforating debris and invasive fluids from the formation. If testing with a permanent packer. a fluid is circulated into the tubing to provide an underbalance to allow the well to flow after perforating. After a suitable time (usually 1 /2 times the flow period). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3.A.4.4. the tester valve is then reopened to conduct the planned flow and shut-in periods in accordance to the programme requirements to obtain other additional data and verification. When the string is successfully installed and all pressure and function testing is completed.3. 1 A description of the tools used in DST test strings are outlined in the next section. Common Test Tools Description Refer to the Company ‘Well Test Manual’.H .p. the tester valve is then closed to allow the formation fluids to build-up back up to reservoir pressure which is recorded on pressure recorders or gauges. Bevelled Mule Shoe If the test is being conducted in a liner the mule shoe makes it easier to enter the liner top. . Basics Of DST Operations 0 REVISION In simple terms.3). the mule shoe allows entry into the packer bore. The bevelled mule shoe also facilities pulling wireline tools back into the test string.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 77 OF 295 ENI S.h shows a typical schematic of a simple single flow operational sequence. figure 3. a DST is carried out by running test tools in a BHA on a test string in the hole (Refer to previous Section 3.DST Typical Sequence of Events 3.2.
A. a large incremental pressure. Retrievable Test Packer The packer isolates the interval to be tested from the fluid in the annulus. Pipe Tester Valve A pipe tester valve is used in conjunction with a tester valve which can be run in the open position in order to allow the string to self fill as it is installed. The valve is locked open on the first application of annulus pressure which is during the first cycling of the tester valve. The valve usually has a flapper type closure mechanism which opens to allow fluid bypass but closes when applying tubing pressure for testing purposes. to prevent pressuring up of the closed sump below the packer during packer setting. should be chosen for firing the guns Safety Joint Installed above a retrievable packer.p. This feature is important when running tubing conveyed perforating guns which are actuated by pressure. It can also be used to equalise differential pressures across packers at the end of the test. Gauge Case (Bundle Carrier) The carrier allows pressure and temperature recorders to be run below or above the packer and sense either annulus or tubing pressures and temperatures. This item may also be used if wireline retrievable gauges are run below the packer. This valve should ideally contain a time delay on closing. It operates by manipulating the string (usually a combination of reciprocation and rotation) to unscrew and the upper part of the string retrieved. it allows the test string above this tool to be recovered in the event the packer becomes stuck in the hole. The DST tools can then be laid out and the upper part of the safety joint run back in the hole with fishing jar to allow more powerful jarring action. It should be set by turning to the right and includes a hydraulic hold-down mechanism to prevent the tool from being pumped up the hole under the influence of differential pressure from below the packer. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 78 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Perforated Joint/Ported Sub 0 REVISION The perforated joint or ported sub allows wellbore fluids to enter the test string if the tubing conveyed perforating system is used. If the valve does not have a delay on closing. Circulating Valve (Bypass Valve) This tool is run in conjunction with retrievable packers to allow fluid bypass while running in and pulling out of hole. hence reducing the risk of excessive pressure surges or swabbing. rather than the static bottom-hole pressure. It is automatically closed when sufficient weight is set down on the packer.
Single Operation Reversing Sub Produced fluids may be reversed out of the test string and the well killed using this tool. Normally two stands of 4 /4 ins drill collars (46. The downhole test valve allows downhole shut in of the well so that after-flow effects are minimised. Eni-Agip’s preference is the annulus operated version. 3 .p. providing better pressure data. They are non-rotating to allow torque for setting packers or operating the safety joint. Drill Collar Drill collars are required to provide a weight to set the packer. This tool is available in either annulus or tubing pressure operated versions. Downhole Tester Valve The downhole tester valve provides a seal from pressure from above and below. It is actuated by applying a pre-set annulus pressure which shears a disc or pins allowing a mandrel to move and expose the circulating ports. This reversing sub can also be used in combination with a test valve module if a further safety valve is required. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Hydraulic Jar 0 REVISION The jar is run to aid in freeing the packer if it becomes stuck. The tubing operated versions require several pressure cycles before the valve is shifted into the circulating position.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 79 OF 295 ENI S. Once the tool has been operated it cannot be reset.8 lbs/ft) should be sufficient weight on the packer. delivering an impact to the stuck tools. Multiple Operation Circulating Valve This tool enables the circulation of fluids closer to the tester valve whenever necessary as it can be opened or closed on demand and is generally used to install an underbalance fluid for brining in the well. Slip Joint These allow the tubing string to expand and contract in the longitudinal axis due to changes in temperature and pressure. One example of this is a system where the reversing sub is combined with two ball valves to make a single shot sampler/safety valve.A. It also has a secondary function as a safety valve. The jar allows an overpull to be taken on the string which is then suddenly released. and therefore must only be used at the end of the test. but should be regarded as the minimum. The valve is operated by pressuring up on the annulus. This enables the tubing to be pressure tested several times while running in hole.
Fluted Hanger The fluted hanger lands off and sits in the wear bushing of the wellhead and is adjustable to allow the SSTT assembly to be correctly positioned in the BOP stack so that when the SSTT is disconnected the shear rams can close above the disconnect point.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 80 OF 295 ENI S. and sub-sea test tree. The designs can be like a modified lubricator valve or a completion type subsurface safety valve. A control line is run to the valve through a conventional tubing hanger/spool arrangement. The valve is very similar to the circulating valve (bypass valve) except it is closed by annulus pressure instead of weight. The tool equalises pressure between the sump and the annulus when the tester valve is closed. preventing the sump from being pressured up due to the volume of the seal assembly entering the packer. they need to be tested and fully certified.4. they are of the utmost importance as they connect every piece of equipment in the test string which have differing threads. they must be checked with each mating item of equipment before use. 3. Tubing Hanger This will be spaced out to position the packer seal assembly into the packer and land off in the tubing hanger spool. Sub-Sea Test Tools Used On Semi-Submersibles The sub-sea test tree (SSTT) assembly includes a fluted hanger.5. . slick joint.p.A. Sub-Surface Safety Valve A subsurface safety valve is often run for safety being placed at least 100 ft below the mud line.4. Pressure Operated Bypass Valve This allows the test string to be stabbed into the packer in an un-performed well. 3. Tools Utilised With Permanent Packer Systems A permanent or permanent retrievable packer arrangement is used on a Jack-up or Land Rig test utilising a production Xmas tree. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Crossovers 0 REVISION Crossovers warrant special attention. If crossovers have to be manufactured. In addition.4. If the tester valve can be run in the open position then this valve is not required. Some versions required by other operators are installed in the string immediately below a surface test tree in the BOP stack arrangement but this does not provide safety in the ultimate catastrophic situation when there is a collision by another vessel.
It also acts as a safety device when. regaining control without killing the well.p. disconnection of the landing string from the test string due to an emergency situation or for bad weather. but open when a differential pressure is applied from above. When closed it will contain pressure from both above and below 3. a latch assembly. it can prevent the full unloading of the contents in the landing string after closing of the SSTT. Deep Water Tools Retainer Valve The retainer valve is installed immediately above the SSTT on tests in extremely deep waters to prevent large volumes of well fluids leaking into the sea in the event of a disconnect. Sub-Sea Test Tree The SSTT is a fail-safe sea floor master valve which provides two functions. This valve eliminates the need to have a long lubricator to accommodate wireline tools above the surface test tree swab valve.4. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Slick Joint (Polished Joint) 0 REVISION The slick joint (usually 5ins OD) is installed above the fluted hanger and has a smooth (slick) outside diameter around which the BOP pipe rams can close and sustain annulus pressure for DST tool operation or. The lubricator valve is hydraulic operated through a second umbilical line and should be either a fail closed or. under most circumstances be reconnected. The slick joint should be positioned to allow the two bottom sets of pipe rams to be closed on it and also allow the blind rams to close above the disconnect point of the SSTT. The latch contains the control ports for the hydraulic actuation of the valves and the latch head. the shut off of pressure in the test string and. It is hydraulic operated and must be a fail-open or fail-in-position valve. The SSTT is constructed in two parts. the valve assembly consisting of two fail safe closed valves and.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 81 OF 295 ENI S. The valves hold pressure from below. fail-in-position valve. allowing safe killing of the well without hydraulic control if unlatched.A. in the event of a gas escape at surface. It is usually run in conjunction with a deep water SSTT described below. . if in an emergency disconnection. Lubricator Valve The lubricator valve is run one stand of tubing below the surface test tree.6. The control umbilical is connected to the top of the latch which can. When closed it will contain pressure from both above and below. contain annulus pressure.
with the large memory electronic gauges on the market today. The slow actuation is due to hydraulic lag time when bleeding off the control line against friction and the hydrostatic head of the control fluid. . If a programme required deepwater test tools. with the modern type gauges. The problem then is to dump or ignore data points which are not relevant to data gathering.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 82 OF 295 ENI S. This system uses hydraulic power from accumulators on the tree controlled electrically from surface (MUX). However.p. such as opening or shutting in the well. The fluid is vented into the annulus or an atmospheric tank to reduce the lag time and reducing closure time to seconds. the tool operating procedures would be included in the test programme. Other gauges. when they change to very short time intervals where this facility is required.4. the use of dynamic positioning vessels require much faster SSTT unlatching than that available with the normal hydraulic system on an SSTT.7. The gauges record the events from initial running of the test string to well kill and retrieval procedures although. Downhole Pressure Recording The complete sequence of events are recorded by bottom-hole pressure gauges and some flow data may also be recorded on surface read-out systems. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Deep Water SSTT 0 REVISION As exploration moves into deeper and remote Subsea locations. 3. This is overcome by use of the deepwater SSTT which has an Electro-Hydraulic control system.A. The Hydraulic Deep Water Actuator is a fast response controller for the deepwater SSTT and retainer valve. they may be programmed to ‘sleep’ while the string is being installed as it wastes memory. termed ‘smart’ gauges can be programmed to collect data at moderate time intervals until they detect a quick pressure change. this is not necessary as they have sufficient memory to record at fast intervals throughout even long term tests without running out of memory.
gas and water produced under normal producing conditions. gas and water produced by individual wells under normal producing conditions.5. WELL PRODUCTION TEST OBJECTIVES 0 REVISION The main objective of well production varies from simple determination of the amount and type of fluids produced to sophisticated transient pressure determinations of reservoir parameters and hetrogenities. or reservoir parameters such as permeability. etc. casing pressure. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3. with careful recording of the conditions is essential. From the well and reservoir viewpoint. . tubing pressures. volume and hetrogenities. Abnormal production declines may also indicate artificial lift problems. Accuracy in measurement. It is important that the well is produced at its normal conditions as flow rate will vary the relative quantities of oil. Results may set production allowables. results are reported as oil production rate. Well production tests may be classified as follows: • • • Periodic Productivity or Deliverability Transient Pressure. Gas production is reported as well as condensate and water. security of power fluid or gas lift gas supply. to determine the capability of the well under various degrees of pressure drawdown. 3.1. Periodic production tests have the purpose of determining the relative quantities of oil. sand build-up. They serve as an aid in well and reservoir operation and meeting legal and regulatory requirements. In short. well tests are tools which can be used to help establish the condition of production or injection wells.5. Transient pressure tests require a higher degree of sophistication and are used to determine formation damage or stimulation related to an individual well. pressure. gas and water. details of artificial lift system operation and all other effects on the well producing capability should be recorded. gas-oil ratio and water oil ratio as a percentage of water in the total liquid stream. Descriptions of some of these tests are described earlier in this section. the wells must be produced at the normal rates. etc. Engineers need to make themselves familiar with the various test procedures and know their advantages and limitations in order for them to fully utilise them to optimise the design of completions. Productivity or deliverability tests are usually performed on initial completion. Similar to oil wells. or recompletion. routine are less common as each well normally has individual measuring capability. they provide periodic physical well conditions where unexpected changes such as extraneous water or gas production may highlight well or reservoir problems. scale build-up in perforations. On oil wells. On gas wells. Choke size.p.A. aid in selections of well completion methods and design of artificial lift systems and production facilities. Potential production problems should be recognised in order that they can be properly handled such as emulsions. Periodic Tests Production tests are carried out routinely to physically measure oil.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 83 OF 295 ENI S.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 84 OF 295 ENI S. They do.A.4.1 above. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3.5. These tests are described in Section 2. pseudo-steady state or steady state flow.1) and are successfully applied to non-Darcy conditions.4. decreases exponentially with time. Gas well deliverability tests are designed to establish AOFP.2.5. With a limited number of measurements. and is a result of the pressure disturbance moving out towards the outer boundary of the drainage area. depending on whether the pressure response initiated by opening the well had reached the drainage area boundary and on the type of boundary.4. They do not permit calculation of formation permeability or the degree of abnormal flow restrictions (formation damage) near the wellbore. however include the effects of formation damage. they can be classified as: • • Flow-After-Flow Isochronal.1 above.1 or in Section 3. . Transient Tests Radial Flow Characteristics Flow from reservoirs are characterised as transient. pwf. This means that corrections need to made to compensate for transient flow behaviour as well as for skin effects. This is then used to predict the PI (Refer to Section 2.4. 3. Termed multi-point backpressure tests. These tests are described in Section 2. Productivity Or Deliverability Tests 0 REVISION This test is different from the periodic test in that the liquid flow performance can be determined empirically using measured flow rates at varying bottom-hole pressure drawdowns and they do not rely on mathematical descriptions of the flow process. Most DSTs and many production tests are conducted under transient flow conditions and consequently the observed productivity will often appear greater than that seen in long term production.1 or in Section 3.p. Transient flow occurs when the well is initially opened or has a significant rate change. therefore can be used as an indicator of well flow conditions or a basis for simple comparison of completion effectiveness among wells in a particular reservoir. Commonly used deliverability tests for oil wells may be classified as: • • • • Productivity Index Inflow Performance Flow-After-Flow Isochronal.4.3. they permit prediction of what a well could produce at other pressure drawdowns. During this the production conditions at the wellbore change rapidly and the BHPF.
Pressure Build-Up Tests Pressure build-up tests are described earlier in Section 3.A. The rate changes must be significant enough to effect the transient pressure behaviour. However if it is a no-flow boundary. then PR will not alter with time and is termed steady state. .4. If the boundary is a constant pressure boundary.p.steady state. flow becomes steady state or pseudo. When the BHFP appears to be constant or declining slowly proportionally with time.g. Therefore. production continues as the test is being carried out. They minimise wellbore storage effects and phase segregation effects so provide good results where build-up or drawdown tests would not. 5 . Multiple rate tests have the advantage of providing transient test data without the need for well shut-in. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION When the flow reaches the outer boundary. a series of constant rates or constant bottom-hole pressure with continually changing flow rate.1 . uncontrolled variable rates.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 85 OF 295 ENI S. Each type presents certain advantages and limitations and factors which are important for reasonable results. the well is stabilised and pseudo-steady state flow equations can be used to predict the long term deliverability of a well. e. Pressure Drawdown Testing Pressure drawdown tests have advantages over pressure build-up tests. the ‘Reservoir Limit Test’ can be used to estimate if there is sufficient hydrocarbons in place to justify additional wells in a new reservoir.DST tests. Transient pressure tests are classified as: • • • • • Pressure Build-up Pressure Drawdown Multiple Rate Injectivity or Fall-off Multiple Well Interference. Multiple rate analysis can be applied to several flow situations. Multiple Rate Testing Pressure build-up or drawdown tests require a constant flow rate which is sometimes difficult to achieve over a long period of time. and an estimate can be made of the reservoir volume in communication with the wellbore. then PR will decline purely as a result of depletion and the flow is then termed pseudo-steady state.Advances in Well Test Analysis. Accurate flow rate and pressure measurement is essential and more critical than on buildup or drawdown tests. The analysis procedure is direct and simple but computations are more troublesome and are often conducted by computer software. Transient pressure testing and calculation procedures for oil wells are particularly well covered in SPE Monograph No.
Orientation and length of vertical fractures may be estimated through pulse testing and reservoir simulation techniques.p. Interference Tests (multiple well testing) In interference testing. Calculation of reservoir characteristics is similar. The responses may be very small. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 86 OF 295 ENI S. Using computers the data can be analysed to give a description of the variation in reservoir properties according to location. therefore. A stepped rate injectivity test can be carried out to estimate fracture pressure in an injection well which is useful in tertiary flood applications to avoid accidental injection of expensive fluid into uncontrolled fractures. Vertical pulse testing may indicate vertical formation continuity.A. a long duration rate change in one well creates a pressure change in an observation well that is related to reservoir characteristics. The injectivity parallels the drawdown test and a pressure fall-off test parallels the build-up test. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Injection Well Tests 0 REVISION Injection well transient testing is basically simple provide the mobility of the injected fluids is similar to the in-situ fluids. A pulse test is an interference test that provides data by changing production rate in a cyclic manner to produce short term pressure pulses which are measured in the observation well(s). accurate pressure monitoring devices are required.
In low rate and deep land wells. through which the well will be completed and controlled throughout its life. or combination of strings. the production casing size may be swedged to accommodate larger tubing and completion equipment (i. Casing Profile The surface and intermediate casings are designed to provide well control and borehole stability during the drilling operation. CASING DESIGN Refer to the Drilling Design and Casing Design Manuals for all casing design policies and criteria. These manuals provide the policies and design procedures for both exploration and development wells. etc. the popularity of the mono-bore completion. This larger tubing reduces friction losses. The production casing is usually: • • A full string of pipe cemented at TD. there is a limit to the size of production casing which can be provided.1. 4. however the production department provide the design parameters to the drilling engineers. DRILLING CONSIDERATIONS These are primarily the responsibility of drilling engineering. production casing sizes are typically 7ins or 1 3 5 5 /2ins. This gives live well interventions much more scope to conduct stimulation. . figure 4. etc. However. plugging back. This is a design which provides the greatest flexibility to live well intervention operations as the completion is full bore allowing regular tools to be run and used in the sump area eliminating the use of through-tubing devices. 4. it is a completion design parameter. In highly productive wells. which may have required a workover in previous times. where a large size tubing mates to a similar size liner utilising a PBR or similar type system. However today. The size of the production casing is primarily dictated to accommodate the optimum size of completion tubing and equipment. The production casing is the string. A drilled through casing and liner.a shows these various casing profile options. anchor the completion equipment and act as a safety barrier to the uncontrolled emission of hydrocarbons.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 87 OF 295 ENI S.p.1. e. workovers and re-completions with artificial lift. 9 /8ins and 7ins are the common sizes (Refer to the Casing Design Manual). TRSSV’s with control line) near surface or a hot string of isolated pipe. The production casing and its cement isolates the producing intervals to facilitate reservoir control. The decision whether to run a liner or not primarily lies with the drilling engineer however the impact of the completion needs to thoroughly considered. offshore. as is obvious in deep high pressure wells. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 4.g. In high rate and offshore wells.e. and/or artificial lift systems.1. the completions engineer would always prefer the largest casing possible to provide the flexibility in well interventions. 10 /4ins. If there were a choice.A. straddle packing-off gassed out zones.
However. . production casing or liner below the production packer or liner hanger PBR system.2. it is Eni-Agip’s policy to use standard service production casing where there is a casing tubing annulus as the tubing is designed for the well environment and isolates the production casing. only a biocide and possibly corrosion inhibitor needs to be added. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 4. Casing exposed to H2S will have a specification in accordance to NACE MR01-75.A. in general. Casing above the packer is exposed to the completion or packer fluid which must be chemically dosed to prevent any corrosion although.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 88 OF 295 ENI S. Casing Specifications Design criteria and casing specifications are fully described in the ‘Casing Design Manual’.A .Casing Schemes and Terminology 4. Specifically with regard to metallurgy.1. will have similar specification to the tubing in order to combat corrosion from produced fluids. The crossover between the two different materials must be selected in order that there is no localised erosion.
there are problems with logging.2. To help overcome these problems. Refer to the ‘Directional Control and Surveying Procedures Manual’ and the ‘Casing Design Manual’. .000psi.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 89 OF 295 ENI S. the turning radius for an open hole or liner may be short but a long radius is required for gravel packing or installation of pre-packed screens.1. Some operators specify premium connections if the wellhead pressure is to be above 5.250psi. injection or gas lift supply. The method of drilling horizontal wells also needs to be considered by the drilling engineer as the turning radius will be dependant upon the completion method employed. cementing.A. Completion tools or equipment operated by different methods must be adopted. gravel packing and the completion process as wireline cannot be used above this limit. For instance. This is due to the poor performance of the API Buttress Thread. Although the drilling of highly deviated and horizontal wells is now commonplace it should o be noted that in wells above 70 deviation. 4. WELL DEVIATION SURVEYS A well directional survey must be carried out to ensure the tolerances for well deviation and doglegs have not been exceeded as the installation of the completion is sensitive to angle and getting fairly large diameter tubing through casing doglegs as well as placing extreme bending loads on the tubing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 4. however this does not satisfy all situations. Usually production casing is held in tension but this may not be adequate enough in high temperature and thermal wells to prevent buckling. a premium thread connection should be used to reduce the risk of leakage especially if the pressure is above circa 1. Casing Connections 0 REVISION Where an annulus is to be used as a production conduit for gas production. many operators drill ‘S’ shaped profiles with drop off through the pay zone for critical wells.3. Any anomalies found in the deviation survey needs to be communicated to the completion engineer to ensure that all potential problems are analysed and will not impede the completion of the well. The main problem in casing design of producing wells over exploration wells is the increased temperature. An overpull is often required especially if the casing is not cemented into the previous shoe.p.
the list of recommendations given below will help improve the success of zonal isolation: • • • • • • Drill the hole within gauge. formation properties.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 90 OF 295 ENI S. The cement column should extend well past (circa 500m) above the highest pay zone but also cover aquifers or any other potential producing zones. Condition the mud correctly. A minimum lap of 100m is normal. A cement job which does not successfully flush out the drilling fluid in front of the cement and.A. and to isolate higher weaker formations from well pressures.p. channelling and micro-annuli may be formed which are paths through which the formation fluids can flow. operating conditions. Many operators prefer to cement up inside the previous casing shoe to provide even greater support and protection.3. This problem can be alleviated by thorough planning. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 4. Failure to cement washouts. temperatures. o Cement strength loss due to high temperatures (<230 F) when using normal Portland cement. Poor cement procedure leading to gas entry or cross flow. prevent movement of formation fluids along the well path for reservoir control. however this is not possible in high rate offshore wells where temperature increase in the casing/tubing annulus on the trapped fluids causes pressure which cannot be bled off at surface. Thermal wells are normally cemented to surface to avoid this problem.3.1. eccentric loading. Production Casing Cementing The minimum cement column height requirements will depend upon local regulations. using a good fluids programme and adopting good operating procedures. if there is poor bonding between the outside of the pipe and the cement. Dissolution of evaporites by the cement. excessive movement due to pressure or temperature and external corrosion. Use a thin slurry at the front end. Use cement with an API high temperature/high pressure fluid loss of less than 3 3 200cm /30 min for high permeability oil wells and 50cm /30min for gas wells. Poor formation bonding due to lack of mud cake removal. fluid properties and pressures. The cement also acts to support and protect the casing from buckling. CASING CEMENTING CONSIDERATIONS 0 REVISION The primary function of the cement around the production casing is to isolate individual formations to provide selectivity. In general. Use a 500ft low viscosity spacer with surfactant if required. . Use the highest practical displacement velocities. The main problems associated with primary cementing are: • • • • • • • Channelling of the cement and bypassing of mud due to pipe eccentricity and poor fluid rheology. 4. and bonding between the cement and the formation. therefore is allowed to bleed off at the casing shoe. Cement dehydration opposite high temperature zones.
Use batch mixing whenever possible. Centralise the casing in the pay zone. 0 REVISION Design the programme so as the cement has a minimum contact time of 4 mins at all points where zonal isolation is needed. Generally there is ambivalence shown towards the results of cement bond evaluation logs and unless they show extremely poor conditions. .A. Pipe reciprocation should be used or otherwise rotation.2.p. the tool averages the condition around the circumference of the casing and sometimes fails to detect small channels. Production Casing Cement Evaluation To ensure that the cement programme has been successfully isolated the formation/casing. formation/liner or casing/liner annulus. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 • • • • • • 4. which uses eight helically mounted sensors to scan the cement and provides a measurement of the compressive strength which should in theory give a better detection. the quality of the cement should be evaluated.200ft above the top of the pay zone. they tend to be ignored especially as repair of cement jobs is very difficult to conduct successfully. This is carried out by running a cement bond log (CBL-VDL) which is an acoustic device that looks for channelling. The cement column should extend 1. Ensure quality control of the cement formulation is strict. However. A more recent tool is the Schlumberger CET.3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 91 OF 295 ENI S.
To enable this process. that satisfy the above. This means that the SOR must be established. it is necessary to describe the basic architectural components of a completion. particularly: • • • Reservoir and wellbore interface. Although the tools are available to provide the most complex completions to solve severe production or mechanical problems and meet the specific objectives. WELL COMPLETION DESIGN The aim of this section is now to develop the structure of the completion based on the work carried out according to the previous sections.a The solutions adopted will vary according on the well objectives. it should never be forgotten that. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 5.p. environment. in principle. Refer to figure 5. anticipated well problems and cost. now need to be developed. location.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 92 OF 295 ENI S. the conceptual designs have been developed and the optimum well performance determined. artificial lift method (if applicable). The completion structure and procedures. Casing and tubing interface. completions should be kept as simple in design as possible to minimise the installation risks and costs. Tubing and wellhead interface. However this cannot be carried out in isolation as well servicing and workover philosophies as well as the completion installation process need to be considered.A.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.p.A.Completion Design Interface Classification Options .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 93 OF 295 ENI S.A .
b below.1. Secondary Targets Potential secondary or re-completion targets need to be identified and included in the SOR because if they are not considered.A. then it may be more economic to segregate production. or as more likely. With zones of have significant different inflow performance characteristics. A guideline chart for recommended isolation depth is shown in Fig figure 5. . The effect of bridge plug setting and completion equipment lengths on zonal isolation must be considered as they may demand longer separation intervals. they may be inadvertently isolated behind a liner lap or shoe track.1. by using a multiple-string completion. e. Distance From Fluid Contacts The distance of producing interval from fluid contacts may influence the offtake rate and the perforating policy. however for the short term gain there may be increased penalties later with increased gas or water production which may need to be plugged off by a well intervention. cost and installation. It is obviously economically attractive to perforate high permeable sections close to fluid contacts.p. If fracture stimulation is planned the separation distance is approximately three times greater. etc. This can be achieved by drilling a well into each zone which is extremely costly. between production packers. The downside of using multiple completions is there complexity. These aspects need to be considered as does perforating the lower sections in downdip wells in flank and bottom water drive reservoirs. Minimum Zone Separation The main cementing service companies are able to provide information on the minimum separation by good cement between zones for effective hydraulic under differential depletion conditions. They should be treated as a normal pay zone which will be left unperforated. 5. The effects of partial peforating need to be considered on the well IPR. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.1. FACTORS INFLUENCING COMPLETION DESIGN Reservoir Considerations Production Zone Isolation 0 REVISION Consideration of reservoir management and regulatory requirements will determine the zonal isolation in thick pay zones (<30m) or multiple-zone completions. Special attention must be given to layers with great in permeability variations to determine differential depletion.g. Wells with gas cap or water drive reservoirs which need to be produced at controlled rates may also be candidates for a multiple completion.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 94 OF 295 ENI S.
and underbalanced if desired.Guideline for Length of Cemented Interval Required for Zonal Isolation Interval Length The interval length should be determined by reservoir requirements as perforating lengths can be adjusted to suit. The use of tubing conveyed means that great lengths can be installed and fired simultaneously. 10 and 15ft and through tubing guns 20.B . This is particularly useful on perforated horizontal wells. however one (or more sections) can be partially loaded. although deploying and retrieving these long lengths may impact on safety and needs use of a safe deployment method. the well needs to flowed which carries a risk of the guns being ‘blown’ up the hole.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 95 OF 295 ENI S. To create an underbalance for other runs. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.A. . Casing guns standard perforating lengths are 5. 30 and 40ft. Wireline guns are run and fired sequentially therefore only the first perforations can be carried out with a static underbalance.
A. perforated completions should be used over open hole for well control as the casing. 5. It is essential that sufficient clearance is available to allow the completion to fit comfortably inside the casing profile.3. Mechanical Considerations 0 REVISION The main mechanical influence on completion design is the casing profile and deviation discussed previously in sections 4.1.1 for the Eni-Agip Company policy on the use of packers.2. Modern compact or high performance wellheads are preferred over the traditional spool systems as the completion may be installed with out BOP removal (Refer to the ‘Drilling Design Manual’). Entry into liner laps in high angles are also problematic.2. is a mechanical barrier which is safer for BOP removal. Downhole safety valves are installed as per the En-Agip company policy given in section 8. especially when running the completion from a moving floater so consideration needs to be given to the procedure or by using an automatic mule shoe. etc.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 96 OF 295 ENI S.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.1 and 4. once it is tested. To this end it is important to carry out the procedures to prepare the well by cleaning it and displacing to clean completion fluids and checking the internal drift. Whenever possible and economical.1. Downhole packers in the completion string which anchor the tubing are barriers used to protect the annulus from well pressures and corrosion from well fluids although operationally they also isolate gas lift gas or pump power fluids from formation pressures in gas lift and pump completions.2.1. Refer to section 8. Safety Considerations Safety of the personnel and well site installation are paramount in completion design and the completion procedures. The type of production packer selected is dependent upon its application and installation method due to hole angle. whether it is single trip. With completions large tubing sizes. this may mean running of a tapered casing string to accommodate the TRSV and control line. .
Standard perforated Fracture Stimulation Cased hole gravel packs • 5. The decision process depends on four key issues: • • • • Is there a risk of causing damage to well productivity with a cased and perforated completion ? Is zonal selectivity required ? Is fracture stimulation required ? Is there any potential sand production ? .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 97 OF 295 ENI S. The well is now completed with no casing set across the formation (Refer to figure 5. Slotted pipe Wire wrapped screens Open hole gravel packs Perforated completions. the method of completion entails drilling down to a depth just above the producing formation and setting the production casing.c). Open Hole Completions Their use is predominately in thick carbonate or hard sandstone reservoirs that produce from fracture systems or thin permeable streaks which are difficult to identify on logs and are easily damaged by drilling and cementing operations.2.a): • • Open hole completions Uncemented liner completions. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.2. Often referred to as a ‘barefoot’ completions.A. RESERVOIR-WELLBORE INTERFACE 0 REVISION There are three reservoir-wellbore interface options which can be further classified into seven major alternatives in completion architecture (Refer to figure 5. They maximise the fracture intersections and inflow potential due to the large surface area if drilling and completion damage is avoided.p. An open hole completions can subsequently be converted to a liner completion to overcome the selectivity problem. A hole is now drilled through the formation exposing it to the wellbore. However they provide little or no selectivity in reservoir management to reduce unwanted water or gas production.1.
The selection process depends on four key issues is the same as for open hole completions: • • • • Is there a risk of causing damage to well productivity with a cased and perforated completion ? Is zonal selectivity required ? Is fracture stimulation required ? Is there any potential sand production ? . they still have the same selectivity and undesired fluid problems.2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 98 OF 295 ENI S.c).A. Uncemented Liner Completions Uncemented liners are used to overcome production problems associated with open hole completions and to extend their application to other types of formations. Although they have some advantages over open hole.Open Hole and Uncemented Liner Interface Options 5. sand screen or is gravel packed (Refer to figure 5.2.C .p. The formation is supported by a either a slotted liner.
however carries more risk than a cased hole gravel pack. Clearance required for washover (1 . The location of the packer and packer tailpipe. Gravel pack design with regard to grain size.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 99 OF 295 ENI S. It also helps in liquid lift due to the smaller flow area. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION If a slotted liner or plain screen is to be used. or millable.1.5ins on OD) and whether centralisers should be expandable.016mm. The slot widths can range between 0. The stability of the hole during under-reaming and the limitations this may impose on hole angle and screen length. The open hole is under-reamed to remove drilling damage and to create a larger annulus for the filter sized gravel to pack against the formation wall. . a designer must also consider: • • Whether to use the more expensive and finer wire wrapped screen or slotted pipe. it is the most effective sand control measure for weak sandstones and unconsolidated rocks. coarse sands would readily flow onto the screen forming a rubble zone. External Gravel pack An open hole gravel pack is used where the sands are too fine or abrasive for a plain screen.A.254 . the following additional issues need to be considered: • • • • Loss circulation control during under-reaming and tripping. Slot width requirement which is dependent on the sand size and stability. fluid viscosity and control objectives. and how the LCM can be subsequently removed before gravel packing. solid type. When properly installed. and finer slots or pre-packed screens for filtering and for uniform sized sands. A slot width that would retain the coarsest 10% of the sand is common practice in heavy oil wells with coarser slots for light oil wells. Is gravel packing more suitable alternative ? • • • For open hole gravel packs. etc. volumes. reserve volume. A slotted liner is used where there is a risk of wellbore instability to maintain a bore through the formation which otherwise might collapse and plug off all production. Type of gravel packer and will it double as the production packer ? Slotted Liner This type of completion entails a liner with flow slots machined throughout its length installed below the production casing.1.p. length of blank pipe. Wire Wrapped Screen A plain wire wrapped screen is used either as a simple filter to strain out small amounts of intermittently produced sand from a relatively stable formation or as a sand retention screen where high permeability.
Cased Hole Gravel Pack Cased hole gravel pack completions are used to control sand production in perforated completions. fracture stimulation and cased hole gravel pack (Refer to figure 5. high shot density. a large flow area must be achieved by using ‘big hole’ charges with the maximum shot density (dependent on gun size).g. Since the gravel has an finite permeability. and perforating method. lower costs. the cased hole gravel is placed between the cased hole and the sand screen. i. Deep penetrating perforating charges are generally used especially in hard rock. There are three subdivisions. The key issues in cased hole completion design are: • • • • Perforated interval selection.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 100 OF 295 ENI S. shot density. . ultra deep penetration or stimulation treatments.d). increased safety and convenience that they provide. Standard Perforated Casing Completions These are used when the rock is reasonably stable and permeable. with the gravel forced into the perforations holding the formation sand in place. flexibility. e. Completion fluids programme selection with regard to fluid quality and formation damage. Perforated Completions 0 REVISION This type of completions are the most common world-wide due to the selectivity. Perforating underbalance may also improved perforation clean-up. Fracture Stimulation Fracture stimulation is used to increase the effective sandface area and to provide a high permeability flow path to the wellbore increasing the IPR from low permeability rocks (<25md). Unlike the open hole gravel pack. would need to be designed with the additional loading of the stimulation operation. with the shot density dependent upon the vertical permeability and layer frequency. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.p. Type of formation and if special perforating techniques are required.3. underbalance or overbalance. gun type.e. standard. ideally. casing guns. etc. Effective zonal isolation due to cement quality and distance between zones.A. the deliverability requirements and method of perforating. The risk in fracture stimulation is that the fractures will more than likely not be contained within the pay zone and the casing cementing programme completion equipment rating. through tubing guns or TCP.2. The deep penetrating charges are desired to perforate through the damage zone cause by the drilling or completing process.
A. • • .2. Sequential zonal production through live well intervention methods by re-completion. Single string multi-zone segregated production by initial (or eventual) commingling by sequential (or alternating) production. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.D . Multi-Zone Completions There are four main methods of completing multi-zone wells (Refer to figure 5.Perforated Casing Interface Options 5. Multi-string (dual) multi-zone segregated production using parallel strings using concentric strings.p.4.e): • • Commingled production allowing all zones to produce together.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 101 OF 295 ENI S.
They may also be used for reservoir management. They can often double an individual wells productivity for a reasonably low cost increment. Concentric strings may yield higher flow capability but obviously no downhole safety valve can be installed in the outer tubing. If zones are close together.p. however. Either parallel strings or concentric strings can be used. completion designers prefer to use single string/single zone completion methods for mutli-zone situations. Triple strings and indeed quadruple string have been used in the past. reservoir management and regulatory requirements. reduce excessive gas. Sequential Zonal Production Due to its simplicity and ease of installation. but generally they are not economic as they are too restrictive of well capacity. Some operators use the casing tubing annulus as another flow conduit but this is subject to individual operator philosophy and regulatory rules dictating. This preference is subject. however there is a trade off in that flow efficiency of the deeper zones and depth access for artificial lift and well killing will be compromised. If artificial lift is required parallel strings would normally be needed. the zones are depleted from the bottom upwards and temporarily suspended or abandoned sequentially and then the next higher zone completed. Dual String Multi-Zone Production Dual string multi-zone completions are often used offshore or on stacked reservoirs where the production rate is per zone is limited by inflow performance and the previous methods described above would be uneconomic. An option is to conduct a workover pulling the tubing and re-completing by moving the packer depth upwards.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 102 OF 295 ENI S. Downhole chokes or regulators can be installed to control flow from each zone when commingling to prevent cross-flow. In this method. etc. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Commingled Production 0 REVISION Commingled production is only allowable is limited instances where there are no reservoir management problems and regulatory rules allow. to economics. by allowing commingling or individual section production at different stages in the wells life in order to maximise the full potential of the reservoir. Single String Multi-Zone Production These provide easy methods of bring on other fresh zones when the first zone experiences production problems. the initial completion can be installed to allow plugging and perforating of each zone by well intervention methods.A. .
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 103 OF 295 ENI S.A.p.E .Multi-Zone Completions . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.
104 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.3. CASING-TUBING INTERFACE 0
There are three main casing-tubing interface options which have six sub-divisions (Refer to figure 5.f): • Packerless completions Anchored Unanchored Tubingless. Packer Completions Shallow set Deep set. PBR Completions Liner hanger.
Packers and PBRs are required to provide a seal between the tubing and production casing or liner for the following reasons: • • • • • • • • • To isolate the casing-tubing annulus from well fluids and pressure acting as a barrier on the annulus side. To prevent heading in the annulus improving flow conditions. Prevent annulus corrosion from well fluids. To allow the annulus to be used for supplying artificial lift fluids or injection of inhibitors. To allow the annulus to be used for production (if permitted). To isolate liner laps or casing leaks. To anchor the tubing if no tubing movement is desired. To facilitate well operations through having wireline nipples in a tailpipe, e.g. well plugging, BHP gauge positioning, etc. To protect formations from damage from well intervention or workover fluids by plugging in the tailpipe.
Some onshore low pressure wells are completed without a packer or liner PBR as the risk of damage to the wellhead, hence the risk of injury to personnel and pollution of the environment, is low. This has both advantages and disadvantages. There is one barrier less on the annulus side and the casing may be exposed to corrosive well fluids and the well pressure even if it is low and some operators do not allow this practice. On the other hand, on pump completions it is useful for venting off gas. It is essential for plunger lift completions which uses annulus gas as its energy source for unloading liquids. Tubingless completions, i.e. wells which use a small diameter casing or a tubing as the production casing, offers serious well control problems as there is no downhole safety at all. These are used on low rate, low pressure wells but are not allowed by most operating companies.
105 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Anchored tubing completions are used on rod pumpers to keep the tubing in tension so that the reciprocation of the rods does not cause buckling on the upstroke and stretch on the downstroke unless the well is shallow and annulus clearance is small. Packer completions are the most popular due to their flexibility in the options in which they are available and their ability to be installed in an exact position at any desired depth compared to the liner PBR. The liner PBR completion offers a larger through bore than a packer option and, therefore are used in high rate wells and mono-bore completions where full bore access is gained to he formation. The liner PBR interface should not be confused with the packer PBR system which although is exactly the same in basic design, is used for packer-tubing sealing and catering for tubing movement.
Figure 5.F - Casing-Tubing Interfaces
106 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.3.1. Packer Applications 0
Packer application with regard to completion design is addressed in this section as there are some basic features which affect the completion architecture. Although there are many varieties of packers available, there are three basic types used in completion designs: • • • Permanent Retrievable Permanent Retrievable.
Eni-Agip do not have any particular policy to the type of packer system to be used in a particular situation due to the wide range of packers available and changing technology but do operate a packer qualification system to ensure that any packer used meets with specific criteria. The packer qualification system is specified in STAP-M-1-M-5010. Retrievable Packer Systems The definition of a retrievable packer is that it is installed and retrieved on the completion tubing. They have advantages in that they can be installed in high angle wells although their operating differential pressure rating, temperature rating and bore size are less than equivalent permanent packers. It is important that designers fully consider the effects of pressure and tubing stresses on these packer systems and associated packer-tubing connections. Their packing element systems are also more sensitive to well fluids as they are more complex due to their ability to be retrieved but after redressing they can be reused. Retrievable packers tend to be used for the following applications: • • • • Completions which have relative short life span. Where there is likely to be workovers requiring full bore access. Multi-zone completions for zonal segregation. In relatively mild well conditions.
Retrievable packer setting mechanisms are by: • • • • Tubing tension Tubing compression Hydraulic pressure Tubing rotation.
Tension or compression set packers are very sensitive to tubing movement and are rarely used nowadays owing to the benefits and variety of other retrievable packers available.
107 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 Permanent Packer Systems 0
The definition of a permanent packer is that it is retrieved from the well by milling. Permanent packers have high differential pressure and temperature ratings and larger bores. They have many options of both tailpipe and packer-tubing attachments to cater for a large range of applications such as: • • • • • Severe or hostile operating conditions with differential pressures > 5,000psi and o temperatures in excess of 300 F and high stresses. Long life completions. Where workovers are expected to be above the packer, hence not requiring its removal which is costly. Where workovers are expected to be above the packer and the packer tailpipe can be used for plugging the well and isolating foreign fluids from the formation. Providing large bore for high rate wells.
Permanent packer setting mechanisms are by: • • • • Wireline explosive charge setting tool. Tubing tension. Hydraulic pressure by workstring setting tool or on the completion string. Tubing rotation.
Permanent Retrievable Packer Systems Permanent retrievable packers are a hybrid of the permanent style packer designed to be retrieved on a workstring without milling. They offer similar performances as permanent packers but generally have smaller bores. All the packers above can be equipped with tailpipes to accommodate wireline downhole tools such as plugs, standing valves, BHP gauges, etc. 5.3.2. Packer-Tubing Interfaces Tubing can be interfaced with packers through three basic options: • Fixed By threaded connection to the packer mandrel as with retrievable packers. Snap latch requiring an overpull to release By an anchor latch system to a permanent packer. Free moving Seal unit in a packer bore. Seal unit in a PBR attached to the packer. Travel joint. ELTSR. Limited movement Seal unit set down in a packer bore allowing upward movement only. Closed PBR or ELTSR.
108 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Free movement or partial movement options are used when tubing movement must be catered for otherwise it may be over-stressed due to tubing forces found through the stress analysis (Refer to section 7). However, sometimes they suffer from premature seal failure due to being dynamic seals and if the material type has not been correctly selected for the environment and pressure differentials. To help prevent seal failure, seal units can be shear pinned in a mid open or closed position to prevent seal movement until the stresses in the tubing reach a predetermined level. The selected packer-tubing interface has a significant effect on the completion architecture especially with regard to installation procedure, well kill method, stimulation treatment and type of hanger system. The most popular packer systems are those which have ‘one trip’ installation saving extra trips by workstring or wireline to install the packer before running the completion tubing. 5.3.3. Annulus Circulation Communication between the tubing and annulus on packer type completions is consider to be beneficial to efficient well killing, maintaining a fluid barrier in the annulus, circulating kill fluid before workovers or circulating in underbalance fluids well kick off. This is the same reasons for installing kill strings in packerless completions. Circulating devices, typically sliding sleeves or sliding side doors (SSDs) installed above the top packers, are used for this purpose but they have traditionally been a weak link in design when seals material was not suited to the well conditions. This would require a workover to replace the sleeve so other devices such as SPMs are used as the seals can be recovered and replaced by wireline methods. Some operators recommend that no circulation device be used which limits the flexibility of the completion and requires a tubing punch to be used for circulation before workovers. If a circulating device is undesired but the option is to kill the well by circulation rather than bullheading, a single shot shear kill valve can be installed which is operated by annulus pressure. Annulus circulation is used for: • • • • • Displace completion fluids and Kick-Off wells. Isolation/opening of producing intervals in single selective or dual selective completions. Well killing in tight formations where bullheading might be difficult. Installation of hydraulic pumps The SSD type circulating valves are normally equipped with a landing nipple profile in the upper sub to allow installation of a straddle to stop leaks or for normal wireline nipple uses.
annular safety system). Temperature operating range. The casing head and tubing hanger spools are now commonly replaced by compact or unitised wellheads (Refer to the ‘Drilling Design Manual’) to reduce height and improve safety as there are less BOP removals for spool installations.g. It also isolates the top of the tubing-casing annulus.A . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. Retained fluid rating (Refer to section 6). • • 5. Mandrel compression hangers.4. Wellhead specifications are laid out in API Specification 6A and are rated by: • • Maximum working pressure according to the maximum anticipated surface pressure. It consists of an assembly made up of casing head spools. Direct attachment to the Xmas tree (threaded). Operating Range. mates and seals with the Xmas tree and provides annulus access to all the annuli. Ram type tension hangers. oF -75 to 180 -60 to 180 -40 to 180 -20 to 180 0 to 150 0 to 180 0 to 250 -20 to 250 Table 5. tubing hanger/spool and Xmas tree. o Temperature Classification K L M P S T U PSL O Tubing Hanger Systems There are five common types of tubing hanger systems available: • • • • • Slip and seal assemblies. .A.4. TUBING-WELLHEAD INTERFACE 0 REVISION The wellhead carries the casing and completion loads which is transferred to the ground through the surface casing.API Temperature Classifications Above 250 F the working pressure is de-rated against temperature (down to o 72% of rating at 650 F. Product specification level PSL (Refer to API spec 6A).ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 109 OF 295 ENI S.1. Downhole tubing hangers (e.p.
Depending on the well location. . On subsea wells vertical annular access is usually required for well plugging which requires mandrel type hangers with orientation to the guide base and. Other considerations are DHSV control lines. Dual hanger systems also need to be orientated to mate with the dual Xmas tree. hence subsea tree.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 110 OF 295 ENI S. downhole chemical injection lines. downhole electronic gauge cables and ESP cables which are terminated by stab seals. extended necks or annular ring seals. well plugging for tree removal needs to be considered and that is usually satisfied by having a locking profile in the hanger bores. i. subsea.e. flow or supply.p.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The main consideration in hanger selection is whether the tubing is to be placed in compression or tension and/or the number of tubings. platform or land. either wireline nipple profile or a back pressure thread for land wells.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 111 OF 295 ENI S.G .A.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.API Recommended Minimum PSL for Wellhead Equipment .
2 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 10000 5. (psi) Top flange (in) Diam tbg (in) CASING HEAD SPOOL TUBING SPOOL TUBING HANGER CASING HEAD ENI S.P.3 13 5/8 5000 13 3/8 & 9 5/8 DCSFSL 1 1.1 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5. W. (psi) Ref. W.1 13 5/8 5000 9 5000 6.P.1 26 3/4 3000 0 Table 5.1 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5.A. W.1 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5.1 13 5/8 5000 9 5000 6.1 2.P. (psi) Btm Flange (in) Max.2 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 10000 5.p.2 9 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5. nr Max. W. W.5 6.3 13 5/8 5000 13 3/8 & 9 5/8 MSCL 3 1.8 6.9 6.8 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5.6 26 3/4 3000 21 1/4 5000 2.3 13 5/8 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2. (psi) Top flange (in) Max.nr Top flange (in) Max. (psi) Btm (CSG) (in) ARPO MSCL 1 2. W.4 2.4 13 5/8 13 5/8 13 5/8 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.4 6.2 13 5/8 10000 9 10000 5000 5000 5000 10000 10000 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.1 2. off-shore single and dual completion class -A and class -B (STAP -M-1-SS-5701E) AGIP CODE CASING HEAD SPOOL Ref.Eni-Agip Standard Wellhead Equipment Chart PAGE (*) Typical wellhead configuration for deep wells (po Valley) REVISION 112 OF 295 .5 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.2 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 10000 5. (psi) Top flange (in) Max.1 9 1.4 2.3 9 9 9 11 7 1/16 7 1/16 7 1/16 9 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5.7 6.4 2.1 2. Agip Division Ref.P. nr Diam (in) Max.4 13 5/8 5000 5000 10000 10000 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2. (psi) Ref.P. nr Btm flange (in) Max.4 2.P.4 2.6 6.5 2.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 IDENTIFICATION CODE DCSO3 1. W.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 DCSFSL 2 1. W.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 10000 5000 5000 5000 10000 10000 2 x 2 3/8 2 x 3 1/2 3 1/2 2 x 2 3/8 2 x 2 3/8 2 x 2 3/8 DCSFSL 3 1.4 2.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 (*) 24 1/2 1. (psi) Ref.1 13 5/8 5000 9 5000 6.B.1 13 5/8 5000 9 5000 6.2 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.3 13 5/8 10000 13 5/8 10000 10000 2.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 3° CASING HEAD SPOOL 10000 13 5/8 10000 1.P.3 13 5/8 5000 11 7 1/16 7 1/16 7 1/16 9 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.5 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 10000 2.Typical outlines for on-shore. nr Btm Flange (in) Max.4 2.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 SCSO 1 1.1 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 STAP-P-1-M-7100 DCSO 2 1.3 13 5/8 5000 13 3/8 & 9 5/8 5000 5000 5000 5000 2 7/8 3 1/2 5 2 x 2 3/8 MSCL 2 1.P.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 DCSO 1 1.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 113 OF 295 ENI S.Typical Wellhead .H .p.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 4 3 2 1 20" 13 3/8" 9 5/8" 7" WP (psi) Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 3K (A) 470 620 472 - 3K (B) 470 620 472 - 5K (C) 470 625 472 - 5K (D) 470 690 670 581 - 10K (E) 470 690 660 700 - 10K (F) 510 850 700 700 -- 15K (G) 510 850 700 750 15K (H) 510 850 700 750 Figure 5.
A.Typical Unitised Wellhead and Xmas Tree .p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 114 OF 295 ENI S.I . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.
4. 15. . Metal-To-Metal Seals The purpose of metal-to-metal seals is to provide enhanced sealing where it is required in particular applications.4. The production wing.p. A swab valve is an essential element to enable safe rig up of vertical well interventions by wireline. 5. In very high pressure wells (i.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 115 OF 295 ENI S. The kill wing is often permanently connected up to the kill line to a permanent pump or to allow quick and easy connection of a portable pump.3).4. The important pointers for the design engineer are: • • • Conventional composite flanged connection trees with a single master valve are the norm for land and low to moderate offshore wells.000psi) Eni-Agip normally installs an additional gate valve between the tubing spool and the Xmas tree to provide double barrier protection. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. If the tree upper master valve and production wings are fully automated. the control system should be designed to close the wing valve first a few seconds before the upper master to avoid erosion or damage over a period of time to the upper master gate and seats as they are more difficult to repair. Chemical injection points are usually available at the tree or through the hanger system for downhole. choke and flowline arrangement must be configured to meet with how the well is closed-in and opened up. Xmas Trees 0 REVISION The type of Xmas tree and construction are important as they have an effect on safety and cost. Trees for sour service or high pressure will normally have two outlets. coiled tubing or snubbing services or for the BPV rod lubricator. Today it is normal to have to justify only a single master valve as the upper master is usually an ESD hydraulically operated valve which is at risk of undue wear and tear. Pressure losses of the offtake system must be considered in the well deliverability analysis (Refer to Section 2.A.3. production and kill wing sides. which is often a remote hydraulic operated valve. • • • • • A typical Xmas tree is shown in figure 5. Policy Metal-to-metal seals shall be used in the applications outlined in the following sections.2.i. A second master valve is normally required to enable repair to any of the other tree valves with two barriers in situ (the lower master valve and the tubing hanger plug).e.
000 10. Sweet Service Wells (with top hole temperature less than 100°C) ' = YES Sealing WP.000 A B C D A B C D A B C D ' ' ' ' ' ' & & ' ' ' ' ' ' & ' & & ' ' ' ' & ' & & ' ' .000 >10. Oil And Gas Producers These tables apply equally to onshore and offshore wells. C and D will be used in the tables in the tables below.p. psi 5. These designations A. On production casing or production liner.000 Gas Injectors Sealing WP.000 10.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 116 OF 295 ENI S. psi 5.000 10. psi 5.000 >10.000 A B & = NO C D ' ' ' & ' ' & & & ' ' ' Sweet Service Wells (with top hole temperature exceeding 100°C) Sealing WP.000 H2S Service Wells Sealing WP. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Application 0 REVISION The following criteria is applicable to the various conditions listed in the following tables: a) b) c) d) Between producing strings/casing/tubing hanger and tubing hanger seal flange. B.A. psi 5. On control line connections.000 10. Between tubing hanger and tubing spool.
This may lend to the selection of a wireline retrievable type safety valve rather than a tubing retrievable type as in the event of failure. a design life for the completion will have been established. on an easily accessible land wells where servicing and workover methods are relatively much less costly. Another example is on offshore subsea fields. psi 5. 5. FUTURE CONSIDERATIONS Built into the conceptual stage. psi 5. . well servicing should be minimised as they require a floating vessel from which to deploy the re-entry system. The well location and type of development has a large impact on the techniques available and cost of well servicing and maintenance optimising the completion design around the potential problems and remedial techniques is a balancing act between effectiveness and cost.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 117 OF 295 ENI S. This will have an impact of the completion architecture and establish a philosophy. servicing can be conducted almost on demand.A.000 10. and may be problematic on platforms where space.000 A B C D ' ' &(1) ' & & ' ' (1) If H2S is present it will be a YES.5. This means well life should be planned for the life of the field or as long as feasible (typically 7-10 years) although some unplanned problems may occur.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Water Injectors Sealing WP. This will have included identification of the potential reasons for well interventions or workover servicing. due to the high cost of subsea well re-entrys. where the stand-off from the water or gas zones increases the risk of producing early unwanted fluids.000 A B C 0 REVISION D ' ' & ' & & ' ' Artificial Lift Wells (both onshore and offshore wells) Sealing WP. Alternately. In this case to the stand-off can be increased but there is a penalty in lower initial production rates. height and weight are at a premium. As an example of this is horizontal completions selected to maximise initial well productivity. During this process future well servicing and maintenance will also have been planned. Well servicing or workover techniques also have an impact on the well area with regard to height and lateral space.000 10. the valve can be replaced cheaply without requiring a workover.
5. and need reperforating. producing zones are sometimes damaged by scale build up or movement of fines. then straddles are sometimes utilised to keep pressure off the SCSSV and Xmas tree.p. Excessive water or gas production due to fingering which requires continuing production from lower zones can be isolated by cement squeezing or if using a monobore type completion by installing a straddle across the interval on wireline or coiled tubing methods. If a multi-zone single string selective completion design has been installed then producing zones can be closed off or opened up by wireline techniques and hence.2. Also. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. It could also increase the tubing movement and alter the choice of tubing movement device and spacing out.A. etc. If the well has been planned for these operations then the completion may have been designed to accomplish these operations without pulling of the tubing in a workover operation. are more flexible but have higher initial capital cost.5.1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 118 OF 295 ENI S. If multi-zone multi-string completions are installed then the individual zones can simply be closed off by shutting in the well at surface or. the effects of the pressures causing additional stresses on the tubing and packer need to be input and catered for in the tubing design process (Refer to Section 7).4). e. the effects on the completion materials needs to be considered or alternatively to use coiled tubing for spotting of the acid before pumping to the formation. Where this problem has not been planned into the completion design a complete workover to re-complete may be required. or as producing zones become depleted and require isolating before brining on other zones. if there are more than one zone to a string. the surface pressure would demand a higher pressure rated Xmas tree than required for production only. by opening and closing isolation sleeves. A single string sequential completion may be employed where existing perforations can be isolated simply by installation of a bridge plug on wireline but often the perforations require to be squeezed off with cement (Refer to Section 5. The next production zone can then be perforated using through tubing perforating techniques (Refer to Section 9). If the costs of upgrading the well tubulars to resist these stresses are prohibitive. Stimulation 0 REVISION If future stimulation operations are required such as fracturing. If acid stimulations are planned. 5. This can be conducted by coiled tubing or snubbing services without killing the well. cement squeezes and reperforating techniques are required.2. Formation Management As the fluid interfaces move through time and unwanted fluids are produced. .g.
A specialist subsea wireline technique has been developed for subsea well interventions without using the riser re-entry system which is much quicker and less costly. Slickline Is probably the most widely used well servicing method and is used for: • • • • • • • • • • Mechanical well clean out (tubing and sump) Installation and retrieval of flow controls (plugs.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 119 OF 295 ENI S. Workovers can be conducted by: • • • Workovers rigs Drilling rigs Hydraulic workover units. chokes. Snubbing. Hydraulic workover cannot be deployed from any floating installation.A. Well Servicing Techniques 0 REVISION Well servicing includes live well intervention services or major workovers to pull the tubing. Fishing (when slickline has been unsuccessful. Braided Line Braided line is used for: • • Heavy duty wireline work (installing large heavy flow controls). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. fishing electric line).) Tubing control (drifting) Calipering Swabbing BHP pressure and temperature monitoring Electronic memory logging Opening and closing of circulation devices Perforating Fishing. . standing valves.p.3. Coiled Tubing. etc.5. Live well interventions can be conducted by: • • • • Wireline (electric line or slickline). gas lift valves. Snubbing cannot be deployed from any floating installation. Pumps.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 120 OF 295 ENI S. 0 REVISION Coiled Tubing Coiled tubing (C/T) is used for: • • • • • • • • • Snubbing Snubbing is used for: • • • • • • • Stimulation (acidising) Cementing Cleaning out tubing and sump Gas lifting Installing flow controls (wireline type tools) Milling Drilling (underbalance side tracking. Calipering Real time BHP surveys Perforating Packer setting Installing bridge plugs.A.p. Snubbing has found a revival with platform horizontal wells where it is used to work in long horizontal sections where C/T may not be capable. . etc. multi-laterals). Stimulation (acidising) Cementing Cleaning out tubing and sump Gas lifting Logging (stiff wireline) Installing flow controls (wireline type tools) Milling Drilling (underbalance side tracking. multi-laterals) Fishing (generally when wireline has been unsuccessful). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Electric Line Electric line is used for: • • • • • • Logging (PLT.
If the IPR curve intersects the TPCs in the region near the minimum. as tubing size increases. It is generally recommended to select a tubing size such that the flowing pressure. Pwf.obviously the tubing selected for the start of production will not be the optimum size after some period of time. Where high costs workovers are involved such as on subsea wells.6. 1 . one increase in API tubing size would double the maximum theoretical capacity. depending on the inflow capability (Refer to Section 2. using the IPR for well 2. The example well #1 in figure 5. Whatever the case. If the PI was infinite.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 121 OF 295 ENI S.j shows that the 4 /2” tubing size should be selected to ensure the offtake exceeds the target of 8. it may be possible to accelerate offtake by the early installation of artificial lift. however. the reduced fluid velocities experienced in larger tubing increase the hydrostatic head because of slippage. typically 5-8 years. the optimum tubing size will be a compromise maximising flow rate and having steady producing 1 conditions. For example. The choice at that time will be to reduce wellhead pressure. the changing conditions over the life of the well must be considered when selecting tubing size. fluid velocities decrease and reduces the frictional effects. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. therefore widening the flat uncertain portion around the minimum. the maximum flow rate is obtained with /2” 7 tubing but only a slight reduction in flow rate is seen if the 2 /8” tubing is selected which gives steadier and regular flow.4). replace the tubing with a smaller size or to implement artificial lift which will have associated costs. As previously mentioned.05 of pressure minimum. pmin to ensure stability.p.A. A fixed flow rate. the selection may be for an even longer period of time. The net result should be higher production rates only if the IPR/TPC intercept remains to the right of the TPC minimum.000 to 9. This shifts the TPC minimum to a higher rate and. These changes are normally declining reservoir pressure and increasing water cut which will reduce flow rates. However. OPTIMISING TUBING SIZE 0 REVISION The optimum tubing size is selected to obtain the desired offtake rates at the lowest capital and operating costs. is greater than 1.000stb/d and perhaps even larger tubing could be investigated. incurring early loss of potential production. The following sub-sections describes the various factors and there effect on TPC. the selection process inevitably involves analysis of the gross fluid deliverability and flow stability under changing reservoir conditions to confirm that the production forecast can be met and to determine when artificial lift or compression is required. The optimum size of tubing is clearly the size which will be most cost effective over a number of years. This usually means at the maximum initial flow rate and maintaining it as long as possible. at low rates. This trend is downwards towards cessation of flow and .
K.Effect of Reservoir Pressure on TPC .Example Tubing Sizes on Well Deliverability Figure 5. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 122 OF 295 ENI S.p.J .A.
However. it collapses towards the origin. both which increase hydrostatic head. e.6. figure 5.A. This clearly shows how important the assumed wellhead pressure accuracy is in the well deliverability forecast and economics. hence flow rates.p. In these circumstances the frictional effects near surface become very dominant and can be alleviated by the use of a tapered tubing string. 5. Also high wellhead pressures reduces the amount of free gas and compresses the remaining free gas.l shows the effect of increasing GLR.3.k.g. build-up of wax. Changes in wellhead pressure can be attributed to slugging in the flowline. facility malfunctions. wells being produced or closed in which use the same flowline. as illustrated in figure 5. All of these reduce the natural flow rate of the well. In reservoirs where significant reductions in reservoir pressure are anticipated. therefore reducing the potential drawdown. Reservoir Pressure 0 REVISION As reservoir pressure declines over time. above a critical point there will be a net increase in the overall pressure drop.2. leading to decreasing natural flow rates. the effect on productivity must be considered during the completion design stage to find the most cost effective method of maximising productivity. 5.6. where workover costs are high to complete with smaller size tubing to ensure stability through the economic life of the well.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 123 OF 295 ENI S. Unstable flow conditions and eventually cessation will occur unless some other change in the system is made.1. Flowing Wellhead Pressure Any flowing wellhead pressure is actually back-pressure transmitted downhole to the bottom-hole flowing pressure.6. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. etc. The larger tubing sizes are more sensitive to changes in flowing wellhead pressure as the density factor dominates more than in smaller tubing. Again this means that smaller tuning may need to be selected instead of the ideal larger tubing to cater for anticipated changes in wellhead pressure. Gas-Liquid Ratio Increasing gas-liquid ratios cause a decrease in hydrostatic head and increase in frictional pressure drop which in the early stages may actually result in increased flow rates.
p.m. Refer to section 10 for the applications and comparisons of the various methods of artificial lift. An example of rates which can be obtained by different artificial lift methods is illustrated in figure 5.6. .A. therefore.Effect of Increasing GLR 5. bottom-hole pressure. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5. Artificial Lift The intention of installing artificial lift is to reduce the hydrostatic head and.L .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 124 OF 295 ENI S. This effectively shifts the TPC downwards bringing the intersection point further towards stable flowing conditions.4.
Examples of Artificial Lift Performance .A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 125 OF 295 ENI S.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.M .
Whether it may be present in large amounts or in extremely small quantities. should be designed to withstand such an environment. CORROSION A production well design should attempt to contain produced corrosive fluids within tubing. During the drilling phase.A. . They should not be produced through the casing/tubing annulus.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 126 OF 295 ENI S. In the presence of water. 6. consideration should be given to setting a sour service casing string before drilling into the reservoir. • Internal corrosion The well should be designed to contain any corrosive fluids (produced or injected) within the tubing string by using premium connections.1. 6.2. if there is any likelihood of a sour corrosive influx occurring. To have a flow of current. However. during routine completion/workover operations or in the event of a tubing or wellhead leak. production casing strings are considered to be subject to corrosive environments when designing casing for a well where hydrogen sulphide (H2S) or carbon dioxide (CO2) laden reservoir fluids can be expected. it is accepted that tubing leaks and pressured annuli are a fact of life and as such. corrosion is an electrolytic process where electrical current flows during the corrosion process. CONTRIBUTING FACTORS TO CORROSION Most corrosion problems which occur in oilfield production operations are due to the presence of water. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 6. Any part of the production casing that is likely to be exposed to the corrosive environment. there must be a generating or voltage source in a completed electrical circuit.p. • External corrosion Where the likelihood of external corrosion due to electrochemical activity is high and the consequences of such corrosion are serious. The BOP stack and wellhead components must also be suitable for sour service. it is necessary to the corrosion process. DEVELOPMENT WELLS Casing corrosion considerations for development wells can be confined to the production casing only. the production casing should be cathodically protected (either cathodically or by selecting a casing grade suitable for the expected corrosion environment).
• Carbon Dioxide (CO2) When carbon dioxide dissolves in water. • Temperature Like most chemical reactions. It is not as corrosive as oxygen. It should be pointed out that H2S also can be generated by introduced microorganisms. of the following conditions alone. it forms carbonic acid. The important factors governing the solubility of carbon dioxide are pressure. Using the partial pressure of carbon dioxide as a yardstick to predict corrosion.p. decreases the pH of the water and increase its corrosivity. Other serious problems which may result from H2S corrosion are hydrogen blistering and sulphide stress cracking. if any. It can cause severe corrosion at very low concentrations of less than 1. • Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) Hydrogen sulphide is very soluble in water and when dissolved behaves as a weak acid and usually causes pitting. The combination of H2S and CO2 is more aggressive than H2S alone and is frequently found in oilfield environments. Corrosion primarily caused by dissolved carbon dioxide is commonly called ‘sweet’ corrosion.A. corrosion rates generally increase with increasing temperature. temperature and chloride content. Pressure increases the solubility to lower the pH. temperature decreases the solubility to raise the pH. or in any combination may be a contributing factor to the initiation and perpetuation of corrosion: • Oxygen (O2) Oxygen dissolved in water drastically increases its corrosivity potential. the following relationships have been found: Partial pressure >30psi usually indicates high corrosion risk. Oxygen usually causes pitting in steels. The solubility of oxygen in water is a function of pressure. . Partial pressure <3psi generally is considered non corrosive. temperature and composition of the water.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 127 OF 295 ENI S.0ppm. Oxygen is less soluble in salt water than in fresh water. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The existence. Attack due to the presence of dissolved hydrogen sulphide is referred to as ‘sour’ corrosion. but usually also results in pitting. Partial pressure 3-30psi may indicates high corrosion risk.
In oil wells.A. impingement or cavitation. . 6. therefore knowledge of temperature gradients is very useful in the choice of the tubular materials since differing materials can be chosen for various depths. but pitting is more likely. The H2S comes into contact with H2O which is an + essential element in this form of corrosion by freeing the H ion. generally corrosion occurs only when the water cut becomes higher than 15% which is the ‘threshold’ or commonly defined as the ‘critical level’ and it is necessary to analyse the water cut profile throughout the producing life of the well. gas saturation with water will produce condensate water and therefore create the conditions for SSC. two separate cases need to be considered. • Velocity of fluids within the environment Stagnant or low velocity fluids usually give low corrosion rates. Evaluation of the SSC problem depends on the type of well being investigated. Corrosion rates usually increase with velocity as the corrosion scale is removed from the casing exposing fresh metal for further corrosion.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 • 0 REVISION Pressure Pressure affects the rates of chemical reactions and corrosion reactions are no exception. above 80°C inhibit the SSC phenomenon. Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) The SSC phenomenon is occurs usually at temperatures of below 80°C and with the presence of stress in the material. High velocities and/or the presence of suspended solids or gas bubbles can lead to erosion. The procedure adopted to evaluate the corrosivity of the produced fluid and the methodology used to calculate the partial pressures of H2S and CO2 will be illustrated in the following sub-sections. corrosion.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 128 OF 295 ENI S. 6.3. In gas wells.g. More gas goes into solution as the pressure is increased this may in turn increase the corrosivity of the solution. the primary importance of pressure is its effect on dissolved gases. Higher temperatures. CO2 and ClCorrosion in injection wells and the effects of pH and souring are not included. vertical and deviated wells: a) In vertical oil wells. In oilfield systems.1. FORMS OF CORROSION The following forms of corrosion are addressed in this manual: Corrosion caused by H2S (SSC) Corrosion caused by CO2 and Cl - Corrosion caused by combinations of H2S. e.3.
. is termed undersaturated.5 atm. Firstly. Otherwise the basic method is used. In this case the pH2S is calculated in two ways: • • Basic method.e. even if in very small quantities. i. the potential for SSC occurring is evaluated by studying the water cut values combined with the type of well and deviation profile. the pH2S is calculated using both methods and the higher of the two results is taken as the a reliable value. deviations >80 ). If the conditions specified above are verified then the pH2S can be calculated.: Water cut >15% for vertical wells o Water cut >1% for horizontal or highly deviated wells (>80 ) 3 3 or if the GOR >800 Nm /m The pH2S calculation is different for undersaturated and oversaturated oil. Material balance method. 6.A SSC is triggered at pH2S >0.e.A. Oil Bearing Well The problem of SSC exists when there is wetting water. Gas Or Condensate Gas Well H2S partial pressure is calculated by: pH2S = SBHP x Y(H2S)/100 where: SBHP = Y(H2S) = = pH2S Static bottom-hole pressure [atm] Mole fraction of H2S Partial H2S pressure [atm] Eq.0035 atm and SBHP >4. If the quantity of H2S in gas at the bubble point pressure [mole fraction = Y(H2S)]. deposits on the surface of the tubulars and so the problem can be likened to the gas well case where the critical threshold for the water cut drops to 1% (WC <1%). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 b) o REVISION 0 In highly deviated wells (i. the risk of corrosion by H2S is higher since the water.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 129 OF 295 ENI S. The following formulae are used to calculate the value of pH2S (partial pressure of H2S) in both the cases of gas (or condensate gas) wells or oil wells. is not known or the values obtained are not reliable. Undersaturated Oil In an oil in which the gas remains dissolved. because the wellhead and bottom-hole pressures are higher than the bubble point pressure (Pb) at reservoir temperature.p.
6. The following algorithm is used to calculate the pH2S: Step 1 pH2S is calculated at the separator (pH2Ssep): pH2Ssep = (Psep x H2Ssep)/106 where: Psep H2Ssep = = Absolute mean pressure at which the separator works (from tests) in atm Mean H2S value in the separator gas (generally measured in ppm) Eq. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Basic Method 0 REVISION This method is used. The pH2S is calculated by: pH2S = Pb x Y(H2S)/100 where: Pb = Y(H2S) = pH2S = Bubble point pressure at reservoir temperature [atm] Mole fraction in the separated gas at bubble point (from PVT data if extrapolated) Partial H2S pressure [atm] Eq.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 130 OF 295 ENI S. Note: H2S sampled in short production tests. The value of H2S in ppm to be used in the calculation must also be from stable flowing conditions.6 PM giac Eq. without comparison with the other method.A. PM : PM = γ × 1000 GOR γ × 1000 + × (d × 29 ) GOR 23. 6.000ppm) and the water cut value from is lower than 5% (this method cannot be used when the WC values are higher). molar fraction in the separated gas at bubble point pressure (Pb) is higher than 2%. when the H2S value in the separated gas at bubble point conditions is known and is reliable or if Y(H2S).C The mean molecular weight of the produced oil. is generally lower than the actual value under stabilised conditions.p.B Material Balance Method This method is used when data from production testing is available and/or when the quantity of H2S is very small (<2. 6.D where: PM Ci Mi d = = = = n mean molecular weight of the reservoir oil = Ci × Mi / 100 i =l Mole % of the ith component of the reservoir oil Molecular weight of the ith component of the reservoir oil Density of the gas at separator conditions referred to air =1 ∑ .6 − 23.
63 atm. There is SSC potential if pH2S >0.E The quantity of H2S in the gas in equilibrium is calculated (per litre of oil): [H2S]gas = (GOR/23.A.6) total number of moles of the liquid phase in the reservoir Henry constant for the reservoir temperature and reservoir oil (see procedure for calculating Henry constant) In general. (See Procedure for calculating Henry constant) Mean molecular weight of the produced oil Specific weight g/l of the produced oil Eq. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The quantity of H2S in moles/litre dissolved in the separator oil is calculated: [H2S]oil = (pH2Ssep/H1 x (γ x 1000)/ PM ) where: H1 PM γ = = = Henry constant of the produced oil at separator temperature (atm/Mole fraction). 6.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 131 OF 295 ENI S. 6.6 x H2Ssep/10 ) where: GOR 23.a which represents the functions H(t) for the three types of oils: • • • Heptane PM N-propyl benzene PM Methylnaphthalene PM =100 = 120 =142 . 6. Procedure For Calculating Henry Constant The value of the Henry constant is a function of the temperature measured at the separator.6 = = Gas oil ratio Nm /m (from production tests) Conversion factor 3 3 6 Eq.F The pH2S is calculated at reservoir conditions: pH2S = (([H2S]oil + [H2S]gas)/K ) x H2 where: K H2 = = Eq.p.0035 atm and STHP >18.G (γ x 1000/ PM + GOR/23. H2S corrosion can occur at either the wellhead or bottom-hole without distinction. Given the diagram in figure 6. The mapping method can be applied for temperatures at the separator of between 20°C and 200°C.
6.A. the H(t) curve of methylnaphthalene is used. . If PM > 120. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Remarks On The H1 Calculation 0 REVISION Having calculated the molecular weight of the produced oil PM using the formula in eq. If 120 < PM < 142 the mean value is calculated using the H(t) curve of heptane and the H(t) curve of propyl benzene. H2 is measured in a similar way as H1. the mean value is calculated using the H(t) curve of propyl benzene and the H(t) curve of methylnaphthalene.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 132 OF 295 ENI S. For this purpose the temperature values immediately before and after the temperature studied are taken into consideration. Given FTHT. If PM > 100.p.d. the H1 value is interpolated linearly on the chosen curve(s). Comments On The H2 Calculation Having calculated the molecular weight of the reservoir oil PM res. the H(t) curve of heptane is used. the reference curve is chosen (given by points) to calculate the Henry constant on the basis of the following value thresholds: • • • • • • If PM > 142. the H(t) curve of propyl benzene is used. using temperature measured at the separator. wellhead flowing temperature. If 100 < PM < 120.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 130 Henry atm/Y[H2S] 120 110 100 90 methylnaphthalene PM = 142 80 N-propylbenzene PM = 120 heptane PM = 100 70 60 50 40 30 20 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 T C° Figure 6.A.p.A .H(t) Reference Curves Oversaturated Oil Oil is considered oversaturated when the gas in the fluid separates because the pressure of the system is lower than the bubble point pressure.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 133 OF 295 ENI S. Two situations can arise: Case A FTHP < Pb FBHP > Pb Case B FTHP < Pb FBHP < Pb .
p. the partial pressure is calculated as: pH2S = Y(H2S) x FBHP 1 where: Y(H2S) = Molar fraction in gas separated at FBHP and at reservoir temperature (from PVT) • The PVTs are not reliable.e. i.2%. the 2 corresponding value in reservoir conditions is assumed as being partial pressure at the wellhead. Calculation is of the partial pressure at the wellhead. Calculation Of Partial Pressure At Wellhead The calculation method is that used for case A (FTHP <Pb) 2 If the percentage (ppm) of H2S in the gas under static conditions is not known. Calculation Of Partial Pressure In Case B: Calculation of partial pressure in the reservoir: In the reservoir the gas is already separated.A.0035 atm and STHP >18. Basic Method pH2S = STHP x Y(H2S)/100 where: STHP = Y(H2S) = pH2S = Static tubing head pressure [atm] Mole fraction in separated gas at STHP pressure and wellhead temperature Partial H2S pressure [atm] The SSC phenomenon is triggered off at the wellhead if pH2S >0. 1 . FBHP <Pb. the corresponding value in reservoir conditions is assumed as being partial pressure at the wellhead. these are the worst conditions. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Calculation Of Partial Pressure In Case A: 1) 2) 0 REVISION Calculation is of the partial pressure in the reservoir: In this case pH2S is calculated in the way described for undersaturated oil. when FTHP <Pb: The data result from the production conditions and only the basic method is used. 2 If the percentage (ppm) of H S in the separated gas under static conditions is not known. the material balance method can be used as in the case of undersaturated oil.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 134 OF 295 ENI S. The error made can be high when Pb > FBHP.63 atm. Y(H2S) >0. calculation of pH2S can be approximated on the basis of the following: • The PVTs are reliable.
i.3.2. pCO2 at wellhead is assumed as corresponding to reservoir conditions.A. then the pCO2 is then calculated.p. Gas Or Condensate Gas Wells The partial pressure is calculated: pCO2 = SBHP x Y(CO2)/100 where: SBHP = Y(CO2) = pCO2 = Static bottom-hole pressure [atm] Mole fraction of CO2 Partial pressure of CO2 [atm] Corrosion occurs if pCO2 >0. Corrosion Caused By CO2 And Cl0 REVISION In the presence of water. CO2 gives rise to a corrosion form which is different to those caused by the presence of H2S. It also occurs only if the partial pressure of CO2 exceeds a particular threshold. Water cut >1% for horizontal or highly deviated wells (> 80 degrees). Undersaturated Oil Wells The partial pressure of CO2 is calculated: pCO2 = Pb x Y(CO2)/100 where: Pb = Y(CO2) = pCO2 = Bubble point pressure at reservoir temperature Mole fraction of CO2 in separated gas at bubble point pressure (from the PVTs) Partial pressure of CO2 [atm] Corrosion occurs if pCO2 >0.3. If the conditions described in section 6. The pCO2 values calculated in this way are used to evaluate the corrosion at bottom hole and wellhead.e. i. . the possibility that corrosions exist in water cut values combined with the type of well and deviation profile is evaluated. As in the case of SSC. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.: • • Water cut >15% for vertical wells. Oil Bearing Wells The problem exists where there is wetting water.1 exist.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 135 OF 295 ENI S.e.2 atm.2 atm.
Two situations may arise: Case A FTHP <Pb FBHP >Pb Case B FTHP <Pb FBHP <Pb Calculation Of Partial Pressure In Case A: Calculation of pCO2 in reservoir conditions: FBHP >Pb pCO2 is calculated in the same way as undersaturated oil wells earlier in this section. Calculation Of pCO2 At Wellhead: pCO2 = STHP x Y(CO2)/100 where: Y(CO2) = STHP = Mole fraction in separated gas at STHP3 Static tubing head pressure [atm] Corrosion occurs if pCO2 >0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Oversaturated Oil 0 REVISION The oil is considered oversaturated when the gas separates in the fluid because the pressure of the system is lower than bubble point pressure.A. If the percentage (ppm) of CO2 in the gas under static conditions is not known. the corresponding value in reservoir conditions is assumed as being partial pressure at the wellhead 3 .2 atm.2 atm.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 136 OF 295 ENI S. pCO2 = Pb x Y(CO2)/100 where: Pb = Y(CO2) = pCO2 = Bubble point pressure at reservoir temperature Mole fraction in separated gas at bubble point pressure (from the PVTs) Partial pressure of CO2 [atm] Corrosion occurs if pCO2 >0.p.
3.3. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Calculation Of Partial Pressure In Case B: Calculation of pCO2 at reservoir conditions: pCO2 = FBHP x Y(CO2)/100 where: Y(CO2) = 0 REVISION Mole fraction in separated gas at pressure FBHP (from the PVTs) Calculation Of pCO2 At Wellhead: The calculation method is the same as the one used in the wellhead conditions in case A: pCO2 = STHP x Y(CO2)/100 where: Y(CO2) = Mole fraction in separated gas at STHP4 There is corrosion if pCO2 >0. the corresponding value in reservoir conditions is assumed as being partial pressure at the wellhead.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 137 OF 295 ENI S.A. CO2 And ClIt is possible to encounter H2S and CO2 besides Cl . 4 .p. 6. The phenomenon is diagnosed by calculating the partial pressures of H2S and CO2 and comparing them with the respective thresholds. - If the percentage (ppm) of CO2 in the gas under flowing/static conditions is not known. Corrosion Caused By H2S.2 atm. In this case the problem is much more complex and the choice of suitable material is more delicate.
a below.4.A.Counter Measures to Prevent Corrosion .A .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 138 OF 295 ENI S. CORROSION CONTROL MEASURES 0 REVISION Corrosion control measures may involve the use of one or more of the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Cathodic protection Chemical inhibition Chemical control Oxygen scavengers Chemical sulphide scavengers pH adjustment Deposit control Coatings Non metallic materials or metallurgical Control Stress reduction Elimination of sharp bends Elimination of shock loads and vibration Improved handling procedures Corrosion allowances in design Improved welding procedures Organisation of repair operations. Measure Control of the environment • • • • • • • • • Means pH Temperature Pressure Chloride concentration CO2 concentration 2 H S concentration 2 H O concentration Flow rate Inhibitors Surface treatment • Plastic coating • Plating the alloying elements micro Improvement of the corrosion resistivity of the Addition of steel structure Table 6.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6. Refer to table 6.
The most commonly used of the martensitic stainless steels is AISI Type 410. steam or other environments. There are many techniques used to apply corrosion inhibitors in oil and gas wells: • • • • • • 6. standard batch. The most common types contain around 12% chromium. To be classed as a stainless steel.6. molybdenum. The carbon content ranges from 0. Stainless steels are strongly magnetic whatever the heat treatment condition. The most important characteristic that distinguishes these steels from other grades is their response to heat treatment. however it is occasionally used for production casing or tubing below the packer depth. CORROSION INHIBITORS 0 REVISION An inhibitor is a substance which retards or slows down a chemical reaction. when added to an environment. either continuously or intermittently to prevent serious corrosion.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 139 OF 295 ENI S. although some chromium content may be as high as 18%. The main reason for the development of stainless steel is its resistance to corrosion. The corrosion resistance of stainless steels is due to the ability of the chromium to passivate the surface of the alloy. cooling waters.weighted liquids Capsules Sticks. The martensitic stainless steels are hardened by the same heat treatment procedures used to harden carbon and alloy steels. decreases the rate of attack by the environmental on a metal. Batch treatment (tubing displacement.5. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6. a corrosion inhibitor is a substance which.A.10% and other elements such as nickel.p. Thus. metallurgical structure and mechanical properties these are: 6. The only grade of oilfield tubular used in this category is 13Cr. Martensitic Stainless Steels The martensitic stainless steels contain chromium as their principal alloying element. silicon. the microstructure of these steels is martensitic. .08% to 1.6.1. selenium. As their name indicates. an iron alloy usually must contain at least 12% chromium in volume. columbium. and sulphur are added in small amounts for other properties in some grades. Corrosion inhibitors are commonly added in small amounts to acids. extended batch) Continuous treatment Squeeze treatment Atomised inhibitor squeeze . The martensitic stainless steels are included in the ‘400’ series of stainless steels. CORROSION RESISTANCE OF STAINLESS STEELS Stainless steel is usually used in applications for production tubing. Stainless steels may be divided into four distinct classes on the basis of their chemical content.
stainless steel.2. Precipitation in alloys is analogous to precipitation as rain or snow. and the carbon content is generally lower. Most can be formed and machined before the final heat treatment and the finished product being hardened. Austenitic stainless steels are grouped in the ‘300’ series. The chromium contents of ferritic stainless steels is normally higher than that of the martensitic.6.4. They are not able to be hardened by heat treatment although they are hardenable to some extent by cold working and are generally non-magnetic. Their micro-structure consists essentially of austenite which is face cantered cubic iron or an iron alloy based on this structure. 6. Austenitic stainless steels generally have the highest corrosion resistance of any of the stainless steels. . but their strength is lower than martensitic and ferritic stainless steels.6.b for the various compositions of stainless steels.6.3. with other elements added for particular reasons. and 436. Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels The most recent development in stainless steel is a general class known as ‘precipitation hardened stainless steels’. chromium and nickel. The microstructure of the ferritic stainless steels consists of ferrite. 430. They contain a minimum of 18% chromium and 8% nickel. the most common being 304.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6. and may range up to as high as 25% chromium and 20% nickel. 316 high Cr and Ni which may include Mo. They are used principally for their temperature properties. These steels are widely used in the oilfield for fittings and control lines. Refer to figure 6. and there is a wide variety of compositions available. Austenitic Stainless Steels The austenitic stainless steels have two principal alloying elements. Ferritic Stainless Steels 0 REVISION The second class of stainless steels. Others commonly used are 303 free machining. which are also strongly magnetic. the steels can be hardened to varying strength levels. They combine the high strength of the martensitic stainless steels with the good corrosion resistance properties of the austenitic stainless steels. and 347 stabilised for welding and corrosion resistance. but due to its low strength is not used for well tubulars. These are most commonly used for component parts in downhole and surface tools and not as oilfield tubulars. The distinguishing characteristic of the precipitation hardened stainless steel is that through specific heat treatments at relatively low temperatures. the principal types being 405. which are similar to the martensitic stainless steels in that they have chromium as the principal alloying element. Most were developed as proprietary alloys. Ferritic stainless steels are also part of the ‘400’ series. which contain various amounts of chromium and nickel. The chromium content ranges between 13% to 27% but are not able to be hardened by heat treatment. is the ferritic stainless steels. 6.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 140 OF 295 ENI S. Ferrite is simply body cantered cubic iron or an alloy based on this structure.p.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 141 OF 295 ENI S.Stainless Steel Compositions . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 6.B.A.p.
Corrosion may be limited by: • • The selection of high alloy chromium steels.1. Generally.6.14% N. 6. This material is used extensively for tubulars used in severe CO2 and H2S conditions. Inhibitor injection. The resulting steel has properties that are normally found in both phases: the ferrite promotes increased yield strength and resistance to chloride and hydrogen sulphide corrosion cracking. This gap is attempted to be filled with ‘Super 13Cr’ tubing being developed.5. 6. wells producing CO2 partial pressure higher than 20psi requires inhibition to limit corrosion. 6. ferritic-austenitic (duplex) stainless steel consists of between 40-70% ferrite and has a typical composition of 22% Cr-5. Casing and tubing material will be selected according to the amount of H2S and other corrosive media present.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 142 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.5% Ni-3% Mo-0. Duplex Stainless Steel 0 REVISION In general.d for partial pressure limits. As a general note. where there is H2S. H2S Corrosion In wells.7. while the austenite phase improves workability and weldability.c and figure 6.7. .7. consideration should be given to limit casing and wellhead yield strength according to API 5CT and ‘NACE’ standard MR-01-75.2. the presence of CO2 may lead to corrosion on those parts coming in contact with CO2 which normally means the production tubing and part of the production casing below the packer. there is a large gap between the 13Cr and Duplex Stainless Steels used as tubulars for their good anti-corrosion properties. resistant to corrosion.p. COMPANY DESIGN PROCEDURE CO2 Corrosion In producing wells.A. Refer to figure 6. if using carbon steel casing.
p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 6.Sour Gas Systems Figure 6.C .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 143 OF 295 ENI S.D .Sour Multiphase Systems .A.
otherwise the following combinations of conditions may exist: • • • • Solely H2S in oil wells Solely H2S in gas or gas condensate wells Solely CO2 and Cl Both H2S and CO2. hence the use of the modified SMI has been adopted. OCTG.f. The tables regarding the choice of materials are shown below. refer to figure 6. DHE materials and wellhead materials. The choice of materials proposed is conservatively as recent develop materials such as 13%Cr and Super Duplex class have not been considered because experiments on these materials are not completed. Materials are sub-divided into three categories.A. .p. MATERIAL SELECTION 0 REVISION The choice of material is based on the application of engineering diagrams supplied by manufacturers of tubing and.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 144 OF 295 ENI S. In the partial pressures of H2S and CO2 are below the critical thresholds established in the previous section.8. These give the rules used by Eni-Agip sectioned on the basis of the conditions as listed above and the use in the well. all materials in class C-steel/L-A-steel can be used. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.e and figure 6.
1< pH2S max <1 0.0035< pH2S max <0. N80 L80 L80 Mod.000 Cl* <50.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.005 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.1< pH2S max <1 0.0035< pH2S max < 0.B . C90-1.2< pCO2S max <100e 0. T95-1 L80-Mod.1 FBHT >80 C o FBHT <80 C o Material J55.8.2< pCO2S max <100e 0. C90-1. K55.2< pCO2S max <100e pH2S max >1 FBHT <150 C o Material Cl* <50. C90-1.1 pCO2S max <100e 0.005 0. C95. T95-1 OCTG Materials For Corrosion By H2S Only In Gas Wells Conditions 0. T95-1 L80-Mod. K55.005 0.OCTG Materials for Sour Service .0035< pH2S max < 0.005 0.2< pCO2S max <100e 0. H2S And Cl* Conditions 0. N80-2.2< pCO2S max <100 0.000 22% Cr.000 13% Cr 22% Cr 25% Cr-SA Alternately 25% Cr OCTG Materials For Corrosion By CO2 .2< pCO2S max <100e 0.p.1 FBHT >80 C o o 60 C< FBHT >80 C o FBHT >80 C o REVISION 0 Material J55. C90-1.1 0.000 Cl* <20.A.0035< pH2S max < 0.0035< pH2S max <0. T95-1 L80-Mod. C95 L80 Alternately L80-Mod. C90-1.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.0035< pH2S max < 0.0035< pH2S max < 0.005 0.2< pCO2S max <100 0.000 Cl* <50. 25% Cr Incoloy 825 28% Cr Incoloy 825 Incoloy 825 Incoloy 825 Table 6.000 Cl* <50.000 13% Cr-80KSI Max 22% Cr CW 25% Cr CW 22% Cr 25% Cr 25% Cr 25% Cr CW 25% Cr 25% Cr CW 28% Cr 22% Cr SA 25% Cr SA 28% Cr 28% Cr Alternately 22% Cr 25% Cr FBHT <200 C 150 C< FBHT <200 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C FBHT <250 C FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C FBHT <200 C FBHT <250 C FBHT <200 C o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Cl* >50.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 145 OF 295 ENI S.1 0.0035< pH2S max <0.1< pH2S max <1 0.000 Cl* <50. OCTG Materials For Corrosion By H2S Only In Oil Wells Conditions 0. T95-1 OCTG Materials For Corrosion By CO2 And Cl* Conditions 0.000 Cl* <50.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.1 0.b below.005< pH2S max <0. T95-1 Alternately L80-Mod. N80.000 Cl* <50.1 0.2< pCO2S max <100 FBHT <150 C o o 150 C< FBHT <200 C o o 200 C< FBHT <250 C o Material Cl* <50.1 pH2S max < 0.0035< pH2S max < 0.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.000 Cl* >50.005< pH2S max <0.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.1 0. OCTG Specifications Refer to table 6.2< pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0. P110 J55. C90-1.1. K55.000 Cl* >50.005< pH2S max <0.
000 Cl* >50.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 146 OF 295 ENI S.2.000 Cl* <50.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0.C.c below.1 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <1 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <1 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <1 FBHT <100 C 100 C< FBHT <150 C 150 C< FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C o o o o o o o Material Cl* <50.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max < 0. DHE Specifications Refer to table 6.000 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 22% Cr. H2S And Cl* Conditions pCO2S max <100e pH2S max < 0.000 Cl* <50.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max < 0.DHE Material for Sour Service .000 Cl* <50.000 FBHT <250 C FBHT <250 C o o Cl* <50.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0.1 pH2S max < 0.8. Materials For DHE Corrosion By H2S Only In Oil Wells Conditions pH2S max < 0.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max < 0.000 9% Cr-1Moly 13%-Cr-80KSIMAX 22% Cr 25% Cr 25% Cr Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 22% Cr CW 25% Cr CW 25% Cr CW 25% Cr 28% Cr 22% Cr SA 25% Cr SA 25% Cr SA 28% Cr 28% Cr Alter Or 22% Cr 25% Cr Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 100 C< FBHT <150 C 150 C< FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C FBHT <200 C o o o o o o o o o Cl* >50.000 Cl* <50.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0.000 Cl* <50.1 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0.000 Cl* <50.000 Cl* >50.000 Cl* >50.1 FBHT >80 C FBHT <80 C o o Material AISI-41XX-80KSI-MAX AISI-41XX-HRC-22-MAX AISI-41XX-HRC-22-MAX Alternately Materials For DHE Corrosion By CO2 And Cl* Conditions pCO2S max <100 pCO2S max <100 pCO2S max <100 FBHT <100 C o o 100 C< FBHT <150 C o o 150 C< FBHT <250 C o Material Cl* <50.1 pH2S max > 0.1 FBHT >80 C o FBHT >80 C o FBHT <65 C o FBHT <65 C o REVISION 0 Material AISI-41XX-110KSI-MAX AISI-41XX-80KSI-MAX AISI-41XX-HRC-22-MAX AISI-41XX-HRC-22-MAX Alternately Materials For DHE Corrosion By H2S Only In Gas Wells Conditions pH2S max < 0. Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Table 6. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.000 28% Cr Alternately Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Materials For DHE Corrosion By CO2 .1 pH2S max < 0.1 pH2S max < 0.p.A.
Wellhead Materials For Corrosion Caused By H2S Conditions pH2S-MAX > 0.035 pH2S-MAX < 0.A. Wellhead Specifications Refer to below. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.2 < pCO2-Max < 100e FTHT < 150e Cl < 50000 pCO2-Max <100e 150<FTHT< 200e Cl < 50000 - Manual Master-Valve Steam Body Bonnet Flanges 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM AISI-4135-IC Inconel-625 Inconel-718 Gate & Seats 13%-Cr80ksi-Max Steam Monel-K500 17-4-PH Inconel-718 Body Bonnet Flanges 13%-Cr-80ksiMax F6NM AISI-4135-IC Inconel-625 Gate & Seats 13%-Cr-80ksiMax Monel-K500 17-4-PH Inconel -718 Inconel -718 .035 Body Bonnet Flanges AISI-4135HRC-22-MAX AISI-4135 Gate & Seats AISI-4140HRC-22-MAX AISI-4140 Steam AISI-4140HRC-22-MAX AISI-4140 Manual Master-Valve Body Bonnet Flanges AISI-4135HRC-22-MAX AISI-4135 Gate & Seats AISI-4140HRC-22-MAX AISI-4140 Steam AISI-4140 HRC-22-MAX AISI-4140 Wellhead Materials For Corrosion Caused By CO2 and ClConditions 0.p.2<pCO2 Max 100 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 pCO2-Max < 100 150 <FTHT <200 Cl.035 pH2S-MAX < 0.035 Tubing Hanger AISI-4140 HRC-22MAX AISI-4140 Tbg Head Adapter AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 Tubing Spool AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 Cross AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 Top Adapter AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 Casing Spool AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 REVISION 0 Stud ASTMA193-B7M ASTMA193-B7M Nut ASTMA194-2M ASTMA194-2H Automatic-Master-Valve Conditions pH2S-MAX> 0.< 50000 - Tubing Hanger 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM Monel-K500 Inconel-718 Tbg Head Adapter 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM AISI-4135-IC Inconel-625 Tubing Spool AISI-4135 Cross 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM AISI-4135IC Inconel 625 MonelK500 Top Adapter 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM AISI-4135-IC Inconel -625 Monel-K500 Casing Spool Carbon-Steel AISI-41XX AISI-4135 Stud ASTMA193-B7 ASTMA193-B7 Nut ASTMA194-2H ASTMA194-2H AISI-4135 Automatic-Master-Valve Conditions 0.8.3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 147 OF 295 ENI S.
2 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 F6NM MonelK500 F6NM AISI-4135HRC-22Max F6NM F6NM AISI-4135 ASTMHRC-22-Max A193-B7M ASTMA194-2M ASTMA194-2M pCO2-Max < 100 pH2S-Max < 0.8 - Inconel718 AISI-4135IC Inconel625 AISI-4135 HRC-22Max AISI-4135.005 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 - Tubing Hanger F6NM Tbg Head Adapter 13%-Cr 80ksi-Max F6NM Tubing Spool AISI-4135 HRC-22Max Cross 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM Top Adapter 13%-Cr 80ksi-Max F6NM Casing Spool Stud Nut ASTMA194-2M AISI-4135 ASTMHRC-22-Max A193-B7M pCO2-Max < 100 pH2S-Max < 0.A.8 Cl > Water 50000 pCO2-Max <100 pH2S-Max e > 0.2 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 pCO2-Max < 100 pH2S-Max <0.AISI-4135IC IC Inconel625 MonelK500 Inconel625 MonelK500 AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX MonelK500 pCO2-Max < 100 pH2S-Max <0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 148 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Wellhead Materials For Corrosion Caused By H2S.AISI-4135 IC IC HRC-22-Max Inconel625 Inconel718 Inconel625 Inconel718 Inconel718 Inconel718 .8 FTHT< 150 Cl < 50000 - F6NM MonelK500 F6NM AISI-4135HRC-22MAX F6NM F6NM AISI-4135HRC-22MAX ASTMA193-B7M ASTMA194-2M MonelK500 ASTMA194-2M Inconel718 AISI-4135IC Inconel625 AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135.AISI-4135. CO2 and Cl Condition pCO2 -Max < 100 pH2S-Max < 0.p.
Max < 100 pH2S.Wellhead Material for Sour Service .005 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 F6NM pCO2.8 Cl Water 50000 pCO2. Inconel-625 Inconel-718 Inconel-718 Inconel-625 Table 6.Max < 100 AISI-4135.Max < 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Automatic-Master-Valve Conditions Body Bonnet Flanges Gate & Seats 13%-Cr-80 KSIMax Steam 17-4-PH F6NM Manual Master-Valve Body Bonnet Flanges 13%-Cr-80KSIMax F6NM Gate & Seats 13%-Cr80KSI.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 149 OF 295 ENI S.C.Max < 0.8 - Inconel-718 Inconel-718 AISI-4135-I.Max < 0.A.Max Stellite--6 Monel-K500 AISI-4135-I.C. Inconel-625 F6NM Inconel-718 Monel-K500 pCO2.Max < 100 pH2S.Max < 100 pH2S.I.C.C.2 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 pCO2. pH2S.D.Max Steam 17-4-PH F6NM pCO2 -Max < 100 13%-Cr-80KSIMax pH S. Inconel-625 F6NM Inconel-718 Monel-K500 AISI-4135-I.p.Max < 2 0.Max e > 0.8 FTHT< 150 Cl <50000 - F6NM 13%-Cr-80 KSIMax Stellite-6 Monel-K500 F6NM 13%-Cr80KSI.
825 FBHT<= 250 C Cl.825 FBHT <= 250 C Cl.E .> 50000 ppm 28 % Cr or INCOLOY.C 90 T1 T 95 T1 10-2 C.<= 50000 ppm 25% Cr-CW 200<FBHT<=250 C and Cl.<= 50000 ppm 13% Cr 150 > FBHT <= 200 C Cl.< 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-CW 200 < FBHT <= 250 Cl.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 150 OF 295 ENI S.STEEL J 55 N 80 P 110 FBHT >80 C J55 K55 N80-1 C95 P110-1 (only oil) or L80 mod C90 T1 LOW ALLOY STEEL L 80 mod C 90 T1 C 95 T1 10-3 65 < FBHT<= 80C J 55 K 55 N80-1 or L 80 mod C90 T1 T 95 T1 10-4 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 1 10 100 pH2S (atm) Figure 6.<= 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-SA or 28 % Cr INCOLOY.A.<= 50000 ppm 22% Cr 200<FBHT<=250 C 25% Cr-SA or 25% Cr FBHT<= 250 C and Cl.825 10 FBHT <= 200 C Cl-<=50000 ppm 22 % Cr-SA or 25 % Cr-SA 28 % Cr INCOLOY. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 100 pCO2 (atm) FBHT <= 150 C and Cl.> 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-CW (*) 1 10-1 FBHT < = 65 C L 80 or L 80 mod.> 50000 ppm 22 % Cr.<= 20000 ppm 25% Cr-CW FBHT<=250 C and Cl.OCTG Material Selection Diagram .< 50000 ppm 22 % Cr 25 % Cr 200 < FBHT <= 250 C Cl.825 FBHT < 200 C 28 % Cr or INCOLOY-825 (*) FBHT<= 150 C Cl.p.CW 25 % Cr -CW 150 < FBHT <= 200 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 28 % Cr INCOLOY.<= 50000 ppm 13 % Cr 80 Ksi max or 22 % Cr 25 % Cr FBHT <= 200 C Cl.
DHE Material Selection Diagram .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 151 OF 295 ENI S.p.A.F .> 50000 ppm 28 % Cr or INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 1 200 < FBHT <= 250 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 25 % Cr INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 10-1 FBHT < = 65 C AISI 41XX 22 HRC max 10-2 C-STEEL or AISI 41XX 65 < FBHT <=80 C C-STEEL 80 Ksi max AISI 41XX FBHT > 80 C C-STEEL 110 Ksi max AISI 41XX 100 < FBHT <= 200 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 22 % Cr-CW 25 % Cr-CW INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 AISI 41XX 22 HRC max 10-3 200 > FBHT <= 250 C Cl.<= 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-SA 28 % Cr INCOLOY 825 INCONEL 718 FBHT<= 250 C Cl.825 INCONEL 718 FBHT < 200 C 28 % Cr or INCOLOY 825 INCONEL 718 (*) 150 < FBHT <= 200 C Cl.<= 50000 ppm 9 Cr 1 Mo 100 < FBHT <= 150 C Cl. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 100 pCO2 (atm) FBHT <= 100 C Cl.<= 50000 ppm 25 % Cr or INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 FBHT <= 200 C Cl-<=50000 ppm 22 % Cr-SA 25 % Cr-SA 28 % Cr INCOLOY 825 INCONEL 718 200 < FBHT <= 250 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-CW INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 10-4 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 1 10 100 pH2S (atm) Figure 6.<= 50000 ppm 22 % Cr 25 % Cr INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 10 (*) 200 < FBHT<=250 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 28 % Cr INCOLOY.<= 50000 ppm 13 % Cr 80 ksi max 150 > FBHT<= 250 C 25% Cr-CW or 25% Cr INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 200 < FBHT<= 250 C Cl.
ORDERING SPECIFICATIONS 0 REVISION When ordering tubulars for sour service.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 152 OF 295 ENI S. as per API Specification 5CT. Recommendations for casing to be used for sour service must be specified according to the API 5CT for restricted yield strength casings. Three copies of a report showing the physical properties of the goods supplied and the results of hardness tests (Refer to step 3 above) must be submitted. together with all the check analyses performed. Three copies of the report providing the ladle analysis of each heat used in the manufacture of the goods shipped. All sour service casing should be inspected using non-destructive testing or impact tests only.9. Cold die stamping is prohibited.p. in addition to those given in the above table. 6) 7) Note: The casing should also meet the following criteria: • • The steel used in the manufacture of the casing should have been quenched and tempered. The couplings must have the same heat treatment as the pipe body.A. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Downgraded grade N80. P105 or P110 tubulars are not acceptable for orders for J55 or K55 casing. (This treatment is superior to tubulars heated/treated by other methods. must be submitted. all markings must be paint stencilled or hot die stamped. e.g. the following specifications should be included. The pipe must be tested to the alternative test pressure (see API Bulletins 5A and 5AC). Shell modified API thread compound must be used. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6. normalising and tempering). .
THEORY During completion tubing design process.p.10. Under some special conditions.A.2.25 applies to the ratio of the calculated stress in a string to the minimum yield strength of the selected tubing in carbon steels. a higher grade of pipe. All tubing strings should be designed for stress. 7.2. Movement can only occur if the tubing is free to move. Tubing size shall be determined by the reservoir engineers using IPR curves and Nodal analysis (Refer to section 5. When these have been determined it will confirm the suitability of the selected tubing. either a heavier weight or. If the tubing is not free to move and is anchored to a packer then stress will be subjected to the tubing string and packer. A safety factor (SF) of 1. preferably using an appropriate up to date computer programme. To fully understand these effects.10 Stress Calculations. the SFs may be reduced. If the stress SF is less than these limits.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 153 OF 295 ENI S. Tubing movement upwards (contraction) is assumed to be negative and downwards (lengthening) is positive. TUBING DESIGN POLICIES All completion tubing strings will have tubing movement calculations conducted to ascertain the maximum load applied to the string and/or completion tubing movement to be catered for in the completion design. A safety factor (SF) of 1.1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 7. refer to the criteria in section 7. This relationship is fully explained in section 7. it is first necessary to understand the properties of steels used in the manufacture of tubing. the calculation should be run again substituting. 7. it is necessary to calculate the variations in length for the stresses applied under load conditions. . Tubing movement occurs due to only two reasons: • • Temperature changes Change in pressure induced forces.35 applies to the ratio of the calculated stress in a string to the minimum yield strength of the selected tubing of CRA materials.6). Currently Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates recommended programme is the Enertech WS-Tube programme to the latest version.
b.A . such as by torsion. Tests of materials may be conducted in many different ways. corrosion. deformation. the shattering of glass). deformation takes place before any final fracture occurs. and if fracture occurs with little or no plastic deformation. As load is applied.1. it is classed as a ductile material. Figure 7. wear. The action of a material under the gradually increasing extension in the tension test is usually represented by plotting apparent stress (the total load divided by the original cross-sectional area of the test piece) as ordinates against the apparent strain (elongation between two gauge points marked on the test piece divided by the original gauge length) as abscissae. the elastic deformation is accompanied by varying amounts of plastic. i.A. Mechanical Properties of Steel 0 REVISION Failure of a material or of a structural part may occur by fracture (e. This gives rise to Poisson’s Ratio.. sometimes called Young's Modulus. These failures are failures of the material.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 154 OF 295 ENI S. the material is classed as brittle.Stress-Strain Curve for Tubing Steel . A typical curve for steel is shown in figure 7. If a material sustains large amounts of plastic deformation before final fracture. both are explained in figure 7. or permanent.a. is the modulus of elasticity E. but the tension test is the most common and is qualitatively characteristic of all the other types of tests. the elastic deformation is approximately a straight line as called for by Hooke's Law.p. With all solid materials.g.2.e. Beyond the elastic limit. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. the material behaves elastically. and the slope of this line. some deformation may be sustained without permanent deformation. yield. and other causes. Buckling may cause failure of the part without any fracture of the material. compression and shear. or the ratio of stress to strain within the elastic range. In this.
p. Figure 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Beyond the elastic limit. see figure 7.Deformation Constants for Tubing Steel . the material will contract along a line generally nearly straight and parallel to the original elastic line.B . leaving a permanent set.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 155 OF 295 ENI S. permanent or plastic strain occurs.a. If the stress is released in the region between the elastic limit and the yield strength.A.
Others are shown in figure 7. The maximum stress reached in this region is called the upper yield point and the lower part of the yielding region the lower yield point. yield strength 55. 5AC. as required by definition.2% is widely accepted in the industry). The stress at the maximum point is called the tensile strength or the ultimate strength of the material and is its most often quoted property. but at the same time the cross-sectional area of the specimen becomes less as it is drawn out.A.000 psi. yield strength 220.127.116.11% of the gauge length. API specifies the yield strength as the tensile strength required to produce a total elongation of 0. and in the case of the yield point even maximum requirements (except for H-40). Depending on the type or grade. This gives rise to a dip in the general curve followed by a period of deformation at approximately constant load.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 156 OF 295 ENI S.: H-40 . This is arbitrarily defined as the stress at which the material has a specified permanent set (the value of 0.min. Instead of determining the stress up to which there is no permanent set. 5AX and 5AQ . This loss of area weakens the specimen so that the curve reaches a maximum and then falls off until final fracture occurs. a curious phenomenon occurs after the elastic limit.5% to 0. minimum requirements are laid down for the mechanical properties. tubing and drill pipe are laid down in API specification of further specs. 5CT which is a combination of former specs. . The lines indicating equivalent hardness of 22 and 23 Rc indicates the tolerances for use of the materials in H2S conditions according to NACE which is fully described in section 7. For steels used in the manufacturing of tubular goods. it is customary to measure a yield strength.g. 5A.000 psi. and under certain conditions of temperature. it is customary to designate the end of the straight portion of the curve (by definition the proportional limit) as the elastic limit.min. known as yielding.min. In the harder and stronger steels. As extension continues beyond yielding. Similar arbitrary rules are followed with regard to the elastic limit in commercial practice. yield strength 40. J-55 .c. the material becomes stronger causing a rise of the curve. Careful practice qualifies this by designating it the proportional elastic limit. the yielding phenomenon is less prominent and is correspondingly harder to measure.Casing and Tubing requirements. The denominations of the different grades are based on the minimum yield strength. The mechanical and chemical properties of casing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In steels. In materials that do not exhibit a marked yield point.000 psi. e.p. L-80 .
Strengths of Various Grades of Steel .A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 157 OF 295 ENI S.C .
Tubing Movement/Stress Relationship Steel tubing. e. The movement determined by calculation should be used to select a device which accommodates this movement with a margin of error. For a given volume. then the tubing is unable to move as it can in the free movement scenario and. 10ft. a PBR. All metals have a particular expansion rate which is termed the ‘Coefficient of thermal expansion’. The co-efficient of liner expansion for tubular steels is usually 6. If the tubing is free to move then the calculations will determine the maximum expansion or contraction which needs to be catered for by the utilisation of a tubing movement compensation system such as a packer and seal unit. These devices are usually available in 10ft stroke lengths or multiples of 10ft. The tubing is connected to the packer by being threaded to. i. a PBR. a) Free Movement The tubing is free to move fully upwards or downwards using the packer bore with a seal assembly. or latched to. as seen in the previous section 7.2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. a 20ft device should be selected as a 10ft device would not provide enough contingency for error. the packer -6 Further explanation of these three modes are explained below.3ft = total 9ft. with a calculated movement of + 6ft and .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 158 OF 295 ENI S. which is the ‘initial’ tubing condition.2. This may increase or decrease the stress already exerted to the tubing when it was installed. 7.2.A. If the tubing is attached to a packer.2 will expand or contract due to changes in temperature or pressure induced forces.2. Calculations must be conducted to establish the full tubing movement in order that the length of tubing movement device can be determined. ELTSR or a travel joint depending on which type of packer system is utilised.e.d below). All subsequent changes in temperature or pressure induced forces are calculated form this initial condition. There are three methods in which tubing is connected to the packer: a) b) c) Tubing is fully free to move either way. .p. changes in tubing stress will be exerted. an object will expand or contract through temperature change by the Co-efficient of thermal expansion for the type of material. a TSR or travel joint (Refer to figure 7. in this case. The tubing is positioned where it is fully free to move upwards but its downward movement is restricted and stress applied to the packer.9 x 10 in/in/F°.3. Temperature 0 REVISION Temperature changes cause expansion and contraction in metals which is a significant factor in tubing strings.g. 20ft and 30ft. unless the movement was subsequently restricted as described in the next section.
Figure 7. hence increased stress in the tubing. otherwise permanent deformation will occur. (Refer to figure 7. c) Anchored Tubing In this case the tubing is anchored to the packer by being threaded to it (as in the case when using retrievable packers) or by using an anchoring device such as an Anchor Latch.D . Ratchet Latch. it will result in increased tensional and compressive forces. etc.Limited Movement Figure 7. correspondingly to the packer.E . This additional stress will be calculated during the tubing movement calculations and must not exceed the stress limit for the tubing. This restricted downward movement results in further stress applied to the bottom of the tubing and.e).Free Moving Figure 7. This may be acceptable when temperature and pressure changes are not excessive.p. When the tubing is anchored to the packer and movement is eliminated.F .Anchored Tubing .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 159 OF 295 ENI S. the calculations will determine that the tubing stress limit is not exceeded. Similarly. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 b) Limited Downward Movement 0 REVISION In this case the tubing is fully free to move upwards but is restricted in its downward movement (Refer to figure 7.f).A.
0 REVISION The well data and parameters required (or already determined) to produce an accurate tubing movement/stress analysis and. Each casing or liner weight and corresponding length of section must be known to enable calculation.1. Deviation tables are also required. 7.3. . Once the tubing size. determined by nodal analysis conducted by the reservoir engineers. The tubing grade is selected in accordance to the criteria listed in section 6 to combat the effects of any corrosion from the well conditions.4.1). Temperatures (Static and Flowing) Accurate well temperature data are vital in tubing movement/stress analysis as the temperature effect is usually the effect which causes the greatest tubing movement.1. 7. either.3. temperature data may be found from previous well test results. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. WELL DATA. Bottom-hole Pressure Accurate initial and prognosed future formation pressures both static and dynamic are fundamental to tubing movement/stress calculations. The well deviation is also important to determine the type of packer/tubing seal device and/or tubing movement device to ensure that. hence. Similar to the pressure data.A. These pressures can be obtained from previous well exploration test data or appraisal well test reports. The tubing movement/stress calculations will then determine the tubing weight or any change in grade required to meet with the applied SF for stress. Casing design profile Casing programme contingency profile Tubing size from optimisation analysis Pressure gradient Temperature gradient Reservoir fluids specific gravities Completion fluid specific gravities Production/injection or stimulation forecast. straight pull or torque can be applied to the tubing downhole at the packer depth overcoming any frictional drag.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 160 OF 295 ENI S. Tubing Data The optimum tubing size.p. selection of a tubing are: • • • • • • • • 7. is required and is the basis of all the calculations. 7. Casing Profile/Geometry The planned casing design and contingency plans are required as they affect the tubing movement calculations (Refer to 18.104.22.168. The average temperature of each section of tubing and casing must be known or determined to input into the calculations. weight and grade is confirmed then the appropriate rated completion components can be specified in order that the purchasing department can prepare tender documents.2.3.
it should be suitably dosed with corrosion inhibitors and oxygen scavenger to prevent corrosion to the exposed tubulars and elastomers.3. is chosen for its compatibility with the formation and its fluids so as not to cause any formation damage. Carbon Dioxide and Chloride levels.p. this is referred to as the initial condition.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 161 OF 295 ENI S. The information required to make a considered selection may be obtained from the ADIS (Advanced Drilling Information System) database (which holds all the data regarding the drilling of the well). therefore the materials should be chosen to last the planned life of the completion. If justified economically. the constituents of the produced reservoir fluids will initially determine the material required for the tubing. well tests carried out earlier and other sources which may be useful in the decision making process. Ballooning effect. Buckling effect. These effects are: a) b) c) Piston effect.A. 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. As the completion fluid (sometimes referred to as the packer fluid) will be left in the annulus. these corrosive agents can cause serious problems. . These are three pressure induced effects which produce forces that moves the tubing. therefore it is essential that a detailed corrosion study is completed to enable the choice of materials and/or inhibition procedures. Particular importance should be paid to Hydrogen Sulphide.4.3. however if this choice is not economic and some corrosion inhibition process was suitable then this would be a fallback position. 7. All subsequent conditions are calculated from this initial condition. Future parameters must also be considered as water may rise and the GOR will change. it will have completion fluid in both the tubing and the annulus. Each of these effects are addressed in this section. usually a brine. This is subject to any corrosion inhibition methods which may be implemented. Reservoir Fluids 0 REVISION As described earlier. It should be selected to provide an overbalance at the top of the reservoir. either with a tubing seal unit in a packer bore or a tubing movement device.6. It also must be selected for its stability over long time periods and not suffer from dehydration or deterioration. the material chosen should combat the effects of corrosion. Completion Fluid The completion fluid.5. In the presence of water and under certain temperature conditions. PRESSURE INDUCED FORCES When a well is completed.
The formula in each case is the same: ∆L1 = − L F EAs Eq. when run in a well must first withstand the load of its own weight which may be a significant factor especially in deep wells. This tensile load is greatest in the joint immediately below the tubing hanger. the equation becomes: ∆L1 = − where: L EAs [(Ap − A1) ∆P1 − (Ap − Ao ) ∆Po] Eq.7 and figure 7.p.A Substituting for F. Piston Effect 0 REVISION Tubing. 7. This will alter the tensile load on the top and bottom of the tubing.1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 162 OF 295 ENI S. tubing larger than the packer bore.A. The change in length due to these alterations is calculated from Hooks Law: Where E is the modulus of elasticity (sometimes referred to as a Young’s Modulus formula). and tubing smaller than the packer bore. 7. 7. The tubing is run into a completion fluid with equivalent fluid density inside and outside the tubing which results in a reduction of the load due to buoyancy.4. If there is an alteration from this initial condition causing a change in pressure forces across the packer seal unit then a piston effect is caused.B L E As Ap Ai Ao ∆Pi ∆Po = = = = = = = = Length of the tubing string to the packer depth (ins) Young’s Modulus of Elasticity (psi) 2 Cross sectional area of tubing (ins ) 2 Area of the packer bore (ins ) 2 Area of the tubing ID (ins ) 2 Area of the tubing OD (ins ) Change in tubing pressure at the packer (psi) Change in annulus pressure at the packer (psi) .h illustrate this piston force for two cases. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. The force (F) change is caused by the change in piston force from the initial conditions created by a change in pressure in the annulus or tubing at the packer.
Packer Bore Larger Than Tubing OD 7. The helix shown in figure 7. The exact point between the buckled and straight sections is the ‘neutral point’ (Refer to figure 7. some of the tubing will be buckled and the rest straight. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Ao Ai Ao Ai r r Po Po Ap Pi Ap Pi Figure 7. 7. Unless the tubing string is short or the compressive force is exceedingly high.i has a variable pitch as the compressive force is progressively lowered by the weight of the pipe hanging below.Packer Bore Smaller Than Tubing OD Helical buckling is initiated by compressive force acting on the bottom of the tubing and is the formation of helical spirals in the tubing string. Buckling Effect Figure 7.p.H .Wo Ai x Weight of fluid inside the tubing Ao x Weight of fluid outside the tubing Eq.2.G .C . The buckling effect is greater when pressure differential is applied across the pipe.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 163 OF 295 ENI S.4.A. The neutral point can be calculated from the following: n= where: W Wi Wo = = = F w Ws + Wi .i).
p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 164 OF 295 ENI S. 7.i) can be calculated by the following formula: F2 r2 ∆L2 = − 8EI w where: Eq. the length reduction due to helical buckling (Refer to figure 7.Neutral Point When the neutral point is within the tubing length (and so the helix can fully develop).A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7.I .D I= π (D 4 − d 4 ) 64 .
165 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
F Figure 7.J - Helical Buckling If the tubing is very short (as happens for example on selective type completions between two packer’s) all the string may be affected by buckling and there is no neutral point. In this case, the length reduction due to the buckling effect is dependant upon the entire length of the string and can be calculated by the following formula:
∆L2 = −
F 2 r 2 Lw Lw F 2 − F 8 EIw
As seen, the formulae for both piston effect and helicoidal buckling above has so far used F, i.e. the change in the piston force acting on the bottom of the tubing. However, in order to complete the understanding of the effects which lead to variations in length due to buckling, we must also consider the effect caused by pressure differential across a pipe. If the internal pressure in a pipe is greater than the external pressure, the tube remains straight only if it has an axially symmetric cross-section with no deformation to change its shape. This configuration is unstable and any distortion can lead immediately to a stable equilibrium condition which is helicoidal buckling. Helicoidal buckling is caused by the effect of the pressure which acts on the lateral surface of the pipe wall as the convex surface of the bend in a greater force is larger than the concave surface (Refer to figure 7.k). The internal pressure will therefore exert a greater force on the convex side of the helix, than that exerted on the concave section of the same bend. The resulting force will, therefore, create the helicoidal buckling configuration. The same occurs when the stable external pressure is greater than the internal pressure also resulting in helical buckling.
166 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Moreover, the effect of the external pressure on the tubing lateral surfaces is equivalent to a tensile force applied at the tubing bottom of:
F f = Ai Pi
= − Ao Po
Figure 7.K - Pressure Induced Helical Buckling Effect From this it can be concluded that the effect of the internal pressure on the tubing lateral surfaces is equivalent to a compressive force applied at the bottom of the tubing. Therefore the tubing will be buckled by the piston force and by the sum of Ff and Ff . The fictitious force Ff is obtained from the sum of the three elements:
Ff = Ff + Ff
F f = A p (Pi − Po )
If Ff is greater than zero it will cause helical buckling and hence, if it is less than zero there is no deformation. It is however important to relate that the only force actually applied at the bottom of the tubing is the piston force, while the fictitious force is used only to calculate the buckling effect.
167 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
It should be remembered that, to calculate the variations in length, the variations of the forces compared to initial conditions must be calculated. Therefore, to sum up: in the ∆L1 (Hooke’s law), the variation of the piston force Fa must be used; in the ∆L2 (buckling), the variation of the fictitious force Ff must be used when this is positive, otherwise, being a tensile force, it cannot buckle the string and ∆L2 = 0. The theory above was developed considering Pi = Po in the initial conditions, it thus follows that the Ff is equal to zero and that the variation of fictitious force ∆Ff is therefore equal to the final fictitious force. 7.4.3. Ballooning Effect The third element which changes the length of a string, due to the changes to internal and external pressure, is caused by ballooning. This effect occurs when ∆P = Pi - Po is positive and tends to swell the tubing which, contracts axially or shortens (Refer to figure 7.m). On the other hand, when ∆P = Pi - Po is negative, the tubing is squeezed and, expands axially or elongates. This is termed reverse ballooning (Refer to figure 7.l). The normally used simplified formula to calculate the ballooning or reverse ballooning effect is: • •
∆L3 = −
2ν ∆Pim − R 2 ∆Pom L E R2 −1
In this the average internal and external pressure variations are defined by the formulae:
+ Pi ( final ) − Pi (initial ) Pi ( final ) − Pi (initial ) tophole bottomhole ∆Pim = 2
+ Po ( final ) − Po (initial ) Po ( final ) − Po (initial ) tophole bottomhole ∆Pom = 2
Eq. 7.L Again this is developed from Hooke’s law using Young’s Modulus of elasticity (already used in the piston and buckling effect) and Poisson’ ratio. Poisson’s ratio v as earlier expressed is:
∆t / t ∆L / L
168 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Figure 7.L - Reverse Ballooning 7.4.4. Temperature Effect
Figure 7.M - Ballooning
The final effect considered when calculating tubing length variations, is the temperature effect which usually induces the largest movement. During a well operation, e.g. stimulation, the temperature of the tubing may be much less than that in, either, the initial or flow rate conditions. During well stimulations, significant quantities of fluids are pumped through the tubing at ambient surface temperature which may change the temperature of the tubing by several degrees. The formula used to calculate the change of length due to temperature effect is:
∆L4 = α ∆TM L
Eq. 7.M where the average temperature variation in the string can be calculated as follows:
− Tinitial )tophole + (T final − Tinitial )bottomhole 2
169 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
In the formula α represents the material’s coefficient of thermal expansion. For steel this value is: α = 6.9 x 10-6 in/in/°F. figure 7.n shows typical geothermal temperature gradients during both stimulation and production conditions. It can be seen that the temperature variations to which the tubing is subjected may cause considerable changes to its length.
300 T (°F)
7500 D (feet)
Figure 7.N - Typical Geothermal Gradients 7.5. EVALUATION OF TOTAL TUBING MOVEMENT The sum of the length changes obtained from the changes in pressure induced forces and temperature effects, gives the total shift of the bottom end of the string at the packer depth where it is free to move in the packer-bore. This sum is calculated:
∆Ltot = ∆L1 + ∆L2 + ∆L3 + ∆L4
Eq. 7.O With free moving packer/tubing seals systems, the calculations are made for the selection of an appropriate length of seal assembly, PBR or ELTSR with anchored packer/tubing systems, this same calculation can be made to select the length of tubing movement devices such as telescopic or expansion joints. However, if no movement is converted to stress in the tubing, the resultant is stress on the packer (Refer to section 7.6).
the load on the tubing can be calculated to check if the completion components have sufficient strength.Tubing Anchored To Packer The tubing-packer force can be calculated by initially assuming that the tubing is free to move in the packer seal-bore and it is possible to calculate the final total length change of the tubing under pressure and temperature variations of all conditions. the force needed to re-anchor the tubing to the packer can be determined. in general the problem of identifying the tubing/packer reaction is not linear due to the helical buckling effect and so.O . Moreover. once this force is known.p. Figure 7. . Subsequently. it is sufficient to impose a ∆L4 elongation by applying a force FP which is obtained from Hooke’s law: ∆L = − FL EAs ⇒ FP = − ∆L4 EAs L Eq.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 170 OF 295 ENI S. it is possible to use a graphical approach. consider figure 7. preventing any movement of the string when well conditions vary (figure 7.p where it is presumed that the tubing can move away from its anchored condition while maintaining the seal with the packer and that the tubing undergoes only ∆L4 contraction caused by the temperature effect. To understand this concept better. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.A.P However.o).6. all the movement is linear and to restore to the tubing’s real anchored position. ANCHORED TUBING 0 REVISION In some completions the tubing is firmly fixed to the packer. Since no force is applied at the end of the tubing which could cause buckling. In this situation the tubing-packer forces generated by the presence of the anchoring must be determined so as to be able to confirm if the tubing-packer anchoring system and the packer have sufficient strength to safely withstand all the forces exerted. 7.
the cause of the buckling would be eliminated and the neutral point would return to the bottom in the tubing. the tubing representative point in the well when it is subjected to the fictitious force. Indeed.q the Fp force. ∆L4 Fp ∆L ∆L4 Fp F Figure 7. is then identified. 7.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 171 OF 295 ENI S. radial distance between the tubing OD and casing ID and on the fluids in the well.Graphical Representation Of Movement .Q The second step is to identify. As shown in figure 7. This can be plotted using the following formulae: ∆L = − ∆L = − FL EAs FL F 2 r 2 − EAs 8 EIw ( for F < 0 ) ( for F > 0 ) Eq.q this condition is identified by intersection point (Ff. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The first step is to plot the characteristic strength/length variation of the system. On the curve given in figure 7. was applied at the end of the tubing.p is determined by the size of tubing.A. ∆Lf). so to position the tubing in the packer after contracting the string must be elongated accordingly.∆Lf) and the diagram obtained has a total length variation of ∆LP = -∆ltot.p. even when this is negative.P . The origin of the axis moves to the point found in this way (Ff . on the material. if a force of Ff. transferred between the tubing and packer. on the curve. This curve. shown in figure 7.
A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION ∆Lp Fp ∆L Fp ∆Lf ∆Lp F Ff Figure 7. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 172 OF 295 ENI S.Q . after the packer is set.p.Graphical Representation of Force 7. putting the tubing into compression or slackened-off (Refer to figure 7.1. In this method. some of the weight of the string is set down on the packer. Tubing Permitting Limited Motion Another method which may be used in some types of completions is that the tubing is fully or partially limited in downhole movement.6.r).
makes it possible to limit the length variations of the string.R .R where: Fso = slack-off force released on the packer.g. If an anchored type constraint is considered then the tubing-packer force with respect to the anchored tubing can be reduced. e. ∆Pso. any elongation of the string would be prevented. therefore.p. on the other hand. In practice. therefore.Limited Downward Movement The shortening of the string caused by this. 7. is decreased by ∆Lso. for example. the total length variation calculated as the sum of the above described effects. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7. The same considerations can be made if ∆Ltot < 0 during the operation while. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 173 OF 295 ENI S. The ∆Lso value is determined using the following formula: 2 Fso L Fso r 2 ∆Lso = − − E As 8 E I w Eq. applying slack-off is the same as moving the packer upwards by ∆Lso. ∆Ltot. With this type of anchoring it is. possible to limit the movements of the tubing with respect to the packer and consequently the length of the packer seal-assembly. during an injection operation.e. in an injection operation. compressing the string and thus causing part of the length variation which would occur in any case at a later stage due to the effects described above. i.A. causing a force on the packer which would be equal to that of the slack-off amount.
. the completion will have warmed up to ambient well conditions. It is important. when selecting the type of tubing for a completion. Pressure Testing The very first load condition experienced during and after the installation of the completion string is pressure testing. These should be seen only as an example of load conditions as each case must be addressed individually as planned operations may vary. temperature and mechanical loads for each condition imposed. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.7. TUBING LOAD CONDITIONS The load conditions of the tubing string during the well’s life causes stresses through the pressure. in any case. therefore the only load applied is the pressure induced forces of piston effect buckling and ballooning. A manual or computer programme is then used to calculate and then ascertain whether the given tubing is able to withstand the maximum load with an acceptable safety level. During the time taken to install the tubing.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 174 OF 295 ENI S.1. the designed test pressures should be equal to or greater than any other subsequent pressures applied to the completion so the magnitude is high.A. These pressures may be applied more than once during the installation operation.2. The operations normally carried out on a well for which the string control is necessary are illustrated below. or by installing a plug with wireline. as pressure is applied to the tubing to set the packer. it is essential to identify exactly what operations will be carried out in future to determine the consequent loads and thus the associated load conditions. Hydraulic packers are set by plugging the tubing below the packer either by dropping a setting ball onto a shear out ball seat.6. to analyse the characteristics of each operation in order to be able to identify the heavier loads which may be imposed.7. It is therefore obvious why. This may be of particular concern when using large bore tubing movement devices as the forces generated by the test pressure are greater than packer tubing seal arrangements. This stress needs to be taken into account to determine the total stress applied to the tubing. This in turn places stress in the tubing after the packer is set and the pressure is bled off. However. Packer Setting 0 REVISION A particular problem arises in tubing tied to packer completions when using hydraulic set packers. it changes the length of the tubing during the setting process. The formulae for determine this tubing length change are: ∆Fa L EAs 2ν ∆Pim ∆L3 = − L E R2 −1 ∆L1 = − where: (Hooke’s law) (ballooning) ∆Fa = − Ai ∆Pi and ∆Pim=∆Pi 7. 7. This involves applying predetermined test pressures to both the tubing and annulus.
The calculated flow rate is applied during the operation and the pressure trend (which usually decreases when the fracture is created due to the reduction of load losses in the formation) is monitored. Fracturing Fracturing involves the propagation of fractures in the formation for the improvement of productivity of hydrocarbons. It is important to monitor the pressure and temperature trends during the operation as the acid rate will probably increase due to the effect of the acid on the formation. together with the temperature variations caused by the injection of colder fluid. This equipment must therefore be protected using special isolating tools or protection sleeves. With regard to the stresses on the string similar to acid stimulations.3. Friction reducers may also be used to increase flow at the same wellhead pressure.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 175 OF 295 ENI S. the formation must be pressurised until one (or more) fractures are created. it is important to assess the drop in temperature caused by the injection of colder fluid which.2. To check the string design is suitable. in Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates case are in-house software which allows reproduction of the correct temperature trend. and decreasing the bottom hole pressure thus reducing the load. At times during these early stages. using computer programmes. is carried out at high flow rates even though of short duration. the maximum pressure able to be applied at the well head must be considered in order to determine the rate of acid which can be applied.A. figure 7.s shows the pressure and temperature trends required to be known so as to ensure stress control of the string. selecting the end of the operation as the final conditions but with a well head pressure equal to the maximum estimated. The pressures which can be attained. are higher than that during acid jobs. to reduce the loads on the tubing by preheating the acid in order to limit the thermal expansion and pressurising the annulus to reduce the tubing ballooning effect. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. Acid Stimulation 0 REVISION Acid jobs are carried out to remove formation damage caused during drilling by the invasion of fluids and cuttings or to stimulate the formation by improving permeability. To carry out fracturing. according to the classical Lubinsky theory. which.s). the maximum allowable pressure for some well head equipment may be reached.7. This operation is carried out by pumping a predetermined quantity of acid down the tubing to the formation at set pressures and flow rates. Other data are often needed for more complex calculations.7. This may lead to greater cooling down of the tubing with reduced pressures. 7. in order to exceed the fracturing gradient. These fractures reach from the well bore deep into reservoir and allows better drainage. the pressure and temperature trends can be plotted as shown by the previous example of the acid stimulation (figure 7. especially during the early injection stage. It may be necessary in some cases. . This entails obtaining in advance the injection parameters from various injectivity tests with increasing flow rates. From the point of view of the stresses exerted on the tubing string.
Pressure and Temperature Trends During Fracturing .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 176 OF 295 ENI S.A. and the second with marked temperature variations and lower pressures. a significant break-down is forecast (by a marked reduction of pressure when the fracture is opened up in the formation). the first with high pressures without temperature variations. therefore two conditions should be checked. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION If during the initial stages of the operation.S .p.FINAL CSG 2500 FINAL TBG 5000 7500 D (feet) 0 0 5000 FINAL CSG 10000 FINAL TBG 15000 P (psi) 2500 5000 INITIAL TBG INITIAL CSG 7500 D (feet) Figure 7. 0 0 100 200 300 T (°F) INITIAL CSG AND TBG . The latter condition may be too conservative.
t and figure 7. Flowing 0 REVISION In this case it is not an operation carried out on the well but the normal flowing load conditions to which the string is being subjected.4. . 7.g.u. it is necessary to interrupt production for maintenance or in order to take some data measurements. As shown in the diagrams of figure 7.u shows typical pressure and temperature trends after a shut-in. making it necessary to ensure a collapse control of some sections. This load condition is considered critical as. Different production situations will occur which cause changing load conditions.A. pressuring up the fluids in the tubing. This shut-in operation involves closing the well during which the well head pressure increases because the reservoir pressure rises to static condition. at the moment of shut-in. The situation is now similar to that during production but with well head pressures which are greater and hence increase the stresses on the string. the pressure and temperature profiles during the life of the well. which give the pressure and temperature bottom hole trends as a function of the depth at production start up and when the reservoir is depleted. or at least approximate. Compared to the initial condition. Shut-In Once a well is in production. The resulting compressive forces may lead to the buckling phenomena and even cause the tubing to exceed its elastic limit. temperature differences between the beginning and end of the productive life or the need to increase or decrease the flow rate for reasons external to the well. figure 7.7. e.5. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. It is therefore very important to establish. the temperature of the string does not vary greatly due to the thermal inertia of the well. the string undergoes temperature increases which cause elongation in the string.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 177 OF 295 ENI S.p. external pressure may be greater than internal pressure.7.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 178 OF 295 ENI S.Pressure and Temperature Trends in Normal Production Conditions .FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) 0 0 5000 10000 15000 P (psi) 2500 FINAL TBG INITIAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG .A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 0 0 100 200 300 T (°F) 2500 FINAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG E TBG .FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) Figure 7.T .p.
A.U .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 179 OF 295 ENI S.FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) .p.FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) 0 0 5000 FINAL TBG 10000 15000 P (psi) 2500 INITIAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7.Pressure and Temperature Trends in Depleted Reservoir Production Conditions 0 0 100 200 300 T (°F) 2500 FINAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG E TBG .
V .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 180 OF 295 ENI S.Pressure and Temperature Trends After Shut-In .A.CSG FINAL 7500 D (feet) 0 0 5000 10000 15000 P (psi) FINAL TBG 2500 INITIAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG .p.FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) Figure 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 0 0 100 200 300 T (°F) 2500 FINAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG AND TBG .
Using the above diagrams. intermediate packers. TUBING SELECTION The tubing string selection procedure and subsequent stress analysis is fundamental to the completion design process as it is during these two stages. 7. and knowing the completion configuration. A typical example is that of wells with the presence of corrosive agents where either strings and down hole equipment can be made in Corrosion Resistant Alloy (CRA) or carbon steel with inhibitors injected downhole can be used. it is necessary to assess all the various possible solutions.8.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 181 OF 295 ENI S.7. by choosing and verifying the various possibilities. In both cases the problem of completing the well is solved but it is necessary to verify both cost and whether it is better to use on CRA. the relative loads on the sections of the string can be calculated. Load Condition Summary 0 REVISION The operations described above were chosen because they are the most common and show which aspects of an operation must be known in order to determine which loads will have to be considered to verify string design. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.A. i.6. that the optimum solution is found through a sequence of approximations. Alterations are then made to the draft completion until the ideal safety factor. avoiding future workovers or if it is more economical to use carbon steel with an inhibition system and scheduled workovers. the correct safety factor for all the calculated load conditions expected during the life of the well. By using an iterative method. which may differ depending on the local environmental conditions and on some parameters discussed below. If the string is tapered or has one. or more. in any case. during the stage considered most critical as regards the loads applied. As shown in the examples above. can be obtained. it will be necessary during the control stage to know the pressure and temperature data of all the packers and of the tubing cross-section variations and is good practice to plot these data on diagrams. is reached. A draft design is considered based on the expected well conditions and then this design is checked to obtain the safety factor(s).p. Since the economic factor plays a primary role of importance when selecting a completion. . it is important to be able to plot the pressure and temperature trends of the casing and tubing on the two pressure/depth and temperature/ depth diagrams for the moment before the packer is set (initial conditions) and at the end of this operation (final condition) or. The Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates approach to choosing the tubing string is similar to that followed when designing any other mechanical part. generally this is greatest in the section above the packer and below the well head.e.
Once the choice of materials has been identified. .2. is the choice of the size. frequency of workovers. it will be necessary to take into consideration their mechanical properties to ensure that a suitable factor can be verified in the subsequent stress analysis stage. Taking into consideration the well conditions. Tubing Size And Weight One of the main elements of the completion string design process.) must fit inside the production casing and/or liner. CO2. the exact quantities of H2S.p. and if the string has more than one size of tubing as in a tapered string. thickness of the corrosion product. Materials The choice of material for the tubing string depends mainly on the well environment. the possibility of anisotropies must be checked into as they generally imply a lower compressive yield load than tensile yield load and corresponding reductions for their use at high temperatures.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 182 OF 295 ENI S. it is best to base the choice on an appropriate corrosion study which takes into account many other parameters. this method does not provide a solution to using carbon steel in conjunction with an inhibition system. landing nipples. using the engineering diagrams supplied by manufacturers. In this case. e. Critical Factors 0 REVISION The main factors driving the choice of the string are described below. wall thickness and grade of tubing which is optimum to requirements. With regard to corrosion studies. especially when the severity of the conditions suggest the use of expensive CRA materials (Refer to section 6). it is always necessary to determine. The inside and outside diameter of the tubing. is often sufficient though these only reach a maximum grade of T95 (95 ksi yield) therefore do not always meet with stress requirements in high pressures and great depth. The presence of residual tension may induce stress corrosion and over-stressing problems which must also be taken into consideration. whether this entails changes to either the casing programme or the completion design. etc. the ideal material is determined by the results of corrosion studies carried out prior to the tubing design stage. Indeed. it is then possible to identify the optimum mechanical solutions. When CRA steels are used (which must be cold worked in order to obtain the required mechanical characteristics).1.8. or for a quicker choice.g. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. 7. However. etc.8. economics. Given that the dimensions of the tubing and components of the string (safety valves. to complete a well with the presence of corrosive agents (H2S and/or CO2) the use carbon steel with controlled hardness and/or martensitic steel. in terms of all the mechanical stresses and corrosivity of the fluids.A. In general. chlorides and water from production tests and to enter these data into an expert system. outlined below. it is essential to establish the size in order to find out if it impacts on the casing design. the length of each section needs to be determined at this point. Note: It is vital that any detrimental impact caused by the casing programme is discussed with the drilling engineers to solve any problems.
which generally will be equipped with a corrosion inhibitor injection system. or gas condensate wells. which provides a better safety factor under similar conditions. the loads resulting from the various load conditions (acid jobs. such as cost. Wells in which hydrocarbons containing corrosive agents are produced are sometimes completed using carbon steel and it is accepted that a certain amount of the material will be lost through corrosion during the life of the well. Once this calculation has been made. These threshold velocities can be found in API RP 14E. it is necessary to calculate the velocities in the string during production. production. the new string (maximum thickness. This value for CRA tubing’s is often only 10%.p. This rate must be lower than the rate at which erosion occurs.e. It is prudent in such cases to reduce through tubing interventions which knock off the corrosion exposing fresh material and. so it is necessary to evaluate each one in order to obtain the most suitable solution in terms of cost. In some particular situations non-traditional solutions must be chosen as some parameters. may be due to repairs. API standards for carbon steels define a 12. faster wall thickness reduction. The strings of these wells.5% eccentricity tolerance which means one point on the tubing’s circumference probably has less thickness. should therefore have added thickness so as to have sufficient material to last until the scheduled workover. As explained in the following section. The above factors can often lead to a variety of solutions. minimum weight) must both be taken into consideration when calculating the string’s stress resistance. When choosing the thickness of the tubing forming the string.) applied to the selected string. it is useful to consider the thickness tolerance adopted by the manufacturer of the selected tubing. The two cases. surface pressures. it may be more appropriate to choose more structurally efficient solutions which use a tapered string with different diameters thus reducing the amount of material needed and therefore the cost. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The first indications of tubing size obtained is from tubing inflow performance analysis. by grinding. carried out to remove tong marks. The most important value to be decided on the selected tubing is its mechanical strength. Once the projected size of the tubing is established for the required flow rate then in gas. limit the choices. bottom hole pressures and other parameters. which take into account the type of fluid. . it may be necessary to increase the weight or grade because the string is too weak. maximum weight) and the workover stage (minimum thickness. hence. etc. Calculation of the tubing inflow performance is very complicated and time consuming in most cases and is not covered in this manual. Another reduction of thickness which must be taken into account on used tubing. These studies can generally be completed quickly using Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates software which directly provides the diameters of tubing for the expected flow rates and projected rates. mechanical strength and practical feasibility.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 183 OF 295 ENI S. In the case of a very expensive super austenitic steel string for example. i. the safety factor under these loads against the yield strength are calculated.A.
is the continuous movement of the seal elastomers which may become damaged due to wear or from the debris deposited in the annulus above the packer. Free Movement Limited Downward Movement Attached Figure 7.3. is systems to screw the tubing to the packer using a threaded connection on retrievable packer systems or to a tubing anchor (which allows the packer to be released when necessary) on permanent packer systems.W . due to the use of static seals. In very deep wells. Anchoring Systems 0 REVISION As illustrated earlier. which shows the three most common types of packer/tubing systems. with high pressures and temperatures the movements of the lower end of the tubing may reach several feet in magnitude and hence very long seal units would need to be used in the packer which brings related assembly and protection problems during running in. This will reduce movement of the packer seal assembly by eliminating downward movement and upward movement would only occur in certain limited lead conditions (stimulations or fracturing). but leads to greater stressing of the tubing string. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 184 OF 295 ENI S. Another important problem of free tubing. The best solution. the operations carried out during the life of a well cause movement of the tubing string which can depend on the type of tubing/packer seal system used between the bottom of the tubing and the packer. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.p.w. it is clear from this that the least severe system is where the tubing seal assembly is free to move in the packer bore. In preference.A. This system does. using a NoGo locator shoulder fitted above the seal assembly where it is positioned to prevent the elongation of the string while leaving it free to shorten. will generate different loads in the string will be generated.8. From figure 7.Tubing/Packer Systems The second preference is where downward tubing movement is restricted i. however. the free moving system is the first choice and if the loads it creates do not allow for a suitable safety factor during well operations are other systems considered. have some disadvantages which are often unacceptable such as dynamic seals. This will extend seal life.e. This type of anchoring provides the solution to seal life.
.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 185 OF 295 ENI S. Policy • • The use of premium connections for tubing is mandatory. 7. I and II. In conjunction Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates also recommended that a premium connection be used for production casings and production liners.2. To date three tubing connections have been qualified for the most severe conditions ALI. They have however been used successfully for years with good results. The use of premium connections for production casing is advised but not mandatory.5006 or API 5C5.9. They are : Coupled Connections AMS 28 ( manufacturer Dalmine) Vam ACE ( manufacturer Vallourec and Sumitomo) Integral Connections Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates A-DMS (Dual Metal Seal) Other connections like Hydril CS. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. PJD Dalmine and Antares MS have not yet been subjected to the complete qualification programme as per STAP M-1-M.1.p. They may be used for all service condition where an Application Level II connection is required. there are two service classes. especially when the annulus is to be used for gas lift or an underbalance fluid is used as a completion fluid. Application Level I applies to the most severe service conditions. Class of Service According to the specification STAP M-1-M 5006 ‘Connection Procedure Evaluation’. 7. TUBING CONNECTIONS 0 REVISION The Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates policy for tubing connections is that ‘the use of premium connections is mandatory’.9. termed Application Levels (AL).9.A. The connections to be used shall be qualified according to the requirements as set in the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates procedure ‘Connection Procedure Evaluation’.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. AL I no yes AL II AL I AL I no no AL II AL II (*) AL I Requirement yes yes AL I AL I AL I yes no AL II AL I AL I Table 7. Work string or well testing string: Integral AL1 connection shall be used Horizontal wells with Build up ≥ 20°/100 feet: Integral AL1 connection should be used Wells with TVD ≥ 4500m: Integral AL1 connection shall be used Producing Oil And Gas Wells (TVD < 4500m) Criteria NACE Close Proximity Differential WP 0 .9.Connection Specification Storage/Injection Gas Wells (TVD < 4500m) Criteria Differential WP 0 .p.A .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 186 OF 295 ENI S.Connection Specification Requirement AL I AL II . Selection Criteria 0 REVISION The following are the selection criteria for connections used in different types of wells and operating conditions.B .8000 psi Table 7.3.4000 psi Differential WP 4000 .A.8000 psi Differential WP over 8000 psi (*) For Gas Injection wells.4000 psi Differential WP 4000 .
9.Connection Specification A flow chart reaffirming the above is shown in figure 7.C .A.x.8000 psi Table 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Water Injection Wells (TVD < 4500m) Criteria Differential WP 0 .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 187 OF 295 ENI S.4 explains the NACE and Close Proximity definitions.p. 0 REVISION Requirement AL II AL II Differential working pressure is the maximum differential pressure (internal and/or external) to which the production string is subjected during the life of the well. Note: Section 7.4000 psi Differential WP 4000 . .
p.X . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 188 OF 295 ENI S.Connection Application Level Selection Flow Chart .
A. government building. Public area shall mean a dwelling. Well is located within 50ft. 500ppm ROE of H2S is greater than 50ft. hospital. of a public road (lease road excluded).4. city. The following list of criteria can be used for determining this potential risk. church.4546) (mole fraction H2S) (Q)] 0. wildlife preserve. • • • • • • • Well is located in any environmentally sensitive area such as parks.589) (mole fraction H2S) (Q)] 0. a public road. town. These conditions are recommended minimum considerations. Well is located within 350ft of any dwelling. school bus stop.9. NACE And Proximity Definitions NACE Requirement 0 REVISION This applies to the partial pressure of hydrogen sulphide (H2S) in the produced fluid as defined by NACE Standard MR 01-75. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. Close Proximity A proximity assessment should be prepared to consider the potential impact of an uncontrolled well flow condition on the life of personnel and the environment around the wellhead. etc. of an open flame or fired equipment.p.6258 . Well is located in or near inland navigable waters Well is located in or near surface domestic water supplies. county or municipal street or road owned or maintained for public access or use. village. Public road shall mean any federal. It will be necessary to meet any other local regulatory requirements. or other similar area that one can expect to be populated. place of business. 100ppm Radius of Exposure (ROE) of H2S is greater than 50ft. all or any portion of a park.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 189 OF 295 ENI S. city limits. Well is located within 150ft. Other criteria for consideration should be included when necessary. Texas Railroad Commission Rules The following information is taken from Texas Railroad Commission Rule 36: For determining the location of the 100ppm radius of exposure: X = [(1.6258 For determining the location of the 500ppm radius of exposure: X = [(0. from the wellhead and includes any part of a public area including a public road. from the wellhead and includes any part of a public area except a public road. state. Well is located in state waters. school.
a 100ppm radius of exposure equal to 3.A.5. . as is applicable: For the new wells in developed areas. This requires special surface treatment in the connection’s pin and box. the escape rate shall be determined by using the current adjusted open-flow rate of offset wells. The anti-galling treatments (e. hence protection.e. After these calculations are made. 7. CRA Connections For steels with a high chrome content (>13%). Mole fraction of hydrogen sulphide in the gaseous mixture which could escape. or the field average current adjusted openflow rate.10. The escape rate used in determining the radius of exposure shall be corrected to standard o conditions of 14. 7. Connection Data Data on tubing connections are available from API specifications and tables in industry handbooks. Fp. The volume used as the escape rate in determining the radius of exposure shall be that specified below. there is a tendency to gall during make up. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 where: X = Radius of exposure in feet Q= H2S = 0 REVISION Maximum volume determined to be available for escape in cubic feet per day.p. The string or load conditions or the tubing strength must therefore be altered until the calculation produces an appropriate safety factor (SF). TUBING STRESS CALCULATIONS The final stage of the completion string design is the calculation of stress in areas under the highest loads. i.9. When a well is in an area where insufficient data exists to calculate a radius of exposure. Bakertron or copper plating) is always applied to the couplings to ensure the utmost coating. it is possible to calculate the forces acting on the packer. whichever is the larger. it is possible to determine how close the stresses are to the material’s yield strength.6.g. At this point of the process all the possible elements needed for the design verification are available.000ft shall be assumed.9. During the verification stage it may be seen that the loads on the string are unacceptably high. and consequently.8. 7. Computer programmes are very useful in this phase as it is possible to make repeated calculations quickly with different parameters.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 190 OF 295 ENI S.65psia and 60 F. but where hydrogen sulphide may be expected. the fictitious and piston forces in the string sections. the type of tubing and materials to be used to meet the requirements outlined in section 6. information about the load conditions. Using the calculation theory illustrated previously.
y.Forces at X-X F f tp = F f − wL F f*tp = F f* − wL As can be seen. the type of completion shown in figure 7. the sections where the string design must be verified are indicated by x-x at the well head and y-y at the downhole just above the packer.E . Section Y-Y (Packer) Tubing-Packer Mode Free tubing Tubing permitting limited motion and anchored Piston Forces Fictitious Forces Fa Ff Fa* = Fa + F p Table 7.Forces at Y-Y F f* = F f + F p Section X-X (Well Head) Tubing-Packer Mode Free tubing Tubing permitting limited motion and anchored Piston Forces Fictitious Forces Fa tp = Fa − w s L Fa*tp = Fa* − w s L Table 7. Calculation Methods 0 REVISION Taking. as an example. to calculate forces on intermediate sections between the well head and packer depth.A.y. the forces at the well head coincide with those at the packer depth if L = 0. For other types of completions. it is sufficient to use an intermediate length ‘l’ ( L > l > 0 ) measured from the packer.D . have intermediate packers or other discontinuities.10. The asterix distinguishes the forces calculated in a completion with the string anchored to the packer verses those calculated for a string free to move in the seal bore. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. the tables below summarise the forces acting on the sections of the string which will be used for the design verifications.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 191 OF 295 ENI S. instead of ‘L’ of the previous formulae. With reference to figure 7. Therefore. string design must be verified at all the appropriate sections where there are variations in diameter.1. .p.
A.Y .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 192 OF 295 ENI S. σb is calculated only if the section of the string to be verified is buckled. it is given by the expression: σb = Dr Ff 4I therefore.Example Completion #1 The piston forces obtained in this way are used to calculate the axial stress which is given by the expression: σa = Fa As The fictitious force is used to calculate the axial stress caused by the tubing bending when helically buckled. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION X X Y Y Figure 7.p.
2 P − P P − R Po σ o = 3 i 2 o + i 2 +σa ±σb R −1 R −1 2 2 P − R 2 Po R 2 (Pi − Po ) σ σ i = 3 + i 2 +σa ± b 2 R −1 R R −1 2 2 As stated above. 7.p. which gives the equivalent stresses in the outside and inside wall of the considered tubing section. by applying suitable criterion (for the materials used in the oil industry the most appropriate is Von Mises). the equivalent stress is σeq = σi The higher of the stress values determined above will make it possible to obtain the SF of the string for the load conditions and the section considered: SF = σ sn σ eq The SF must be greater than the minimum dictated by policy and listed in section 7.1 which gives the SF values to be used by Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates. both calculations must be made to determine the higher of the two values while.e. It.10. if the section to be calculated is buckled. its functionality. To calculate the SF the yield limit values of the material are taken into consideration so that there is no permanent corkscrewing of the string which could jeopardise. even if only slightly. Po and Pi are available.A. if there is no buckling σb = 0 and the greater stress is that in the inside wall.2. therefore. provides a quick reference parameter to evaluate the magnitude of the stresses present in the tubing compared to the maximum acceptable. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Now all the factors needed to determine the equivalent stress σa. allows comparison of the stresses due to the different effects in a particular section of the string against the material yield stress rating. σb. In this case the equivalent force will be the greater of the two. The Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates policy is to apply different types of material due to their different mechanical behaviours and resistance to corrosion. the stress which. calculated using the expression below. Carbon and CRA Steels up to 13%Cr The acceptable SF for these types of materials is: 1. i.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 193 OF 295 ENI S. Safety Factor A completion string’s safety factor is defined as the ratio between the yield stress and the maximum value of the stress obtained as described above.25 .
Furthermore. (e. As can be seen. apart from the yielding the cold worked materials reach breaking point soon after the yield point while the carbon steels maintain a greater plastic deformation margin before the breaking point.20. the SF is calculated using the yield point but also the collapse rating of the string. This is a dangerous situation which occurs at the breaking point. the SF should be slightly higher. It is.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 194 OF 295 ENI S.A.z shows the stress/strain diagrams for the above two types of materials. Figure 7. figure 7. the acceptable SF can be lowered to 1.15 for some particular operations and for specific well conditions. As stated previously. clear that a higher SF for Cold Worked materials is required in order to maintain the same safety factor relevant to the breaking points for the two types of materials. economic decision not to use the next grade of tubing etc. Cold Worked (CW) CRA Steels The acceptable SF for these types of materials which include duplex.). for some particular operations and for specific well conditions.p. low pressure oil wells.35 Similarly.g. the engineer may evaluate whether. from both the viewpoint of stress corrosion and mechanical strength.Z . The different SF’s between the carbon and CRA steels can be attributed to the different behaviour of these materials for stress values above the yield point.Stress/Strain Diagrams COLD WORKED CARBON STEEL σ σ σsn r σ σr σsn σr = breaking point σsn = yield point ε = elongation ε ε . super-austenitic and Incoloy is: 1. therefore. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In each individual case the string design and stress analysis engineer may evaluate whether the acceptable SF can be lowered to 1. the cold worked materials retain residual stress so.
the Yp value for use for calculations is adjusted using a special formula. conditions may occur making it necessary to limit the external pressure on the string. By evaluating the magnitude of this force and considering other factors such as the possibility of future recovery.p. the type of formula is chosen then the maximum withstandable pressure calculated. from which it is possible to make a comparison with the yield load. this diagram can be used to ascertain the suitability of the condition. Packer Load Limits If the Fp force value transmitted by the string to the packer is known. can be determined. it is possible to check whether well conditions come within the limits set by the packer rating. However. once D/t and Yp are known. . In order to use the API Bul 5C3 formulae.3. Po<Pi below). If an axial force is applied to the pipe as well as external pressure.aa. As can be seen.10. tension tubing. to the section’s elastic limit which occurs in thin-walled pipes.A. it is possible to calculate this value under various well conditions. In order to comply with the specifications of the supplier. causes a state of monoaxial stress. are known. cannot be compared in any way to those described in this manual because they take into consideration only one mode of loading.4. Any other SFs. the tensile strength in this case is positive. if negative.10. If the force exerted by the tubing on the packer (Fp = set-down. A typical diagram for packer force limits is shown in figure 7. In fact the causes of collapse can range from material yield as in the case of pipes with a low D/t ratio. greater tensile loads can be applied and vice versa.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 195 OF 295 ENI S. Fp = tension. 7. which require substantial differential operating pressures. when the pressure in the annulus increases compared to that in the tubing. due to the depletion in reservoir pressure. For example. One example is a well at the end of its productive life with less pressure in the tubing than in the annulus. Another example is downhole pumps for artificial lifting and are operated by the power fluid pumped down the annulus. it would be incorrect to use the SF for tension alone because during the life of the well it will be subjected to a combination of stresses. 7. takes into consideration all the stress components to determine the σeq. therefore. the most suitable type of packer in relation to the completion type. referred to. By using diagrams supplied by the manufacturer. Calculation of external pressure is carried out using the formulae supplied by API Bulletin 5C3 which identifies four types of collapse at external pressure in relation to the D/t ratio and the Yp yield stress of the material. is positive) and the differential pressure above and below the packer (Po>Pi above. if referred to only as in the condition of triaxial stress which. in a state of monoaxial stresses. if applied individually. External Pressure Limit During the productive life of a well. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The SF discussed up to this point is valid.
000psi ID = 6.61in Dpb = 3. Data: Tubing 2 /8in 6.bb.Typical Packer Force Limit Diagram 7.25in 2 Ap = 8.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 196 OF 295 ENI S.178 ws = 0.68in 2 Ao = 6. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 400 (tension) 300 200 (Thousands) FORCE 100 0 Safety zone (set-down) -100 -200 -20 -10 0 10 20 (Thousands) (above) PRESSURE DIFF. the analysis of the possible packer/tubing configurations available in this set-up is free tubing to packer and fully anchored.81in R = 1.p. (below) Figure 7.A.10. This allows calculation of the variations in length and thereafter the anchoring force in the packer.542lb/in 4 I = 1. we can consider the single completion in the well shown in figure 7.3in L = 10.5lb/ft : 7 2 Ai = 4.000in Casing 7in 32lb/ft: Packer bore: Length of string: . During a cement squeeze operation.5.49in 2 As = 1.094in r = 1. Example Manual Calculation As an example of applying the method detailed above.61in σsn = 80.AA .000ft = 120.
7795psi/ft).38 psi/ft.000psi and the casing at 1. It should be noted that 30° API corresponds to a 3 specific gravity of 0. figure 7.A.0317lb/in and.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 197 OF 295 ENI S.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Initial Conditions 0 REVISION Initially both the tubing and the annulus are filled with 30° API oil. This operation causes the string to cool to 160°F at the bottom hole and creates the pressure and temperature trend 3 shown in figure 7. Final Conditions Final conditions are cement displacement with a specific gravity of 15lb/gal. X X Y Y Figure 7.cc (15lb/gal corresponds to a specific gravity of 0. to a pressure gradient of 0.Example Completion #2 .cc shows the pressure and temperature variations against depth.000psi. while the temperature is 60°F at the well head and 200°F at the bottom hole.BB . obtained by pressurising the tubing at 5. therefore.0649lb/in and to a pressure gradient of 0.
68) − 1000 (8.3 − 4.CC .A.49) = 30751.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION O P (psi) O 60 T (°F) GEOTERMICO CSG e TBG 10000 3800 10000 200 D (feet) D (feet) FINAL CONDITIONS O 1000 5000 P (psi) O 60 T (°F) TBG SQUEEZE CSG 10000 4800 12795 10000 160 D (feet) D (feet) Figure 7.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 198 OF 295 ENI S.9 lb .3 − 6.Initial and Final Condition (Example #2) Calculation Method a) Calculation of variations in length The variation in the piston force between initial and final conditions is expressed by: ∆Fa = ∆Pi (Ap − Ai ) − ∆Po (Ap − Ao ) = 8995 (8.
3037 lb/in w fo = Ao γ fo = 6.16 in As this distance is less than the length of the string. so it is necessary to determine the position of the neutral point in order to calculate the ∆L2.20567 = 0. is calculated in the following way: w fi = Ai γ fi = 4.81 = − 67. ∆L 2 = − =− F2 r 2 8Elw 2 −(1.64 = −46.3 x (12795 − 4800 ) = 66358.5 lb As this value is positive.640 lb/in The neutral point from the bottom hole is therefore: n= Ff w 66358. w.9 x 120000 =− E As 30000000 x 1.0317 = 0.p.4.2.542 + 0.2057 lb/in w = ws + w fi − w fo = 0.49 x 0. not all the string is buckled.5 = 0. The weight of string. is calculated using the first of the two formulae in section 7. then the string is buckled. fully immersed in fluids.3037 − 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION so the variation in length according to Hooke’s Law (piston force) is given by: L1 = − Fa L 30751.640 = 103685.A.5 ) 8×30000000×1.6×10. The variation in length ∆L2. is given by: F f = A p (Pi − Po ) = 8. which is initially zero because Pi = Po.96 in The fictitious force.61×66358.16 .0649 = 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 199 OF 295 ENI S.68 x 0.
56 in. is used to calculate the average variation in temperature along the string: ∆TM = (60 − 60 ) + (160 − 200) 2 = − 20 °F The variation in length is therefore: ∆L4 = α ∆TM L = − 16. is therefore given by ∆Ltot = ∆L1 + ∆L2 + ∆L3 + ∆L4 1 = − 165. .178)2 − 1 = − 34. if the tubing can freely move in the packer-bore.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 200 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As regards the variation in length due to ballooning. = 6.5 − (1.4.A. the formula in section 7.3 6997.178) x 1000 x x 120000 30000000 (1. As regards the variation in length due to temperature.4 in. the average variations in pressure along the string can be calculated using the formulae in section 7.5 psi ∆Pom = (1000 − 0 ) + (4800 − 3800) 2 = 1000 psi Therefore.4.3: ∆Pim = (5000 − 0) + (12795 − 3800 ) 2 = 6997. the variation in length caused by ballooning is as follows: ∆L3 = − 2ν E x ∆P − R2 x ∆P im om xL 2 R −1 2 =− 2 x 0.4.9 x 10 − 6 x (− 20 ) x 120000 The variation in total length of the tubing.73 in.
485 = 41266.000lb.p. the neutral point is located as: Fso w 20000 = 0.73) = − 115. During initial conditions.20575 = 0. this value is lower than that calculated for a free tubing.68 x 0. when there is a tubing permitting limited motion is given by: ∆Lso = ∆Ltot − ∆L so tot = − 165. as it would create seal assembly lengths which are not practicable for the planned type of completion.542 + 0. oil is the fluid inside the tubing and so: w fi = Ai γ fi = 4. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 b) Tubing Permitting Limited Motion 0 REVISION The variation in length calculated above. The slack-off operation modifies the variations in length the string will undergo during the subsequent cement squeeze stage as shown below. As can be seen. n= from the bottom of the string.61 x 20000) 20000 x 120000 =− − 30000000 x 1. as it off-loads weight on the packer after it is set (slack-off) and compresses the string. One method for containing these elongations is to use a tubing permitting limited motion.6 in order to obtain: 2 Fso L Fso r 2 ∆Lso = − − E As 8 E I w (1.485 = − 49.68 in. 2 The variation in the length of the string during the cement squeeze job. may sometimes be unacceptable.1483 lbs/in w = w s + w fi − w fo = 0.0317 = 0.61 x 0. Assuming that the slack-off force off loaded on the packer is 20.81 8 x 30000000 x 1. As this value is less than the total length of the string.4 in.48 lbs/in.A.73 in.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 201 OF 295 ENI S. it makes it possible to use the formula in section 7. .41 − (− 49.1483 − 0.
000lbs and the packer is forced upwards by the same amount. the formulae below are obtained (the diagram can be quickly plotted by entering any F values and calculating the corresponding ∆L): ∆L = − ∆L = − F 452. d) Tubing Stress Control If we consider a tubing anchored to the packer during a cement squeeze operation. Figure 8.5 F F2 − 452. calculated according to section 7. In this case as slack-off after setting the packer is present it is necessary to determine the force required to position the end of the tubing in the packer (Fp).p. If the diagram is plotted with the value of the fictitious force calculated previously (66358.68 in. As figure 7. are: Fa* = Fa + F p = 629 in.6 shows the diagram obtained using the formulae which supplies the force/elongation characteristic for tension and compression. the fictitious and piston forces.6. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 c) Anchored tubing 0 REVISION If we assume a condition obtained with a tubing which only permits limited motion.5lbs). it is possible to identify the point where the origin of the axes has moved to.A. When the data of the example are replaced.68 in .000lbs. so the string is subject to stress at its lower end which is equal to 37. This value may still be unacceptable so it is necessary to use anchoring in both directions. = Pi (A p − Ai ) − P0 (A p − Ao ) + F p F f* = F f + F p = 29358 lb . giving so ∆Ltot = -115.cc shows. movement in the direction of elongation by a ∆Lp value is made in order to locate the point which is distant from the curve by a Fp value.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 202 OF 295 ENI S.5 95403727 [in] for F<0 [in] for F >0 . From this point. Fp = 37000lbs. with a slack-off of 20. thus so setting the elongation ∆Lp =-∆Ltot =115.
DD .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 203 OF 295 ENI S. F f* tp = F f* − w x L = 29358 − 0. the forces at the well head are: Fa*tp = Fa* − w s x L = 629 − 6.bb).p.5 x 10000 = − 64371 in. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In the section above the packer (figure 7.Anchored Tubing (Example #2) accorciamenti [in] .A. 50 20 trazione [lbx1000] 40 60 allungamenti [in] 100 allungamenti [in] 80 100 compressione [lbx1000] -40 -20 -50 Fp -100 -150 ∆Lp -200 Ff 20 40 compressione [lbx1000] Figure 7.64 x 120000 = − 47442 in.
if we consider the highest value found as equivalent force.61 = 21095 psi If we replace the σa e σb.81 = − 35564 psi . values.A.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Bottom Hole The piston force generates an axial stress equal to: 0 REVISION Fa* σa = As 629 = 1. σb = 0 and the greatest amount of stress is generated on the inner wall of the tubing: σa = Fa*tp As − 64371 = 1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 204 OF 295 ENI S. the values below are obtained using the formulae in section 7.61 x 29358 = 4 x 1. the result is σeq = σi. we can obtain the following bottom hole safety factor: SF = = σ sn σ eq 80000 60223 = 1.875 x 1.81 = 347 psi the deformation due to buckling generates an axial stress equal to: σb = Dr * Ff 4I 2.10: σo = 51688psi σi = 60223psi . therefore.33 Well Head * As Ff tp < 0 the string at the well head is not buckled. along with Pi = 12795 psi e Po = 4800 psi.
please refer to the notes in Appendix D and the user’s manual available in the Company’s library. Examples done with the Vertubing programme.p.25. For further information please refer to the user’s manual. . 7.21 The safety factor for the cement squeeze operation results as the lowest of obtained values.000psi. Therefore only a brief description has been given in Appendix D. For a description of the programme’s general functions. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION If we replace the σa value obtained and as pi = 5.33 This value is acceptable because the lower limit for a carbon steel string is 1. Particular attention should be paid to data entry and presentation of results in order to obtain knowledge of how the programme handles these two cases. the value below is obtained using the formula in section 7. the well head safety factor is: SF = = σ sn σ eq 80000 36117 = 2. .6. analysed during completion studies for the Villafortuna-Trecate field. Example Computation As an example we have included two cases of string calculations.A.000psi and po = 1.10: σi = 36117 psi therefore as σeq = σi.10. The first example is the same as that dealt with by Lubinsky.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 205 OF 295 ENI S. The second is a case history. therefore: SF = 1. carried out using the Wellcat programme supplied by Enertech. have been deliberately omitted as this programme is no longer used by Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates.
The proposed criteria for the choice only take into consideration general technical aspects and do not cover the individual characteristics of particular models or tools.p.e.A . The packers considered are listed in table 8.3. For this reason regarding permanent packers.Packer Types . Once the packer type and model have been defined. while still reflecting the needs which lead to selection of the most commonly used models.1. i.A. Type Of Packer Permanent Setting Method Mechanical Hydraulic Setting Tool • Hydraulic setting tool • Electric line N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Sealbore Features • Std/Large/Dual • Std/Large/Dual Std/Dual Std/Large/Dual Std/Dual Permanent/ Retrievable Retrievable Mechanical Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydrostatic Weight Table 8.1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 8.a below. This section defines the series of criteria for choosing packer characteristics to apply to single and selective completions.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 206 OF 295 ENI S. reference is made to the operating ‘Envelopes’. 8. operating diagrams for the packers supplied by the manufacturer of the particular packer and to the pressure ratings for retrievable packers. the next stage is establish its performance to meet with all the expected operating conditions (applied force and pressure differences). SUB-SURFACE EQUIPMENT PACKERS The types of packer systems and applications have already been described in section 5.
Operational Data The following operational data are required: • • Stimulations (planned. identifying the standard procedures for each stage (Refer to figure 8. off-shore under water) Pressures and temperatures Type of well (production. Selection Criteria Various representations can be used to describe the categories of criteria. in particular: a) removal of the tubing by itself b) • • removal of the tubing and packer simultaneously Planned frequency of de-compression operations Potential damage to the formation caused by the workover fluid. unplanned) Type of de-compression operations.). the most important being: • • • • • Location (on-shore/ off-shore platforms. stress analysis is carried out to check the completion string (packer and tubing) under the stress to which they are exposed.1. etc.a. gas) Deviation (max. These data also include type of packer chosen and setting. This section illustrates the flow diagrams. Completion Data This includes the following parameters such as: • • • Type and density of the completion fluid Perforation of the casing using tubing-conveyed or wireline techniques Use of a production liner.p. 8.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 207 OF 295 ENI S.1. Selection Procedure Packer selection has three stages: 1) 2) 3) 0 REVISION Selection of type of packer Selection of setting mechanism Selection of main packer accessories including the tubing-packer connection In stage 3. The selection process includes the following categories of data: General Well Data This includes data which effects the configuration of the well to be completed. setting depth.A. injection) Type of fluid produced (oil. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. deviation angle).2.5 which describes the iterative process of tubing weight/grade/stress calculations. refer to section 7. .1.
p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 208 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.A .A.Selection Process Diagram .
3. Well Classification 0 REVISION An important parameter for defining the characteristics of a packer is the ‘degree of difficulty of the well to be completed’.1. 4) Non-critical well • • Depth of less than 3. SBHT > 130°C. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. 3) Critical Well • • Temperatures between 100 and 130°C Depths between 3. The depths indicated are true vertical depths.A. select a permanent/retrievable or permanent packer. Gas injection well with pressures. High pressures.500m. Packer Selection For Single String Completion Type Of Packer Procedure The choice is mainly linked to the type of well: 1) 2) 3) In the case of a highly critical well. If the well has high corrosive.p. To this end four classes of well have been identified which are used to analyse the various problems involved in the selection of the packer: 1) High corrosive wells • 2) The fluids have high corrosive problems. SBHP > 700 atm.b). select a permanent packer. Temperatures below 100 °C.000psi.1. 8. High temperatures.4. ITHP above 3.000 and 4. If the well is critical or non-critical. Highly critical wells: • • • • • • Deep depths > 4500m.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 209 OF 295 ENI S. Platform well having the risk of failure due to the potential collision from a vessel with the structure. .000m. (Refer to figure 8. with priority be given to the former. Subsea well-head well.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 210 OF 295 ENI S.000psi. (G) Gas injection well with injection pressure > 3. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8. (C) Use of TCP drilling techniques. (F) The packer fluid is a high density mud (> 1.6 kg/l) with probable solid deposits on the packer. .p. (E) The workover fluid damages the formation. (D) Measured well depth ≥ 3000 m.b: (A) High frequency of tubing pullout.Type of Packer for Critical and Non-Critical Wells Explanation of figure 8.B . (B) High frequency of tubing-packer pullout.A.
. choose hydraulic setting. The rectangle ‘Choose’ indicates the choice between the two alternatives. Is a deviated well. on its depth. or requests due to the completion fluid characteristics). with a maximum deviation angle > 50°. in the choice is made on the basis of point (D) then there are no particular constraints (no workovers. Figure 8. For example. If the well is critical or not critical. (Refer to figure 8. Packer Setting Method Permanent and Permanent/Retrievable Packers The selection is dependent mainly on the well characteristics: 1) 2) 3) If the well is corrosive or very critical. in particular.C .Packer Setting Method for Critical and Non-Critical Wells For a mechanical type permanent packer.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 211 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION At points A and B. The completion fluid = mud with density > 1. high frequency of extraction corresponds to a completion life of less than five years.6 kg/l.p. The same procedure will also be used later for packers of the type used in a selective type completion. the priority is indicated by a number (‘1’ corresponds to a higher priority than ‘2’). The safety factor of using a retrievable packer or not depends on the criticality of the well and.A. Gas a production liner with inclination > 30°. Reference (A) is only true if one of the following conditions are relevant: • • • • SBHT > 150 °C (= 270 °F).c). the setting is defined by the conditions detailed in (A).
000m (this is true to definitive and not test completions).6 kg/l) with the probability that it leaves solid deposits on the packer. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Retrievable Packer Setting Method 0 REVISION The method of setting used for retrievable packers is made. 3) Check (C): • There is high frequency of tubing pullout (life of the completion < 5 years). following the diagram in figure 8.D.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 212 OF 295 ENI S. The bottom-hole temperature (SBHT) is > 60 °C. Check (B): • Using TCP shooting techniques.Retrievable Packer Setting Method 1) Check (A) is only true if one of the following conditions are relevant: • • • • 2) The well is deviated with a maximum deviation angle of > 20°. The vertical depth of the packer setting is > 2.A.d: Figure 8.p. . Stimulations are planned. 4) Check (E): • Completion fluid and damage to the formation 5) Check (F): • The packer fluid is a high density mud (> 1.
The conditions at the moment of packer setting decides whether to use a retrievable packer. e. If during the application of the stress analyses of the string gives negative results. Permanent And Permanent/Retrievable Packers Setting Method There are principally two aspects to analyse: • • The choice of the tubing-packer connection. If anchor is needed. . The type of anchor to be used can be defined during this first stage for an anchored completion (without shear release): • If the packer is set mechanically. a permanent/retrievable packer will be utilised and consequently. 5 If the failure of the stress analysis is due to the tension caused by the tubing-packer connection.g.p. a dynamic seal is used (Refer to figure 8. alternatively.Veritas is the UNIX version of the VERTBG package. The maximum force is determined using stress analysis (to take into account the tolerance of the nominal shear value ± 5 to 10%). the approach is the same as that for an anchored tubing-packer. defines the type of anchoring on the basis of the conditions for (A). in particular the choice is made between a shear release or anchor seal assembly. If these are outwith the capacity of the retrievable packer. fixed. Highly Critical Well: Anchored Completion For a highly critical well.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 213 OF 295 ENI S. a configuration which fulfils the stress analysis requirements must be considered for the packer-tubing connection5. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The decision of whether to use a hydraulic. or hydrostatic. gas injection wells where the IBHP is greater than the packer fluid pressure and SBHP is lower than the packer fluid pressure. The shear ring value is generally set by increasing the maximum force applied to the packer by 25%. the anchor will be a ratchet type or. If the stress analysis results are negative: • • If a shear release is needed. Tubing-packer connections seal assembly elements will be of the moulded seal type when subjected to alternating pressure cycles.A.d). The shear value is checked for the stress conditions at the wellhead section during the packer release stage. The main consideration is the required setting pressure (lower for hydrostatic packers) which influences the wellhead pressure rating. set is left to the engineer. the corresponding setting procedure will have to be adopted (see permanent packers above). At present the stress analysis procedure is developed using the “Veritas “ software package . To integrate this choice with the stress analysis procedures. an anchor seal assembly is used.
F . Highly Critical Well: Dynamic Seal This stage considers an anchored completion which fails the stress analysis calculation because of problems associated with the tubing-packer connection. In this case a dynamic seal is used (Refer to figure 8.Anchored Completion Option Check (A): Deviated well: • if it is an injection well it cannot be critical (see section 8.3). For an anchor with shear release: • If the stress analysis upon releasing is negative. an anchor will be used and the check will be carried out again.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 214 OF 295 ENI S.A.Dynamic Seal Check (A) .p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.1. Figure 8.f).E .
following any failure of the stress analysis. The packer is not set hydraulically. Non-Critical Well The easiest solution in these cases is to choose a Standard Seal Locator. run on the tubing.A. This is the case with the following conditions: • • • No stimulations are planned.f gives a general description of the criteria behind the choice of dynamic seal to be adopted. when using dynamic seals. the stress analysis results are corrected using factors other than the seal element. The well is not an injection well. If these conditions do not apply. The procedure illustrated in figure 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 • Check (B): • 0 REVISION The packer fluid is a high density mud (> 1.G .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 215 OF 295 ENI S. Seal Element .Critical and Non-Critical Wells. no other rules are apply as. Figure 8.g is followed. Here.e. in general.6 kg/l) which may leave solid deposits on the packer. This is only possible with hydraulically packers. Critical.p. The packer is one trip installation. Reference will be made to this later and also for cases which are different to those described in highly critical wells above. i. the procedure illustrated in figure 8.
a permanent/retrievable packer is the priority or a permanent should be used and consequently the associated setting procedure and seal assembly selected. deviated well with max. Again in figure 8.p. Retrievable Packer Tubing-Packer Connections The choice of the tubing-packer connection for retrievable packers (hydraulic and set down weight) is made on the basis of that in figure 8. anchored completion is not recommended.g. Particular conditions raise questions over which type of retrievable packer to use. In these cases.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 216 OF 295 ENI S. deviation angle > 20. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Check (A): • 0 REVISION the packer fluid is a high density mud (> 1. besides the choice of tubing-packer connection. (B): • (C): • (D): • the packer is set mechanically. In the case of a deviated well.h. expected life of the completion < 5 years. the need to use the packing setting procedure specified. . the outlet conditions included in the rectangle indicate. It is better to use a completion with a shear element which is more easily releasable. or a dynamic seal whenever feasible.6 kg/l) which may leave solid deposits on the packer. No additional adaptation of the seal element is foreseen as a consequence of any stress analysis.A.
Tubing-Packer Connections for Retrievable Packers 8. Single Selective Completion Packers The criteria illustrated here are valid for selective completions with 2 or 3 producing zones. .H .1. Packer Selection The first case classifies the well on the basis of depth characteristics (≥ 4.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 217 OF 295 ENI S.5.000m) but more on the basis of its complexity. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.p. The solutions given are for a case with only 2 zones and if a third zone is to be taken into consideration it is assumed that the selection made for the upper zone of the two zone scenario applies.
i. are not applicable.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8. however.Single Selective Packer For Complex Wells if several different configurations are available. governed by the order of priority specified along with the choices.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 218 OF 295 ENI S. as for example in figure 8.i. the engineer has a certain degree of freedom of choice but is. these cases are classified by well depth: . If the conditions as of figure 8.I .A.
A.000m Figure 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.J .000 and 4.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 219 OF 295 ENI S.000m .K .p.Selective Single Well with Depths Between 3.500 and 3.Selective Single Well with Depths Between 1.
500m In the case of depths less than 1.l is common with the only exception.L . and a permanent or permanent/retrievable packer are in the list of possible choices. .p. being that the order of priority for the lower zone can be changed by applying the following rules: • • If workovers are planned with removal of the tubing and packer. If the completion fluid is a mud with deposition problems.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 220 OF 295 ENI S.Selective Single Well with Depths Less Than 1. then the permanent/retrievable should be selected over of the retrievable.i through figure 8. Application of the criteria illustrated in figure 8. and a retrievable packer is one in the list of possible choices. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8. it is strongly recommend that a retrievable type packer be used. then it should be selected.A. in the case of multiple choices.500m in a well not considered complex.
In cases where there is no specific mention of an Intermediate zone.l where all packers are retrievable. modifications are be made only to those packers which have the problems.p. a depth control procedure is necessary to verify the depth of the packer setting to ensure positioning of the blast joint across the upper zone which is open to production. choose hydraulic setting for all the packers or else mechanical setting. . All packers are Retrievable Refer to figure 8.k and figure 8. hydraulic setting should be used for this type of packer. Permanent Stacked Packers: Refer to figure 8. Lower Permanent Packer With Upper Retrievable: Refer to figure 8. three zones are assumed (upper.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 221 OF 295 ENI S.4. if the setting distance between the packers is > 500m (check with the packer manufacturer). in these cases the reference packer is permanent and the other packers are the retrievable or permanent/retrievable type. If the reference packer is set by a workstring.1. intermediate. it is treated with the same criteria used for the upper zone. the zones are be treated separately. In some cases. Generally. Tubing-Packer Connection Selection The criteria continues by classifying the packers by type and setting with the zones treated separately.i with all permanent packers.k and figure 8. if the completion fluid is a brine. Due to this. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Packer Setting Method 0 REVISION The type of setting method proposed depends on the following factors: • • Type of packer Setting distance between the packers. It is essential to check with manufacturers that the distance between the packers is sufficient for the packers to be set. figure 8. With these type of packers. Mechanical setting is preferred for the reference packer and the setting should be by electric line when the distance between the packers is < 500 m.l. The setting criteria of a mechanical permanent packer (on a workstring. hydraulic type setting should be used or else the packers can be set mechanically. the results of the stress analysis specifically identifies the packers with releasing problems. It is recommended in any case to re-check the completion after having made the modifications.A.j. lower). i.e. or wireline) are those already defined for the single completion described in section 8.
A. The lower zone packer is a permanent with mechanical setting. Lower or Intermediate Packer There are three possible ways of treating the lower zones: 1) All the packers are of the permanent or permanent/retrievable types with hydraulic setting. In the case of failure of the stress analysis on this packer. for the intermediate packer. a standard length locator. In the case of failure in the stress analysis a dynamic seal with telescopic joint will be used. . in particular. For the intermediate zone in the three zone case. a longer locator with seal bore extension should be used. Initially an anchor with shear release should be selected. an anchor or retrievable type packer will be used. The lower zone packer is a retrievable. a dynamic seal will be used (anchor with PBR or telescopic joint). 2) 3) For the intermediate zone in the case of three zones.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 222 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Upper packer 0 REVISION The rules described for the single completion are applied to the upper packer (Refer to 8. In the case of failure of the stress analysis.4). A dynamic seal should be used.1. a telescopic joint should be used when there is failure in the stress analysis.p.
The choice of SSSV for a particular development will depend on: • • • • Well location Fluid properties Required flow area Well intervention capabilities.2.2. 8.1. either.2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. when there is a leak of insufficient rate.2. This will determine whether the selected SSSV is Wireline Retrievable (WRSV) or Tubing Retrievable (TRSV). Both types are generally referred to as ‘storm chokes’.p.2. SSCSSV’s are either pressure differential or ambient pressure operated valves. SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES 0 REVISION This section provides the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates policy and guidelines for the application and selection of Sub-Surface Safety Valves (SSSV). . flow erosion of the valve internals may alter the closure settings.A.3.4. The policy defined shall be applied to all Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates completion designs world-wide. 8.2. but under some circumstances.5. e. 8. Surface controlled sub-surface safety valves (SCSSV’s) shall be used accordingly to the criteria listed below in section 8. Policy All Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates completions shall incorporate a SSSV in the completion string to provide safety in the event of an uncontrolled well flow. In conjunction. Applications The applications for SSSV’s are given in section 8.g. A derivative of the storm choke is the injection valve which is held open by water or gas injection and closes when injection ceases.2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 223 OF 295 ENI S. sub-surface controlled sub-surface safety valves (SSCSSV) otherwise known as direct acting valves or surface controlled sub-surface safety valves (SCSSV). Any variation to this policy and selection procedures herein. a flowline rupture. shall only be sanctioned by the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates Head Office. Wireline Retrievable Safety Valves Wireline retrievable valves may be. the valve may fail to close. The use of these valves should be avoided as they are set up to operate on predetermined conditions representing a major leak at surface.
The following table 8. Well Type Oil Producer Criteria • All new offshore development. • All wells. • All wells onshore which can sustain natural flow.5.4. . • Electrical submersible pump. • All new offshore development. The guidelines given in section 8. • All old wells in above categories which are to be recompleted.B . Note: All valves with ball type closure mechanisms are not recommended for use as they are less reliable than flapper valves.2.p. • All wells. These valve systems are fail safe and are preferred to SSCSSV’s. tubing and only annulus if used for gas venting. wireline retrievable or annulus safety valve systems. • All wells on gas lift. Hydraulic pressure opens and then retains the valve open. Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valves 0 REVISION These are designed for tubing retrievable.b specifies when SCSSV’s shall be used.2. • All old wells being recompleted. Gas producer Gas storage Gas injection Water injection Artificial lift H2S in produced fluids Table 8. They are controlled normally by surface applied hydraulic pressure through a control line clamped to the outside of the tubing string. Valve Type/Closure Mechanism Selection This section gives recommendations on the choice of valve with the corresponding type of closure mechanism.5 indicate in which applications WRSV’s and TRSV’s should be used.Criteria For Use of SCSSV's 8. • All wells.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 224 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.2. • All wells.A. • All isolated wells. Removal of the pressure allows the valves to close. tubing and annulus.
therefore. the length of line required is generally relatively short.SSSV Closure Mechanism Applications Gas or water injection wells may have either a tubing retrievable or wireline retrievable SCSSV.3. CONTROL/INJECTION LINE SELECTION The purpose of this sub-section is to define the basic criteria for the selection and the use of small diameter tubes for SCSSV control line and injection line applications. • Jet pump wells. These two different cases will be considered separately below. 8.A. Wells with surface flowing temperature greater than 130°C. will be considerably longer. 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Type of Valve Tubing Retrievable Flapper Valve • • • • Applications Offshore platform wells. 8. • All waste wells. In this case. Wells with the presence of H2S or CO2. Control Lines Tube used as ‘control line’ to operate downhole safety valves are installed along with the production string. • As a backup to the WRSV above when there is a control line failure. .3. SCSSV’s are usually set at shallow depths and.1. Subsea wells. Injection Lines Tube used as ‘injection lines’ to inject chemical products such as corrosion or scale inhibitors down hole or as deep as possible in the well. • Wells with shut-in surface.2. under the pump. Wireline Retrievable Surface Controlled Flapper Valve Storm Chokes Annular Safety Systems Wireline Retrievable Injection Valves Table 8. • ESP wells with gas venting.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 225 OF 295 ENI S.p. • As on insert valve for tubing retrievable SCSSV’s. The line length required in this case.3.C . Set in the next lowest wireline nipple. • Gas lift wells. are also installed with the tubing string.
the raw material comes in the form of extruded hollows.500 to 2.p. Valve Opening Pressure. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. The cycles of cold drawing with a floating plug drawing method is preferred and annealing operations performed to reach the desired dimensions and produce a weld zone homogeneous with the rest of the tube material.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 226 OF 295 ENI S. Control Line Working Pressures A down hole safety valve is usually set at a relatively shallow depth.000psi depending on the manufacturer.065” wall thickness.3.d for the selection of the size which most suits the requirements. refer to table 8. Both types of lines comply with ASTM specification A269 ‘Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service’ and ASTM-B751 specification ‘General requirement for Ni and Ni alloy Seamless and Welded Tube’. control and injection line. In the case of welded tube process. They are usually available in a full range of materials and sizes. which are then reduced to the desired diameter and wall thickness by a cold drawing operation. the raw material comes in strips which are first rolled into tube form which is fed through a welding head to perform a fusion weld. Welded tubes are considered the norm as opposed to seamless which are considerably more expensive and limited in length (usually a max. Usually it ranges between 1. Tube Specifications Size 0 REVISION Small diameter tubes for control or injection line applications are manufactured either as seamless or seam-welded and sunk. Welded tubes can be produced in extra long coils more than 3200 ft by butt welding lengths of tubings together. The standard size for both applications. Once the working pressure has been defined as explained in the following paragraph.A. of 1000 ft in length). The working pressure (WP) is defined as follows: WP = Safety Valve WP + Valve Opening Pressure Safety Valve WP is as specified by the manufacturer. In the seamless tube manufacturing process. provided by the manufacturer. therefore in most cases external encapsulation it is not recommended.3. ranging about 30m to 50m from well head for on-shore installations or from sub sea level in case of off-shore activity. For this reason the configuration of the control line is not effected by the well deviation. is the pressure required to overcome the closing force of the spring plus resistance due to friction effects. is /4” OD and the wall thickness chosen from among the following sizes according to the pressure requirements: • • • 1 1 1 /4” OD x 0. .035” wall thickness /4” OD x 0.049” wall thickness 1 /4” OD x 0.
Injection rates to choose the correct diameter and evaluate friction losses.Phd Bottom hole static pressure.p. The definition of working pressure is based on the following considerations: • • • • Well configuration.A where: WP = BHSP= Pfr = Phd = BHSP + Pfr . (Refer to table 8. Injection rates referred to in this application are always low. Once the working pressure has been defined as explained below. Values obtained are based on the Lamè’s formula for thick section pipes using internal pressure only and stress defined at the internal diameter face.f and they are rated to temperatures between -20 and 100°F.n). figure 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Chemical Injection Line Working Pressures 0 REVISION Chemical injection lines are run to injection mandrels which are installed as close as possible to the bottom of the tubing. 8. Friction losses (see figure 8. therefore total vertical depth.n shows the graphs of pressure losses per 100m versus flow rate plotted for various internal diameters and various values of fluid viscosity.d). Total pressure required to inject chemicals through the line. 8. Injection fluid characteristics such as density and viscosity. Working pressure is defined as follows: WP = BHSP + Pfr − Phd Eq. combining radial and tangential stress to determine an equivalent resultant using the Von Mises Theory of Distortion Energy: OD 2 Ys − 1 ID P= 4 OD 3x +1 ID Eq.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 227 OF 295 ENI S. Once the friction losses for laminar flow have been calculated then the diameter size can be determined accordingly. therefore the flow profile can be assumed to be laminar. Hydrostatic pressure of injection fluid.B Variables are defined as: P Ys Ys WP OD ID = = = = = = computed pressure (psi) ultimate tensile strength to compute ‘Burst Pressure’ (psi) yield strength (2% offset) to compute ‘Test Pressure’ (psi) 80% of test pressure (psi) outside diameter (in) inside diameter (in) .A. The pressures given in the table are computed with ultimate and yield tensile strength values given in table 8. the selection of the tubing size to meet with requirements can be made.
011 4.515 18.375 Table 8.459 9.375 0.831 12.035 0.390 8.142 8.049 0.004 5.605 7.255 7.983 21.035 0.831 12.515 22.D .375 0. .049 0.035 0.780 17.965 42.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 228 OF 295 ENI S.646 24.049 0.757 15.972 9.013 Monel K400 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Type of alloy AISI 316 L OD (inch) 0.564 6.250 0.355 26. Material Selection Among the stainless steels and nickel alloys available.709 52.328 7.459 9.809 3. Bursting and Testing Procedures (for welded stainless steel tubing at between -20°F to 100°F) 8.089 5.250 0.065 0.084 21.006 12.035 0.250 0.4.250 0.118 8.763 12.965 12.065 0.250 0.375 0.025 Test (psi) 6.010 Burst (psi) 18.965 12.035 0.Theoretical Working. the most commonly used for control or injection line applications are listed in table 8.323 12.375 0.035 0.659 8.049 0.908 30.780 17.646 24.A.375 Wall (inch) 0.786 17.f shows the mechanical properties of these materials in the annealed condition.035 0.416 6.250 0.049 0.049 0.854 21.954 15.049 0.3.268 31.e together with their relative characteristics.642 30.112 7.898 11.049 WP (psi) 5.333 5.866 4.035 0.375 Inconel 625 0.250 0. table 8.112 7.065 0.914 30.375 Incoloy 825 0.914 30.006 9.333 5.967 7.438 15.250 0.252 37.427 10. Compatibility of packer or completion fluid with the selected material must be confirmed by means of condition specific laboratory testing.p.065 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.651 5.457 15.518 21.
000 120.000 60. Control or Injection line made of the above material shall comply with the following ASTM specifications: AISI 316L Monel K400 Incoloy 825 Inconel 625 In accordance with ASTM specification A269 (TP316L).E .000 28.Nominal Mechanical Properties in Annealed Conditions (For temperatures between -20 to 100°F) . In accordance with ASTM specification B165. Is a Nickel-base alloy with a higher percentage of molybdenum to give the highest resistance to chloride attack. Tensile Strength (psi) 70.2% Offset (psi) 25.p. Is an austenitic nickel-base alloy with good resistance to pitting in chloride solutions and to stress corrosion has improved resistance to corrosion by many acids. the corrosion department should be consulted to confirm compatibility with the packer fluids.A.000 Type of Alloy AISI 316 L Monel K400 Incoloy 825 Inconel 625 Table 8.000 85.000 70.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 229 OF 295 ENI S. In accordance with ASTM specification B704. based on pressure ratings and working environment.000 35. In accordance with ASTM specification B423. Monel K400 Incoloy 825 Inconel 625 Table 8. Is a nickel-copper alloy resistant to corrosion and stress corrosion over a wide range of conditions.Stainless Steels and Nickel Alloys Most Commonly Used Once the type of material to be used has been defined.000 Yield Strength at 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Type of Alloy AISI 316 L Main Characteristics Is an austenitic stainless steel with reduced carbon content. It is susceptible to chloride stress cracking when the presence of stress is combined with a packer fluid containing chlorides.F . Has good resistance to grain boundary attack and improved resistance to pitting and crevice attack.
230 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.3.5. Fittings 0
Connections for either SCSSV control lines or chemical injection lines shall be performed as follows: In case of pressure rating < 5000 psi, line connections shall be of the ‘Swagelok’ type. • In case of pressure rating > 5000 psi, line connections shall be of the ‘Autoclave’ type as recommended by API Spec. 6A (Wellhead & Christmas Tree Equipment) at the paragraph ‘Equipment specification requirement’ under ‘test and gauge connections’. It is suggested to avoid, as far as possible, any intermediate connections to reduce potential leak paths. 8.3.6. Protectors Control line protectors are designed to support and avoid (bare or encapsulated) crushing at where it is most exposed, e.g. where it crosses large offsets like couplings, downhole safety valves or gas lift mandrels. Protectors shall be designed for small annular clearances allowing sufficient annulus flow area. They should be of the “one piece” type without loose parts and designed so as to be quickly installed and removed. ‘Across coupling tubing protectors’ are recommended for use with both SCSSV control and injection lines applications. For control lines used on SCSSV’s installed at shallow depth (less than 250m), other types of protectors may be used. In general, ‘steel banding’ or ‘banding straps’, ‘rubber based’ and ‘mid joint protectors’ shall be avoided at all costs. The following technical requirements will identify protector performance: • • • • • Material shall be of all metal construction. No structural welding shall be allowed. Lab corrosion tests shall be run to verify compatibility with annular environment. Capable of firmly supporting bare or encapsulated lines when performing completions and recovery during workover allowing control line and protector reuse. Force indicated in ‘l’ or ‘tons’ that the protector will support against axial displacement without failing or damaging the supported line. Force stated in ‘lb’ or ‘Kg’ that protector will resist as a direct pull on supported line without any slippage. Maximum load expressed in ‘lb’ or ‘kg’ that protector will withstand when contacting the casing wall without damage. •
231 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.3.7. Encapsulation 0
Encapsulation of this line is recommended only for chemical injection lines applications. Encapsulation increases crush resistance during installation, protects line against abrasion, pinching and improves clamping profile. Several encapsulation materials are available, covering a wide range of environmental conditions. table 8.g indicates the compatibility of the main encapsulation materials with the most commonly used packer/completion fluids. In some cases, braided wire is placed alongside the injection line and bonded together by the encapsulation material, to further enhance resistance and strength avoiding any rolling and twisting tendencies (Refer to table 8.h). The following laboratory tests are suggested to confirm the lines mechanical characteristics and compatibility of the encapsulation material with the packer fluid used: • • • • • • Immersion test of the encapsulated line in downhole conditions for a defined period of time. No evidence of a change in physical appearance should be observable. Gas impregnation tests at various temperatures, pressures and with various gasses for a fixed period of time. No evidence of cracking, blistering or embrittlement should be observable. Combined brine/sour gas exposure tests according to the operating conditions, as above. Combined crude oil/sour gas exposure tests according to operating conditions as above. Abrasion resistance test to compare the resistance against abrasion between bare and encapsulated lines. Crush resistance test by loading the tube laterally, across the diameter, simulating various loading levels, until tube collapse is evident. Encapsulated line results should be compared to bare line tests.
The following table 8.g shows the main properties of the most common types of encapsulation material available. The choice of material, is mainly based on type of packer fluid, well deviation and working temperatures to be experienced and shall be confirmed by laboratory tests for compatibility.
232 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Encapsulation Material Nylon
Main properties Compatible with diesel packer fluids containing high gas percentages. Nylon should not be used with completion fluids that contain calcium chlorides, calcium bromides or zinc bromides at high temperatures. Its maximum temperature rating is 250°F. Compatible with most packer fluids with the exception of diesel or fluid at high gas concentration. Maximum operating temperature rating is 275°F - 300°F. Chemically resistant to almost all downhole fluids. Excellent mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Compatible with high gas content environments. Recommended for highly deviated wells. Maximum operating temperature is 400°F. Chemically resistant to almost all downhole fluids. Excellent mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Compatible with high gas content environments. Recommended for highly deviated wells. Maximum operating temperature is 212°F. Chemically resistant to almost all downhole fluids. Excellent mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Compatible with high gas content environments. Recommended for highly deviated wells. Maximum operating temperature is 302°F.
Table 8.G - Compatibility and Characteristics of Encapsulation Materials Halar (fluoropolymers) is a registered trademark of Ausimont USA Santoprene (thermoplastics rubber) is a registered trademark of Monsanto Rilsan II (polyamide thermoplastic) Foraflon PVDF (polyvinylidine fluoride thermoplastic material) Samples of different types of encapsulated tubes have been tested under compressive, laterally applied, loading simulating possible damage arising during installation to determine the tube crushing resistance and extend of polymer damage, (see Table below).
233 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Applied load in metric tons (no damage detected) 2.45 2.65 7.0
100mm - 1/4” OD x 0.049” Alloy 825 bare line 100mm - 1/4” OD x 0.049” Alloy 625 bare line 100mm - 1/4” OD x 0.049” Alloy 825 encapsulated with Foraflon: size 15mm x 12mm
Applied load in metric tons (line partially crushed, fluid flow not interrupted) 3.5 3.8 9.0
Table 8.H - Crush Resistance Test For Encapsulated Injection Lines 8.3.8. SCSSV Hydraulic Control fluid The criteria in this section is for SCSSV control line applications only. Today hydraulic fluids are almost exclusively based on mineral oils. Other types of synthetic based oils, are employed only when operating temperatures are very low and special thermal standby properties are required. Most of the synthetic based oils used are of the flash fire resistant category as they have a very low pour floc point combined with a good performance at higher temperatures. With regard to subsea completions, the control fluid is the same fluid as used for the Xmas tree controls. table 8.i shows the main properties of the recommended oils for control line applications. 8.13 and figure 8.n below shows typical friction losses of control line fluids.
Injected fluid viscosity = 5cP
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Q injection - liters/hr
Fri c. los ses psi /10 0m
O.D = 0,25 inches
w.t.= 0,035 w.t.= 0,049 w.t.= 0,065
Figure 8.M - Fluid Friction Loss with 5cP Fluid
234 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Injected fluid viscosity = 1cP
20 18 16 Fric. losses psi/100m 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 O.D = 0,25 inches
w.t.=0,035 w.t.=0,049 w.t.=0,065
Q injection - liters/hr
Figure 8.N - Fluid Friction Loss with 1cP Fluid The above graphs are based on the following formula:
Q x L xµ 612.95 Di 4
Pf = Friction losses (kPa) Di = Internal diameter (inches) L = Length (meters) µ = Viscosity (cP) Q = Flow rate (lt / min)
kPa X 0.145 = psi
I .A.3 110 -30 204 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Oil Name/Properties Viscosity at 40° C cSt Viscosity at 100° C cSt Viscosity index Pour Point °C Flash point °C Density at 15° kg/l Floc point °C Agip Arnica 32 (Petroleum based) Agip OSO 32 (Paraffinic based) Agip Betula S 32 (Synthetic based) 32 6.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 235 OF 295 ENI S. In order to avoid plugging of the control line while running in hole.4 163 -39 202 0. testing and running procedure must be carefully programmed and hydraulic fluid may have to be flushed through a filtration unit.p. . Agip Betula 32 should be employed only when operating temperatures are very low as in Siberia where temperatures may reach -50°C.841 -60 Table 8.Properties of Recommended SCSSV Hydraulic Oils * cSt x Density = cp **Density variation = 0.4 5.875 - 29.1 98 -55 206 0.865 - 30 5.00065 (kg/l) / °C For standard applications Agip Arnica 32 is recommended as it has better theological properties than OSO 32. if required (usually 5 micron absolute).
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 236 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.Control/Injection Line Selection Flow Chart .A. Control/Injection Line Selection Procedure Flow Chart 0 REVISION Figure 8.3.p.9.O .
This must take into consideration all the diameter constraints imposed by the casing profile and completion characteristics. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. Tapered: • Baker F top no-go (AF-HF-VF) and R bottom no-go (AR-HR-VR). XN.g.000 psi). WIRELINE NIPPLE SELECTION 0 REVISION The nipples required for completion purposes are based on the results of the previous design stages. R.4. The principal physical characteristics of a nipple are: • • • Seal bore diameter No-go diameter. SCSSV or wellhead).ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 237 OF 295 ENI S.000 psi. if applicable Lock mandrel OD (LMOD). VR (WP > 15. AR (WP < 10. . Data on all of these nipples can be found in the manufacturer’s current catalogue. the choice depends on the working pressure of the string configuration AF. and include the following models: Selective: • Halliburton (previously Otis) X. HR (WP between 10. Like the case in selective nipples. Do not rely on data produced elsewhere or use old catalogues as changes to the nipple systems may have been made resulting in incompatibility.000 and 15.000 psi) HF. The aim of this section is to determine the type (selective or tapered) and configuration of the diameters in order to optimise access to the sump and prevent friction pressure drop. The nipples are selected based on those most commonly used by the company. while R and RN types are used on all higher pressures. X and XN nipples are used for working pressure < 10.p.A.000 psi) VF. RN The choice of the type of nipple is subject to the working pressure which characterises the completion (e.
1. or: RB > RA or (RA . .070ins otherwise.060ins for tubing OD < 5ins = 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.4.RC SB = LMOD . and the only one used. 4) The data obtained are then used to match the nipple. To select the nipples to be as compatible as possible with the available options in the suppliers catalogues. the minimum top and bottom restriction dimensions are determined by the following procedure: 1) The top restriction (RA) is the minimum upper diameter of the nipple. an approximation of 1/100ins for SB is acceptable.050ins No-go dimension (NGD) = 0.A.NGD 3) In other cases.080ins otherwise The first nipple. At this stage a hypothesis of seal bore diameter of the nipple (SB) is determined by analysing the following conditions: If RB is not defined. is always a Baker type F and is chosen with the maximum diameter available for the size of the completion tubing below the hanger.050ins for tubing OD < 3.313ins 0.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 238 OF 295 ENI S. The bottom restriction (RB) is determined by the ID of the SCSSV tubing-retrievable.050ins for tubing OD < 5ins 0.313ins = 0.042ins for tubing OD < 3. decreasing the NGD to adjust the calculations. The following physical dimensional values are required: • • Running clearance (RC) = 0. For the lower nipples. generally in the tubing hanger. The minimum values which can be reached by the NGD are: • • • 0. chosen from one of the following: • • • • • 2) ID of the packer Drift of the tubing ID of the safety valve Vertical access of the wellhead Sealbore diameter (top) or no-go ID (bottom) of the upper nipple. Tapered Nipple Configuration 0 REVISION The configuration of the nipples begins at the top of the string and moves downwards towards the bottom or packer tailpipe.RB > NGD + RC) then: LMOD = RA . the previous conditions are re-applied.
. Selective Nipple Configuration Criteria similar to those detailed in the tapered nipple procedure are used to choose the tubing hanger nipple. it is then possible to use an R type nipple if the following conditions exist: • • The nipple in question is not required for the installation of a W/L retrievable backup SCSSV The subsequent nipple must be type F with the following characteristics: SB(F) < SB(R) LMOD(F) + 0.g.4. the previous size is selected but only for a maximum of three nipples in series. there are two options: • • Produce a new nipple size Select the maximum nipple diameter from the catalogue < SB. the maximum diameter nipple which is compatible with the rated pressure of the Christmas tree is selected. i. the nipple is compared with the data from the catalogue. If F is chosen. It is a rule that if the spacing between two successive nipples is < 30m. a tapered nipple will be used. F) is obtained from the previous selection. After this it is necessary to reduce the diameter again.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 239 OF 295 ENI S.p.e. 2) The type of nipple (e. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 1) In the event of achieving a good match. For the subsequent nipples. If there is no nipple with the characteristics required. 8.2.050 < no-go ID(R).
therefore perforation damage is an extremely important aspect. well clean-up. HMX. The detonating cord. applied pressure differential or underbalance.a). which has been proven to significantly help to achieve a post-perforating flow rate to effectively flush out gun debris and remove the crushed zone which surrounds every perforating tunnel. To optimise perforating efficiency.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 240 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 9. which couples all the charges to the detonator in the firing head. gun selection.25%). increased perforating skin can reduce production rates. o .2. To this end it is necessary to obtain an adequate shot density with a sufficiently deep enough penetration to pass through the drilling damage and maximise flow through each tunnel. it is not solely down to the perforating technique but relies extensively on the planning and execution of the well completion which includes selection of the perforated interval. HNS or PYX is used.A. SHAPED CHARGE PERFORATING The principle of shaped charge perforating is available in any service providers sales and technical literature (Refer to figure 9. PERFORATING The objective of perforating a well is to establish communication between the wellbore and the formation by making holes through the casing. cement and into formation in such a manner so as not to inhibit the inflow capacity of the reservoir. The advantages of perforated casing wells is already described in section 5.1. The detonator is triggered by electrical heating when deployed on wireline systems or by a firing pin in mechanically or hydraulically operated firing head systems employed on tubing conveyed perforating (TCP) systems. The explosives for use in most shaped charges up to 300 F is RDX (cyclonite) and above this temperature and depending on time exposed to the temperature. One of the important aspects is the underbalance. must match the explosive selected.3 and offers selectivity. If this is not effective.p. 9. and perforating orientation. however the perforated volume in the pay is relatively small compared to open hole (+/. The performance of each is available from the suppliers. The important issues for the completion engineer are the charge selection to meet with the conditions and provide the maximum perforating efficiency. fluid selection. PS.
2.1.2.Perforation Process 9.A. high mechanical and electrical reliability. multi-phasing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 9. speed and accurate positioning using CCL/Gamma Ray.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 241 OF 295 ENI S. Wireline Conveyed Casing Guns Through-tubing Hollow Carrier Guns Through-tubing Strip Guns Tubing Conveyed Perforating Guns. variable shot densities of 1-12spf. GUN TYPES There are four main types of perforating guns: • • • • 9. .p. minimal debris. low cost. Wireline Conveyed Casing Guns These types of guns are generally run in the well before installing the tubing. highest temperature and pressure rating. instant shot detection. The advantage of casing guns over the other wireline guns are. minimal casing damage. therefore no underbalance can normally be applied although in large size monobore type completions some sizes can be run similar to through-tubing guns using an underbalance. high charge performance.
A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 9.Types of Guns .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 242 OF 295 ENI S.B .p.
2. Due to the stand-off from the casing which these guns may have. They only offer 0 or o 1 7 180 phasing with a max. Another version available.p. Tubing Conveyed Perforating TCP guns are a variant of the casing gun which can be run on tubing. however they also cause more debris. therefore. The charges have higher performance and are much cheaper than throughtubing carriers guns. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 9. Through-Tubing Strip Guns These are semi-expendable type guns and consist of a metal strip into which the charges are mounted.3. is where a differential is applied between the annulus and the sump via porting through the test packer. Through-Tubing Hollow Carrier Guns 0 REVISION These are smaller versions of casing guns which can be run through tubing.2.2. A new version called the ‘pivot gun’ has even larger charges for deep penetration which pivot out from a vertical controlled OD to the firing position. casing damage and have less o o mechanical and electrical reliability. run on the bottom of the completion packer or run through the tubing on coiled tubing.4. Due to the potential of becoming stuck through strip deformation. In completion operations. underbalance perforating can possibly be adopted but only for the first shot. By being able to be run through the tubing. They also provide 0 or 180 phasing. then the guns detonated by either: • • • • A bar dropped from surface Hydraulic pressure applied from surface then subsequently reduced to the planned underbalance pressure during a time delay. hence have o lower charge sizes and. Hydrostatic pressure reduction. they are usually fitted with decentralising/orientation devices. 9. than all other guns. Subsequent runs would need the well to be flowed to cause a differential pressure. Normally the completion is displaced to an underbalance fluid.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 243 OF 295 ENI S. normally used on well tests. 9. allowing much longer lengths to be installed. They have a particular application for perforating through DST strings and reperforating completed wells.A.000ft are possible (and especially useful for horizontal wells) and perforating under exceedingly high drawdowns is possible with no risk to the guns being blown up the hole. they must have a safety release connection so they can be left in the well. of 4spf on the 2 /8” OD gun and 6spf on the 2 /8” OD gun. .2. Alternately they can be run in long lengths for overbalance perforating before completion string installation. Impact by a wireline deployed tool. Lengths of over 1. therefore performance. they may be deployed and hung-off in position before installation of the completion string.
A. can be used as a qualitative comparison of charge performance. penetration and flow efficiency in a Berea sandstone target at elevated temperatures and an estimated 800psi effective stress. charge alignment. moisture contamination.3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 244 OF 295 ENI S. The variations for these reasons is non-linear and depends on the type of charge. The API tests are also unreliable as the targets have had differing strengths and porosities and there is no consistent quality control standard for production of the charges. This provides under two specific tests: • • Entrance hole size and penetration length into a 5ft diameter concrete target. overburden stress and wellbore pressure and temperatures.p. the thickness of casing and cement or if multiple casings are to be perforated also has an impact on the gun performance.3. which includes performance data produced by the suppliers. Due to the longer exposure time because of the deployment. . API RP 43. higher grade charges may also be required. Section II is normally used for comparisons. It is necessary for engineers to obtain as much accurate data from the suppliers and use Eni-Agip historic data in order to be able to make the best choice of gun. gun stand-off. 9. Entrance hole. however the performance in actual use may differ due to differences in rock strength. Ageing of explosives.1. 9. GUN PERFORMANCE API And Performance Data For most completion applications. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 The main problems associated with TCP are: • • • • 0 REVISION Gun positioning is more difficult The sump needs to be drilled deeper to accommodate the gun length if it is dropped after firing A misfire is extremely expensive Shot detection is more unreliable. The performances are listed in two sections I and II.
A gravel pack is be conducted. There is a risk of sand production. High shot density over 8spf. . High Underbalanced TCP Perforating High drawdowns over 500psi for production wells require. this will require multiple runs. Penetration.1. the important factors are: • • • • • Hole diameter to achieve adequate flow area. Debris removal. isotropic formations should be a minimum of 8spf but must exceed the frequency of shale laminations. A shot density greater than this is required where: • • • • Vertical permeability is low. type of fluid. Shot phasing. underbalanced perforation can be carried out with through tubing systems. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Guidelines Gravel Pack Completions 0 REVISION Due to the problem of flow restriction discussed earlier in section 2. Shot Density Shot density in homogeneous. This in conjunction with correct gravel pack procedures is essential for to prevent high skin factors.p.4. There is a risk of high velocities and hence turbulence. The use of these relatively smaller guns require contact with the casing wall.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 245 OF 295 ENI S. if possible: • • • • TCP methods Deep penetrating charges. This is affected by the gun weight. If perforating with through-tubing guns. On the first run a high overbalance can be used but on subsequent runs the only means of producing a differential is to flow the well at a rate governed not to blow the gun up the hole. Shot density to achieve adequate flow area. bypass area and expected flow rate. Underbalanced Perforating With Through-Tubing Guns If TCP costs cannot be justified and if formation perforated skin factor is acceptable. orientation at o o o 90 with 180 phased guns or in line with the contact point if 0 phased.A. o Minimum 90 phasing.
especially at high pressures. If low phase angle. In unconsolidated sands. 60 is preferable.2. Hole Size The hole size obtained is a function of the casing grade and should be as follows: • • • Between 6mm and 12mm for natural completions. Between 8mm and 12mm if fracturing is to be carried out and where ball sealers are to be used. If the smallest charges are being used then the stand-off should not be more than 25mm. then strict control over the fluid used to ensure it is compatible with the reservoir formation. However. the intention is to cause perforation enlargement to remove the crushed zone without collapsing the cavity or sanding in the guns. formation fluids and must also be clean to prevent formation damage.A. If o fracturing is to be carried out then 90 and lower will help initiate fractures. Underbalanced Perforating To optimise the perforating clean up. Gun Stand-Off Gun stand-off should be minimised for improved performance.3. King et al developed a recommended minimum level of drawdown based on a number of field studies where TCP perforating had been employed. high density shots are preferred then TCP and casing guns should be used. The best method of clean up is to flow the well continually for several hours after perforating at normal offtake rates. 9. but at the least it should exceed the drilling damage area by 75mm. As a general rule stand-off should never be more than 50mm. 180 or less. Phasing Providing the stand-off is less than 50mm.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 246 OF 295 ENI S. 120 .90 . (Refer to the Figures below). These guidelines should be used to select the appropriate drawdown for consolidated completions. to obtain high shot density. This requires that less drawdown is exerted during the well clean up. The optimum clean up period is subjective and opinions range from 1gall to 5gall per perforation. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Penetration 0 REVISION In general. the guns may be limited to the charge size which can physically be installed which will impact penetration. o o o o Overbalanced Perforating If a well is to be perforated overbalanced. . an underbalance should be used.p. the deeper the shot the better. Between 15mm and 25mm in gravel packed completions.
Obviously. .3.p.3. 9. etc. Safety The use of tubing installed hydraulic actuated systems has the problem of how to conduct pressure integrity tests on the completion with sufficient margin between the gun activation pressure and the highest test pressure applied. It is good practice to use a bar drop firing mechanism (deployed on wireline if possible as dropping the bar from surface may damage sensitive completion items) or wireline installed firing heads which can be installed after the completion is set and tested. wireline activated. Two very important considerations are safety during installation of TCP systems and redundancy in the event of a fault occurring in the primary firing system.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 247 OF 295 ENI S. Protecting the firing head from test pressure is a dangerous procedure as a plug may leak will also cause premature detonation. Wireline perforating systems are normally electrically trigger by passing an electrical signal down the cable to the guns. Perforating Procedures Refer to the ‘Completion Procedures Manual. in TCP systems there are a wide variety including pressure operated. Using wireline installed firing heads provides some redundancy in that the first head can be retrieved and a second head deployed. for if there is a firing head fault.3. there are a number of different firing heads for various applications. bar drop. . Firing Heads 0 REVISION As described earlier. Redundancy This is an important aspect.4. it is undesirable to have a gun actuation pressure higher than the test pressure as a leak may occur while trying to trigger the guns. There are other side-by-side systems available which provide a tubing installed pressure activated firer with a secondary receptacle for a wireline installed firer. This provides full safety during gun deployment. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 9.A. However. gun recovery would be very costly.
C .A.Recommended Underbalance for Perforating Gas Zones in Stable Sandstones Figure 9.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 248 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 9.D .p.Recommended Underbalance for Perforating Gas Zones in Stable Sandstones .
F .A.p.Recommended Underbalance for Perforating Shallow Unconsolidated Gas Sands Figure 9.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 249 OF 295 ENI S.E .Recommended Underbalance for Perforating Shallow Unconsolidated Oil Sands . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 9.
g. In simple terms. System life is difficult to predict as it is a function of operating conditions. Energy can also be introduced by reservoir pressure maintenance. low pressure wells. The application of artificial lift simply displaces the TPC curve downwards so that a lower bottom-hole flowing pressure is achieved. GLR and lack of particular experience with the system.6. e.7 lists all the systems. etc. limitations and comparisons. Section 10. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 10. solids production. Overcome high friction effects of heavy viscous or waxy crudes. ESP life can vary between days and five years depending on temperature. Some systems are able to cope better with production problems than others which will obviously affect the choice. ARTIFICIAL LIFT The benefits and most commonly used artificial lift were described previously in section 5. To summarise the reasons for the installation of artificial lift are to: • • • • • Reduce the effects of declining bottom-hole pressures. Offset the effects of increasing water production. artificial lift from the outset is necessary to achieve the production and economic targets. their applications. design considerations. . Just as tubing size is critical to high PI wells. The selection of the most appropriate artificial lift system involves a number of factors but mainly on specific well performance. These early decisions can save much expense later. liner top setting. In some fields. then minimisation of the FBHP is critical to low PI. the artificial lift injects energy into the system. such as casing size.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 250 OF 295 ENI S.p. Kick off high GLR wells that die when shut-in. Consideration of future artificial lift requirements must be taken during the planning stage. In other cases.A. Meet with targeted high offtake rates. both pressure maintenance and artificial lift are used which defers the installation. such as: • • • • • • • • Casing ID Casing connection in on gas lift Size and positioning of liners Provision of a sump for rod pumpers Pre-positioning of gas lift mandrels for gas lift and ASV system Pre-installation of conduits for hydraulic pumps Parallel bore for plunger lift etc. Reservoir development optimisations studies are necessary to determine the relative technical and economic benefits of the options and the timing of the investments. Selection of the method is also based upon operating costs and workover frequency costs.4.
or either the near optimum GLR which provides a BHFP within 20-50psi of the minimum.a). it must be produced in slugs by intermittently gas injection through a motorised valve. Production is determined by: • • • • reservoir pressure PI water cut gas injection rate Once the well reaches a stabilised rate. As GLR requirements are subject to diminishing returns. which is used to produce low volumes of liquid (<350stb/d) from wells with low BHFP (<0.a. the injection is optimised to maximise production. This continues in sequence for all other valves until reaching the operating valve where the casing pressure will drop below the initial kick-off pressure. Due to the low liquid production. however this is limited by: • • • • available gas lift pressure the flowing tubing pressure at the intended offtake rate the depth of the packer and deepest gas lift mandrel the differential required to close the upper valves closed (+/-20psi) and to ensure that injection at the operating GLV is stable (between 50 and 500psi) figure 10.3. The injection gas is supplied in a closed loop system in which it is taken from the separators and then compressed. dried if necessary and then delivered to the well (Refer to figure 10.4. There is an optimum GLR to produce stabilised flow for a particular tubing size and a minimum BHFP. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10.1psi/ft). GAS LIFT 0 REVISION The continuous gas lift method adds gas into the producing fluids which reduces the hydrostatic head and.p. hence the back-pressure on the formation. During this process the well BHP will drop to the point where the well will flow. Another less common application is Intermittent Gas Lift.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 251 OF 295 ENI S. . As described in section 2. most gas lift systems are based on available gas supply volumes. the first unloading valve closes so that all the gas passes through the second valve. A standing valve is sometimes necessary to prevent the gas from flowing into the formation. In continuous gas lift. it is desirable to position the lower gas injection point as deep as possible in the well.b illustrates the fundamental principle of a gas lift design and operation. also shown in figure 10. increasing GLR initially decreases the bottom-hole pressure on the TPC. Qi. The lift gas is normally pumped into the annulus and into the tubing through gas lift valves installed in Side Pocket Mandrels (SPMs).1.A. As can be seen the gas is injected down the annulus and into the tubing through the topmost valve lightening the fluid column in accordance with the total GLR curve shown. the gas moves down to the next valve unloading the casing fluid and as the reaches the second valve and lightens the fluid gradient from that point. Occasionally the gas is pumped into the tubing and the production taken up the annulus or in the annular space in a concentric completion. As the fluid gradient changes.
A .A. Total GLR = Producing GLR + Injection GLR </= optimum GLR. IGLR = Qi/q Figure 10. is dependent on the IPR and attainable BHFP.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 252 OF 295 ENI S.Typical Gas Lift System . q. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 From this it is seen: • • • 0 REVISION Liquid rate.p.
hence gas tight or premium connections are generally selected.1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10. Although gas lift valves incorporate check valves to prevent back flow. This increased pressure.A. Modern gas lift systems usually now use SPMs with wireline GLVs to reduce servicing costs. the spacing of them is much more critical. This may again impact on the casing design. Impact On Completion Design In recent times. All mandrel depths are taken of the design as TVDs and these must be converted to MD. . much higher gas supply pressures have been used to enable deeper valves to be reached or reduce the number of mandrels and valves required.p. an annulus safety system is installed for platform safety. however.Example Gas lift design 10. these are not reliable and as the annuli contain quite a considerable inventory of gas. SPMs have relatively large ODs and this needs to be considered in the casing design. applies more pressure on the annulus casing.B .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 253 OF 295 ENI S.1. As the mandrels at deeper depths become increasingly closer.
915 at 50 Hertz. If possible. The ESP delivery capacity will vary according to: • • • • Well IPR Reservoir pressure Surface back-pressure Electrical supply frequency figure 10.p.2. high water cut wells and water supply wells. On offshore installations. Versions with variable frequency drives (VFD) are available or the use of surface chokes can be used to increase the band of rate (50-190%) but incur higher capital and operating costs. the installation should be designed to facilitate downhole separation of free gas and vented up the annulus which is necessary when the gas volume exceeds the pump operating limit (typically +/-10% of the total fluid volume).A The pump characteristics are based on constant rotational speed which is dependent on the AC supply frequency. the problems are usually inefficiency through upper gas lift valve or tubing leaks. To prevent sand production it is sometimes necessary to install a gravel pack or pre-packed screen for pump protection. They are particularly popular for high rate undersaturated oil wells. Operationally. Each stage consists of a rotating impeller and stationary diffuser. .c shows the most common types of ESP installations and the pump components. gas production up the annulus may be a significant problem.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 254 OF 295 ENI S. The differential pressure or total dynamic head (TDH) developed by the pump is a function of the pump flow rate which is relative to the head developed by each stage and obtainable from manufacturers publishing’s.1.2. ESPs performance is best at stable conditions within +/-25% of the optimum rate. Their main limitation is gas production but improved downhole separators and procedures can now handle GORs up to 1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. 10. Surface equipment usually includes a three phase transformer. 10. motor controller and a wellhead pack-off for the cable. The construction of the ESP is a multi-staged centrifugal connected through a short shaft to the downhole electric motor. ELECTRICAL SUBMERISBLE PUMPS ESPs greatest application is in moving large volume of low GOR (<100scf/stb) fluids. 3. Due to these high speeds and pump construction it is obvious that sand production is very detrimental and that emulsions are easily formed.500 rpm at 60 Hertz and 2.A.000scf/stb. TDH=Ns Hs where: NS HS = = number of stages head per stage Eq. Common Problems 0 REVISION The worst problem that can arise is that the pressure losses in the gas injection system and slugging have been underestimated and that the valve spacing is too far apart.
p.C. If the pump has to be positioned below the interval. The motor is situated at the bottom of the assembly so that the well flow around the motor will dissipate the heat generated. most pump installations are on the end of tubing and positioned above the perforations or open hole. a shroud is used to draw the produced fluid down past the motor. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As can be seen from the schematic.A. Bottom discharge pumps are used in powered dump flood wells.Typical ESP Installations .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 255 OF 295 ENI S. Figure 10.
A.p.625 11. On coiled tubing with the cable through the coil which is terminated with a special wellhead arrangement. ESP Performance It is normal procedure to select the largest pump that will fit into the production casing (especially if this was catered for in the planning stage).000 2.500 5.j below. Casing Size.000-12.000 1.000 5.900 200-5.000-33.375 N/A N/A 100-1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Other less common deployment methods are: • • 0 REVISION Suspended on the cable and latched into a downhole receptacle.ESP Capacity Ranges Two approaches are commonly used to evaluate an ESP system: 1) Pre-select the production target and corresponding BHFP and determine the TDH and pump size and depth required to meet this rate. .000 24. Small casing or liners will obviously limit the pump size selection. A recent development with the later is in Norway where downhole safety is satisfied by the installation of shear seal capability below the coiled tubing hanger.625 6. ins Pump OD.000-16.000-10.000-5.000 3.500 Table 10. Pre-select the maximum pump horsepower. and determine the attainable pump rate with: • • a fixed IPR and various tubing sizes a fixed tubing size and various IPR options 2) In this approach the pump performance curve is often plotted below the system performance curves. This often carried out by plotting the pressure traverses above and below the pump (Refer to figure 10.e. Both of these suffer from some problems such as cable failures with the cable suspension method and well control issues with the C/T mounted method (i. 10.000 12.437 7.375 4. ft 4 /2 5 /2 7 8 /8 10 /4 13 /8 3 3 5 1 1 3. ins Motor OD.J . ESP sizes and capacities are shown in table 10.000 5.000-12.000 4.e. downhole safety systems if the well can flow naturally).000 50-125 100-300 200-650 400-850 500-1020 500-1030 5. An example this to optimise the number of stages for a maximum pump HP is shown in figure 10.000 500-3.750 4.250 3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 256 OF 295 ENI S.2. stb/d Power. HP TDH.000 5. or number of stages. ins Rate.000-100.d).000-12.750 8.000-26.1.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 257 OF 295 ENI S.p.Example ESP Design for a Pre-selected Rate .D .A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.
Example ESP Design for a Pre-selected HP .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 258 OF 295 ENI S.p.E.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.
A. However. Also consideration must be given to the optimum tubing size and cable dimensions to ensure they can be accommodated in the casing.p. In large casings. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. The completion design is also affected if downhole separation is required in conjunction with downhole safety.2. Tubing hanger and penetration systems for packers have been well developed now for fast easy installation with the testing of the connections carried beforehand in the workshop. vice versa. Too many frequent start ups when there is no soft start facilities.2. Too much free gas and no enlarged intakes stages. If properly planned an ESP completion only requires one onsite termination. When re-completing a ESP well the pump should be moved slightly from the original position to help minimise any casing corrosion due to eddy currents.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 259 OF 295 ENI S. ESP systems are becoming evermore reliable. Impact On Completion Design 0 REVISION The key to an efficient ESP design is heat removal and insulation material selection for the actual operating temperatures and environment. Casing design is obviously has a large impact on the completion design or in the case of an ESP completion.3.2. Common Problems The biggest problem with ESP completions is short running time before failure with the cost impact for re-completion. The most common problems are due to: • • • • • • • • Bad installation procedures. Poor voltage supply stability. 10. Sand production. a shroud must be used to provide this rate. Unsuitable cable insulation material for the conditions. Inadequate system analysis leading to the system operating outside the range. Scaling up of the impellers. . especially when temperatures are in the o region of 250 F. Centralisation of the pump is also critical. The clearance between the pump and the casing should be small enough that a flow velocity of a minimum of 1ft/sec is achieved. The pump should be set in a straight section of casing to avoid bending and the cable needs to firmly attached to the tubing for support by cable clamps (two per joint). Centralisation and crush resistant clamps should be installed across doglegs.
dual tubing strings can be used either parallel or concentric. It is also popular where there is insufficient gas for a gas lift system and is a viable alternative to rod pumps for deep (>8. if this is a problem.000ft.000stb/d although it is normally used to produce <2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10.k below. The annulus is sometimes required for gas venting and in this case a dual string is required. A preliminary calculation of the pump intake or output curve can be made by hand. The maximum attainable performance have been summarised in table 10. The pumps can be installed and retrieved by wireline or pumping method using swab cups.000ft) wells. However pump efficiency is low at 33-66% and large production rates can only be achieved in high rate installations.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 260 OF 295 ENI S. the pump is not as sensitive to damage and lower quality power fluids can be used and can be used in higher GOR wells up to 3. Piston Pump The piston pump is a reciprocating pump operated with a drive piston which automatically shuttles backwards and forwards exhausting the spent power fluid into the returns. it is recommended to submerge the pump by at least 20% of the TDH so is better suited to respectfully productive.000stb/d with 4 /2” tubing. In effect the piston pump is equivalent to the rod pump except that the pump drive is subsurface but can produce up to 8. The downside is the requirement for two reasonably large conduits to minimise fluid pressure losses. deviation or severe operating environments. Optimisation is generally through using supplier’s computer software. HYDRAULIC PUMPING SYSTEMS 0 REVISION Hydraulic pumping systems are attractive alternative to ESP systems where there is high temperatures.000ft although high surface power fluid pressures are required below 12.p. depth.000-18. There is a large selection of pump sizes/stroke length available for a wide range of operating conditions. There is flexibility in the system as pump rates are controlled by controlling the power fluid supply rate. however this exposes the annulus to potential corrosion so. throat and diffuser. Their application is commonly for deviated wells between 8. The two simplest and common systems are the Jet Pump and the Piston Pump which are interchangeable in most instances which provides great flexibility in coping with changeable well conditions. hence providing lower servicing costs. Pump performance is a complex function of GOR.A.3. The size of the these can be varied to pump volumes of 1 100-15. As there is no moving parts.000scf/stb. pump intake pressure. supply pressure and rate.000stb/d although free pump systems are limited to 8. The conduits for the power fluid and returns can be the annulus with a single tubing. maintaining a clean solids free power fluid and the high capital and operating costs. Jet Pump The jet pump uses no moving parts and imparts momentum into the fluid using the venturi effect with a jet. To prevent cavitation. or restricted offtake target wells.000stb/d. .
261 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Head Ratio 0.45 0.25 0.17 0.10
Flow Ratio 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Table 10.K- Jet Pump Maximum Performance In table 10.k above: Head Ratio = pump output pressure − pump inlet pressure downhole power fluid pressure − pump output pressure reservoir production rate Flow Ratio = power fluid rate
Often the maximum power fluid supply pressure and rate is fixed by surface equipment rating, e.g. p<5,000psi, qPF <4,500stb/d. When calculating bottom hole pressures, the completion configuration and power fluid rate to the production to obtain the total discharge rate. The pump intake curve (PIC) can then be generated using table 10.k above plotted against well IPR (Refer to figure 10.f).
Figure 10.F- Example Jet Pump Design Curve
262 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 Turbine Pumps 0
The hydraulic turbine pump developed by Weir Pumps is an alternative to the ESP for producing very large volumes of fluid, 2,000-100,000stb/d. It has the same principle of operation as the ESP but the motor is replaced by a hydraulic turbine which rotate the shaft at 5,000-10,000rpm. This provides higher lift capacities (head and volume) per stage, therefore the units are much shorter approximately 10% of the ESP. The operating range is much greater as the pump can be controlled by varying the supply pressure giving 10-100% rate and 20-50% TDH at reduced rates. Their reliability is still suspect due to the high rotating speed and metallurgy problems. 10.3.1. Impact On Completion Design The casing size is obviously important here to accommodate the pump size and perhaps two tubing strings. Sometimes concentric completions are preferred or the annulus is used but consideration must be given to potential corrosion due to oxygen in the power fluid. Like the piston pump solids free power fluid is essential. Like the ESP, gas venting may be necessary which would require a third conduit (generally the annulus). Occasionally the DHSV is controlled by pressure from the pump. 10.4. ROD PUMPS The most common pumping system on low rate land wells is the rod or beam pumping. It is usually limited to shallow wells (<8,000ft) producing less than 500stb/d although they can produce up to 2,000stb/d. The system consists of three elements, the downhole pump assembly, the sucker rod and the surface pumping unit. The annulus is usually left open and used to vent any free gas that is separated downhole. Tubing is used as the production conduit and contains the rods preventing wear and corrosion to the annulus. The tubing is usually anchored to the casing and pulled into tension to reduce tubing movement, buckling and, hence rod wear. There are two versions of bottom-hole pump, the tubing retrievable barrel and the rod retrievable barrel. The tubing pump requires the tubing to be pulled to retrieve the barrel and the rod pump barrel is retrieved when pulling the rods. The tubing pump has the largest capacity but is more costly to repair than the rod pump which is the most common. The pump displacement, PD, is defined by the plunger stroke, SP, and the pump speed, N, the plunger diameter, D and the amount of liquid fillage and/or slippage past the plunger, EP = 0.7 to 9.5. PD = Ct x Sp x N x D x Ep Eq. 10.B where: EP Ct = = Pump efficiency 2 Correction factor 0.1166 for oilfield units, (in, spm, in , stb/d)
263 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Figure 10.G- Typical Rod Pumping System
264 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
As the rod suffers from stretch and dynamic forces, SP will not be the same as the stroke at surface, S, therefore load-displacement plot forms the basis for pump design and analysis. The fluid load, Fo, carried by the rods on the upstroke is dependent on the net lift, H, which is the vertical distance from the operating fluid level (OFL) in the annulus to surface plus the equivalent head of any surface back-pressure. It also depends on fluid SG or density. API recommends ignoring the area of the rods when calculating this load: Fo = Ct x SG x D x H where: Ct = 0.340 in oilfield units (SG, in , ft, lbs)
This load can be estimated from dynamometer surveys, which measure the rod load versus displacement at the surface and serves the most effective means of diagnosing pump problems. As the loads on the polished rod includes fluid load, dynamic forces and rod weight, the rod weights may be relatively large in deep wells and in these cases a tapered rod string is preferred where the rod diameter is larger with increasing load. Buoyancy varies throughout the cycle but it is generally taken on the downstroke when the travelling valve is open. Acceleration and friction are also factors in dynamic loading with the peak polished rod load on the upstroke will be significantly higher than the sum of the rod and fluid loads. Similarly, on the downstroke, the minimum will be less than the buoyant weight of the rods. Pump stroke efficiency is a function of pump speed and rod loading. The dynamics also cause the rods to oscillate harmonically like a stiff spring. Typical pumping speeds are 8 to 15spm which amounts to 4.2 to 7.9 million cycles per year, therefore the rod design must focus on minimising fatigue failures which is exacerbated by corrosion in the operating environment. The surface pump unit is usually a beam type although other concepts have been developed. The surface prime mover and gearbox have been developed over the years to cater for the rod pump to reduce failures. System design is very complex and is an iterative process normally carried out by computer software. API have produced a programme to generate a set of design curves published in API RP11L and provided some general results in Bulletins 11L3 and 11L4 which are a useful starting point for design. However, in 11L4, API used 100% efficiency and pump rates which are higher than those generally found in the field, therefore, it is advisable to enter a curve which is 100 to 200% of the intended target for scoping out the required o equipment capacity. It is also not reliable for heavy oil wells (<20 API) unless correction factors are applied for fluid vicosities and lack of rod weight on the downstroke. Rod fall problems often cut restrict pump rates to 1.5 to 2.5spm which lead the use of long stroke pumps. Sand problems are often a problem with high viscous crudes which increase wear of the pump parts.
265 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 10.4.1. Impact On Completion Design 0
If free gas is expected then a packer should not be installed to allow the gas to vent up the annulus if it is planned to convert a completion to rod pump lift within a few years unless required for zonal isolation. If a well has to be pumped which is below the bubble point, it is advised to set the pump below the producing interval to aid gas separation, maximise drawdown and minimise perforation blocking by fill. If a well is fractured, the pump must be set above the perforations as frac sand can damage the pump. The casing geometry must be sufficient enough to enable the gas to percolate through the fluid column against the down-flow. 10.5. SCREW PUMP SYSTEMS Screw or progressive cavity pump is a rotary positive displacement pump consisting of a rubber stator and stainless steel rotor. The rotary drive to the downhole pump is through sucker rods from a prime mover through a gearbox. They rates of between 5 to 500stb/d, although in some circumstances capacities of 1,500stb/d is possible, on heavy oil wells or viscous emulsions where conventional rod pumps are hindered by rod fall. They have an advantage in that they can handle some sand production and less costly. The production rate is proportional to the rotary speed and are determined from manufacturers charts, generally between 50-100rpm in heavy oil and 500rpm in light oils. The selection of the material for the rubber stator is the key for operational life in the well environment. 10.6. PLUNGER LIFT Plunger lift are used on high GLR wells that produce liquids at relatively low rates (<500stb/d). The tubing/casing annulus is used to store gas energy provided to the tubing when the well is opened up. This energy is used to drive the plunger up to surface carrying a small slug of liquid. After production of the following tail gas when the liquid begins to kill the well the plunger is dropped again and the cycle repeated. It is particularly useful for de-watering gas wells. Operating requirements are: • • • GLR >500scf/stb PI <1stb/d/psi Plunger velocity 700 to 1,000ft/min
Efficiency of this system decreases with depth and PI but increases with tubing size. It is essential that the completion tubing is parallel and drifted to ensure correct operation of the plunger.
A.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 266 OF 295 ENI S.H.Typical Screw Pump Installation . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 267 OF 295 ENI S.A.Typical Plunger Lift Installation . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.p.I .
Method sensitive to rate changes.A. A highly reliable compressor with 95+% run time required.000 BFPD. Good for low volume wells. central systems reduce cost per well but is more complicated. SUMMARY ARTIFICIAL LIFT SELECTION CHARTS 0 REVISION 10.000 BID. normally requires a high injection gas volume/bbl fluid. can alter stroke speed. Consider chamber or high PI and low BHP wells. Choice of wireline retrievable or conventional valves. Numerous pump sizes and pump/engine ratios adapt to production and depth needs. Moderate cost for well equipment (valves and mandrels). Fair to good. Full pump fillage efficiency typically about 50-60% feasible if well is not over-pumped. Must size pump properly. must adjust injection time and cycles frequently. More tolerant of power fluid solids. Excellent. Labour intensive to keep time tuned otherwise poor performance.7. Good selection. Fair increases for wells that require small injection GLRs. not as good as rod pumping owing to GLR. seats. Tubing needs to be sized correctly. operating and repair practices needed rods and pump. Typically total system efficiency is about 50% for high rate well but for <1. Selection of throat and nozzle sizes extend range of volume and capacity. Because this a newer method. Central compression system reduces cost per well. Power water (fresh. Good design plus good operating practices essential.p. Good to excellent. length. Plunger hangup or sticking may be a major problem. Time cycling normally avoided. Dilutents may be added if required. May be higher with lower GLR. Low increase with depth and larger rates. Excellent for flowing wells. friction and pump wear. produced or seawater) acceptable. maintaining steady gas show often causes injection gas measurement and operating problems. Maximum efficiency only 30%. Good for high rate wells but decreases significantly for <1. Fair. Flexibility Excellent. Operating practices have to be tailored to each well for optimisation. Efficiencies range from 3040% with GLR >100. Need 15ppm of 15µm particle size max. etc. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. Typical efficiencies at 20% but range from 5-30%. Low wells for wells requiring high GLRs. May have limited service in some areas. Efficiency (output hydraulic HP divided by input HP) Excellent. Poor. Power fluid rate and speed of downhole pump. Free pump and choose powerful option. Anti-pollution stuffing boxes are available. Hydraulic Jet Pumping Competitive with rod pump.Design Considerations and Overall Comparisons (pg1) .7. Proper design plus good operating practices essential. Miscellaneous problems Stuffing box leakage may be messy and a potential hazard.1. Can adjust ingestion time and frequency. Must add surfactant to a water power fluid for lubrication. Good valve design and spacing essential. Typically operating efficiencies of 10-20%. Design Considerations And Comparisons Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Varies but often competitive with rod pumps. Continuous Gas Lift Low well equipment costs but lines and compression costs may be high. requires powerful conductor. pumps. Fair to poor. can alter speed. Excellent total system efficiency. Long service life and simple repair procedures. Some problems with sticking plungers. only low cost well equipment if no compressor required. Heavily influenced by power fluid plus production gradient. Requires a highly reliable electric power system. field knowledge and experience are limited. Requires proper cable in addition to motor. Costs increase as horsepower rises. Very low. Unload to bottom with gas lift valves. tolerant to moderate solids in power fluid. Multiple well. Data bank of rod and pump failures beneficial. Reported system efficiency 5070%. Triplex plunger leakage control required. Hydraulic unit provides additional flexibility but at added cost. No input energy required because it uses the well. Gas must be dehydrated properly to avoid gas freezing. Good. Intermittent Gas Lift Same as continuous flow gas lift. VSD provides more flexibility but added costs. Table 10.L . Poor. Plunger Lift Capital Cost Low to moderate increase with depth and larger units. May exceed rod pumps for ideal cases. Can vary power fluid rate and pressure adjusts the production rate and lift capacity. Good even when small supplementary gas is added.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 268 OF 295 ENI S. plunger size and run time to control production rate. Requires computer design programme for sizing. Good design and operating practices needed. 200ppm of 25µm particle size acceptable. More operating data needed. Gas injection rate varied to change rates. Typical lift efficiency is 1050% improved with plungers. to avoid excessive engine wear. Good to excellent. No moving parts in pump. Pumps usually run at a fixed speed. Cost increases with higher horsepower. Power fluid solids control essential. Downhole Equipment Reasonably good rod design and operating practices needed. May have problems with selection of appropriate stator elastomer. Relatively low capital cost if commercial electric power available. Requires careful sizing. efficiency typically is 40%.
Fairly simple to design but requires good rate data. good value for wellsite system that crane can move easily. Good data needed for valve design and spacing. Usage/ Outlook Excellent. solids. Table 10. Downhole jet often requires trial and error to arrive at best/optimum jet. API specifications and design/operatin g recommended practices should be followed. Continuous Gas Lift Well costs low. Ample gas volume and/or pressure needed for successful operation. Good. install and operates following API specifications and recommended practices. Problems or changing well conditions reduce downhole pump reliability. Free pump easily retrieved for servicing. Most like a flowing well. corrosive fluids. related to pump intake pressure. Good with proper throat and nose sizing for the operating conditions. usually results in test and treatment problems. high rate artificial lift system for wells with high bottom-hole pressures.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 269 OF 295 ENI S. System must be designed for the unstable gas flow rates. typically used. Used on <1% of US lifted wells. Best suited for <200oF and >1. Normally over-pumping and lack of experience decreases run time. high temperature deviated oil wells. Individual well or system. Used on about 85% of US artificial lift wells. Easily moved and some current market for used equipment Fair. Requires adjusting and plunger maintenance. More problems if pressures >4. high pressure. Basic operating procedures needed for downhole pump and wellsite unit. Simple manual or computer design. GOR try higher volume wells requiring flexible operation. Excellent for ideal gas lift cases. Good if well production is stable. Varies. Compression costs vary on fuel cost and compressor maintenance.M . Reliability Excellent.p. Plunger Lift Operating Costs Very low for shallow to medium depth (<7. wax asphaltenes. testing and operation. high volume. High pulling costs result from short run life. Usually very low. Free pump easily retrieved for onsite repair or replacement. Often used as a default artificial lift system. Limited proven design. Some trade in value. energy costs are high. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Often higher than rod pump even for free systems. Most often used on high water cut wells. if HP is high. Simple to install and operate. installation and operating specifications Each well needs an individual system. Same as continuous flow gas lift. System not forgiving. The normal standard artificial lift method. deviations. System will tolerate wide depth ranges. Poor open market values. Other repair costs are high.5% of US lifted wells. Fair. Used on <2% of US lifted wells.500ft) and locations with low production (. Fair. Good. Poor open market value. Requires excellent operating practices. Used on about 10% of US lifted wells. Simple to design. An excellent high rate artificial lift system. Short run life increases total operating costs. Fair market for triplex pumps. install and operate. wide rate range suitable for relatively deep. Excellent if compression system is properly designed and maintained. dry non-corrosive and clean gas supply source is needed throughout the entire life. System approach needed. Often used as a default artificial lift method in lieu of sucker rod pumps. Good with a correctly designed and operated system. Individual well unit very flexible but extra cost. Excellent if there is an adequate supply of ingestion gas and adequate low pressure storage volume for injection gas. Same as continuous flow gas lift. high GLR lift method. Essentially a low liquid rate. Used on <1% of US lifted wells. Used on <1% of US lifted wells. Follow API recommended practices in design.000BFPD rates. Very sensitive to operating temperatures and electrical malfunctions. Easily moved. Key is to inject as deeply as possible with optimum GLR. Used primarily on gas well dewatering. Flexible operation. Run time efficiency >95% if good operating practices are adopted and corrosion. Potentially low but short run life on stator or rotor frequently reported. Fair market for triplex pump. Computer programme typically used for design. high temperatures. Must avoid operating in cavitation range of jet pump throat. are controlled. procedures to design. Good.400BFPD). Sometimes used to test wells that will not flow offshore. Each well needs an individual system. Intermittent Gas Lift Same as continuous flow gas lift. Low pump maintenance cost typical with properly sized throat and nose. Some trade in value. Used on less than 0. easily moved and good market for used equipment. Limited to relatively shallow wells with low rates. System (total) Straightforward and basic. Some market for good used compressors and some trade in value for mandrels and valves. Also a default for low bottom-hole pressure wells on continuous gas lift. Hydraulic Jet Pumping High cost owing to HP requirement. Salvage Value Excellent. Fair to poor. flexible. Low back-pressure beneficial. Requires attention. Frequent downtime results from operational problems. Can be used for extending flow life or improving efficiency.. Varies. poor for problem areas. Some trade in value. An adequate volume. Typically each well is an individual producer using a common electric system. high GOR and significant sand production. mostly offshore. Central plant more complex.000psig. etc.Design Considerations and Overall Comparisons (Pg2) .A.
Special low profile units are available.000ft injected depth. Poor restricted by the gradient of the gas lifted fluid. etc.5 and 5. Low at well but noisy at compressor. Small casing suitable for this low volume lift. Not possible to use dynamometers and pump-off cards. Good to fair.000ft well may be >1. Good with the surface prime mover causing the only noise. Prime mover can be electric motor.000ft well. Excellent with low noise. Bottom-hole pressure obtained with free pumps. Effectively about 500stb/d at 7.000stb/d with 2. Avoid 4. >250psi pump intake pressure). Requires surface treating and high pressure pumping equipment. has an injection depth of about 10. Same as continuous flow.000psi) or HP. Good low well noise.Operating Conditions Summary . Low volume. Depth limits Good.000ft for low rate. Low. Low. moderately high for urban areas. Good but depends on good well test and pressure charts. Operating Conditions Summary Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Larger casing required for parallel free or closed systems. limited to relatively shallow depths. Same as continuous flow.2. Noise Level Fair. Reduced performance inside 5. Practical depth about 10.5ins nominal tubing. Downhole pump performance can be analysed from surface power fluid rate and pressure.5ins casing and larger but gas separation may be limited. PIP >250psi for 10.000ft. >350psig to 5. fluid levels. 1. Same as piston pump.000ft.5ins casing depending on depth and rate. Practical depth of 20. Poor to fair. both engines or motors can be used. Motors are more reliable and flexible. high lift head pumps operating at depths to 17.e.000ft. Plunger Lift Casing size limits (restricts tubing size) Problems only in high rate wells requiring large plunger pumps. speed and producing rate. Transformer may cause problems in urban areas. For rates >5.p. Obtrusiveness Size and operation are drawbacks in populated and farming areas.000stb/d use >7ins casing and >3. analysis can be based on production and fluid levels only. Same as piston pump. Surveillance Fair. <100psi provided adequate displacement and gas venting. Fair.5 and 5.000ft. Larger casing may be required if dual strings run. few wells >10. Same as piston pump.440psi lift system and lift system and 1. similar limits as reciprocating pump. Higher voltages can reduce I2R losses Fair based on electrical checks but special equipment needed otherwise. Excellent. Poor if must handle >5% free gas. Prime mover flexibility Good.000psig. engines. Fair but not as good as rod pumping.000ft Hydraulic Jet Pumping Small casing size often limits producing rate owing to high (unacceptable) friction losses. Typically <10. Good when used with chamber. Poor.000ft. high GLR wells. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. Good to excellent. Small casing size (4. REVISION 0 Intermittent Gas Lift Small casing (4.5ins casing. Annulus must have adequate gas storage volume. can be easily analysed based on well test.5ins) mat result in excessive friction losses and limits production rate. gas or diesel fired engines or motors.000 GLR. Continuous Gas Lift The use of 4.. None normally required.5 and 5.5ins) may limit free gas separation.5 and 5. Bottomhole pressure and production log surveys easily obtained.000ft. Fair but complicated by standing valve and fallback. Good. Good low profile but must provide for compressor. Free gas reduces efficiency and service life. possibly 5.000ft with low GLR.7. Good low profile surface equipment.N . Usually limited by fallback. Often preferred in urban areas if production rate is high. rods of structure may limit rate at depth.5ins) normally is not a problem for this relatively low volume lift. turbines or motors can be used for compression. Typically for 1. Good. Usually limited to motor HP or temperature. if little free gas (i. PIP of <250psi feasible at 10.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 270 OF 295 ENI S. Typical design targets 25% submergence. Thus the backpressure on 10.5ins casing with 2ins nominal tubing normally limits rates to <1. Good. Good low profile but requires transformer bank. Typically about 50 to 100psig. Same as continuous flow. limited by power fluid pressure (5. Wellsite power fluid units can be sound proofed. Casing size will limit use of large motor and pumps. Can be analysed easily. Small casing (4.000ft. Excellent. both engines or motors can be used easily. Good. bottomhole pressures <150psi at 10. Fair. Excellent. Fair when used without chambers. Analysis improved by use of dynamometers and computers.A. Same as piston pump. requires a good power source without spikes or interruptions. Controlled by system injection pressure and fluid rates.500ft and 150stb/d at 15. Intake Capability Excellent. Fair to good wellhead equipment has low profile. Typically moderate rate is limited to about 100psi/1. Safety precautions must be taken for high pressure gas lines. Table 10.000stb/d.5ins tubing needed. <25psig feasible provided adequate displacement and gas venting. Intake pressure <100psig usually results in frequent pump repairs. Optimisation and computer control being tried. Excellent.000ft. Normally no problem for 4.
is possible but not normally used. Not applicable. Poor. Labour intensive Plunger Lift Testing Good. Soft start and improved seals and protectors recommended. Well testing with standard individual well units presents few problems. Well testing complicated by injection gas volume/rate. Intermittent flow can cause operating problems with separators.O .. High water cut and high rate wells may require a free water knock-out. same as rod pumping.p. Pumpoff control not developed. Well testing is simple with few problems. Well testing is simple with few problems using standard available equipment and procedures. Not applicable. Gas measurement errors are common. Well testing with a central system is more complex requiring accurate power fluid measurement. Does not appear applicable owing to intake pressure requirement higher than pump-off. Intermittent Gas Lift Poor. Good. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Fair. Formation GLR obtained by subtracting injected gas from total produced gas.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 271 OF 295 ENI S. Avoid shutdown in high viscosity/sand producers. Cycle must be periodically adjusted.Operating Conditions Summary (Pg2) . Well testing complicated by injection gas volume/rate. Usually controlled only by displacement checks. Measurement of both input and outflow gas is a problem. Good. Poor. Table 10. Good. Continuous Gas Lift Fair.A. A pressure recorder must be used to monitor intake pressures. Three stage production tests can be conducted by adjusting production step rates. Well testing is simple with few problems. Poor. Poor. Time cycle and pump-off controller’s application Excellent if well can be pumpedoff. Hydraulic Jet Pumping Same as piston pump.
Good.P . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. Inhibitor mixed with power fluid mixes with produced fluids at entry of jet pump throat. Hot water/oil treating and/or use of scrapers possible but they increase operating problems and costs.p. Use of standing valves risky. Parallel 2x2ins nominal tubing inside 7ins casing and 3x3ins tubing inside 95/8ins casing feasible. Plunger Lift Corrosion/ scale handling ability Good to excellent. Few problems. Same as piston pump except it can possibly handle higher GLRs but at reduced efficiency. Excellent and is the most common method if adequate injection gas available. Fair to good. Good. Fair. Gas is a problem for lower zone. Inhibitor in the injection gas and/or batch inhibiting down tubing feasible.Artificial Lift Considerations (Pg1) . Same condition as hydraulic piston pump. Free pump retrieved without pulling tubing. Artificial Lift Considerations Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Good to excellent. Poor. Excellent as it cuts paraffin and removes small deposits.7. Hydraulic Jet Pumping Good to excellent. Limited experience in horizontal wells. Fair. Same as piston pump. Produced water or seawater may be used as a power fluid with wellsite type system or power fluid separation before production treating system. Parallel 2x2ins low rate dual feasible inside 7ins casing. Fair. Normal production cycle must be interrupted to batch treat the well. Good to fair. REVISION 0 Intermittent Gas Lift Same as continuous flow. Casing free pump limited to low GLRs. increased load and wear problems. Batch treat down annulus is feasible. Batch inhibition treatment only to intake unless shroud is used. Limited to low GLRs and moderate rates. Poor for free gas >5% through pump. Circulate heat to downhole pump to minimise build-up. No none installations. Dual gas lift is common but good operating of dual lift is complicated and inefficient resulting in reduced rates. Batch treatment inhibitor used down annulus feasible. Power oil a fire and safety problem. Rotary gas separators helpful if solids not produced. Produced gas reduces need for injection gas. Good. Good mechanical cutting sometimes required. Injection gas may aggravate existing problem. Poor if must pump >50% free gas. Free gas reduces efficiency but helps lift. Feasible operation in horizontal wells. batch inhibition possible. Similar to piston pump. Poor in wells needing sand control. Good to excellent. Same as continuous flow. Crooked/ deviated holes Fair. May have some special application offshore. Poor to fair. Most wells are deviated and typically produce sand. Fair. mechanical cutting. Dual inside 5ins casing currently not in favour. Increased mechanical problems. Must provide electrical power and service pulling unit. Rod scrapers not used. Use a gas anchor. Soluble plugs available. Water power fluid can be used. Gas handling ability Good if can vent and use natural gas anchor with properly designed pump. Requires long radius wellbore bends to get through. Fair. Some success in pumping 15o/100ft using rod guides. Vent free gas if possible. Mechanical cutting and inhibition possible. Steps must be taken to avoid corrosion in injection gas lines. Table 10. Heading causes operating problems.A. High angle deviated holes (>70o) and horizontal wells are being produced. Must design for unit size. Batch or continuous inhibition treatment can be circulated with power fluid for effective control. Paraffin handling capacity Fair to good.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 272 OF 295 ENI S. Currently very few known installations. Fair. Few wireline problems up to 70o deviation for wireline retrievable valves. Same as continuous flow gas lift. Requires deck space for treatment tanks and pumps. Excellent. Excellent. frequently for both corrosion and scale control. Larger casing would be needed. Tubing may require treatment. Three string nonvented applications have been achieved with complete isolation of production and power fluid from each zone. Excellent for correct application. Dual application No known installations. Excellent. short pump can pass through doglegs up to 24o/100ft in 2ins nominal tubing. Fair. Possible running and pulling problems. No known installations. however a pulling unit is needed. Good. Free pumps can be surfaced on a schedule. Poor if it must pump any free gas. Same as continuous flow. Same as continuous flow Excellent.. Hot water/oil treatments. weight and pulling unit space. Concentric fixed pump or parallel free permits gas venting with suitable downhole gas separator below pump intake. Excellent. Feasible operation in highly deviated wells. Pump will normally pass through the tubing. Continuous Gas Lift Good. Offshore application Poor. Excellent if tubing can be run in the well. Possible to unseat pump and circulate hot fluids. Increased load and wear problems.3.
Limited by tubular and HP. Typically are used with 1. Feasible if low rates. Typical limit is 0.000stb/d from 2. limited to about 200cP. >200stb/d from 4.000ft. Suitable for low rates and low GLRs. Avoid unstable flow range. 550oF. Generally poor. Poor. Good. Fair. Requires <200ppm solids. Use fresh water injection for salt build-up formations. Excellent.5ins and 700stb/d for 3.000stb/d from 10. Excellent. At present normally below 250oF.Artificial Lift Considerations (Pg2) . Increases HP and reduces head. Excellent and possible to operate to 500oF with special materials.5 to 4stb/cycle with up to 48 cycles/d Excellent for low flow rates of 1 to 2stb/d with high GLRs. Decreases to <10% sand for water producers. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Possible but may have high friction losses or gas problems. Good to excellent. Fair but restricted to shallow depths using large plungers . Excellent. Tandem motors can be used but will increase costs. Fair. Poor to fair for low viscosity <10cP production.440psi injection gas and GLR of 1.000ft and 1. Low volume lift capabilities Excellent. Solids/sand handling ability Poor.5ins tubing.5ins nominal tubing. 400stb/d for 2. rate about 4. Excellent. Good in >8o API production with <500cP possible. however it wipes tubing clean. Also produced fluids must have low solids <200ppm of 15µm particles for reasonable life. Improved wear resistant materials available at premium cost.5ins casing can produce 4. Excellent for high water cut lift even with high viscosity oil. low GORs and shallow depths but no known installations. Typically 0. Limited by heading and slippage.000ft with 240 HP. Poor.000stb/d from 5. limited by needed HP and can be restricted by casing size.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 273 OF 295 ENI S. Same as continuous flow Normally not applicable. Excellent for high viscosity fluids with no stator/rotor problems. Limited by number of cycles.500psi system. Fresh water treatment for salt formations. Possibly 200stb/d from 10.p. Typically a maximum of about 350oF. Sand can stick plunger. Fair but limited by stator elastomer.000ft.000ft and 1. Restricted by tubing size and injection gas rate and depth.000ft. Improved performance for high viscosity >200cP cases. rates of 5. Plunger Lift Slim-hole completions (27/8ins production casing string) Feasible for low rates <100stb/d and low GOR <250. Excellent. Similar to casing lift but must have adequate formation gas. Requires <10ppm solids power fluid for good run life. >75stb/d from 12. Intermittent Gas Lift Same as continuous flow. Typically 100 to 300stb/d from 4. Jet pumps are operating with 3% sand in produced fluids.50cP viscosity or water power fluid reduces friction losses. Poor. Good. Excellent up to 50% sand with high viscosity >200cP crude.000ft with <250psi pump intake pressure. tubular size and HP. Up to 15. Limit is inflow and surface problems. No known installations. Typically lower limit is 200stb/d for 2ins tubing without heading. Potential solution is to use ‘core flow’ with 20% water.000stb/d from 1.000ft with 3. Power oil of oil >24o API and .000stb/d from 4. Excellent. Most commonly used method for wells producing <100stb/d. Higher rates may required dilutent to lower viscosity.000ft. High viscosity fluid handling capability Good for <200cP fluids and low rates 400stb/d. Same as continuous flow. Fair. Power fluid to jet pump can tolerate 200ppm of 25µm particle size. Table 10. Same as continuous flow. Rod fall problems for high rates.000 to 10. Limited by cycle volume and number of possible injection cycles. Continuous Gas Lift Feasible but can be troublesome and inefficient.Q . Temperature limitation Excellent and currently used in thermal operations. Limited by efficiency and economic limit. Fair. Excellent for <100stb/d shallow wells that do not pump-off. May be able to handle up to 0.000ft and 200stb/d from 5. Hydraulic Jet Pumping Same as piston pump.000ft. Need to know temperatures to design bellows charged valves. Fair to good. Typically about 200stb/d from 10. Lower efficiency and high operating costs for <400stb/d.000stb/d from 10. Fair but standing valve may cause problems. Fair. Standard materials up to 300oF+ and to 500oF+ feasible with special materials. Few problems for >16 o API.000. High volume lift capacity Poor.A. Possibly 2. or below 20cP viscosity. max.000stb/d from 4. In 5.000ft possible.1% sand for inflow and outflow problems.000ft feasible with 1. Not as good as rod pumping.000stb/d with adequate flowing bottomhole pressure. Restricted to relatively small rates. Limited to about <250oF for standard and <325oF with special motors and cables. Typically 3. Production with up to 800cP possible. Good. Power fluid can be used to dilute low gravity production. Depending on reservoir pressure and PI with 4ins nominal tubing.1% sand with special pumps. Excellent.
1.2.e. through tubing perforation after packer setting. the tubulars (tubing and casing) and packer system and. 11. regardless of the density. i.e. high pressure and high temperature (HP/HT) wells. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 11. The re-use of the completion fluid is envisaged when it is opportune or cost effective. cannot be considered as a barrier. some completion types such as High Rate liners using a liner PBR may be some considerable distance from the formation.A.p. This being the case.30kg/Lt/10m. therefore is not a practical barrier. therefore. 11.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 274 OF 295 ENI S. • • 11. When it is necessary to replace a completion fluid containing solids in suspension.3. This policy does not refer to gradients below 1. BARRIER PRINCIPLES Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates has determined that a packer fluid. USE OF UNDERBALANCE COMPLETION FLUIDS POLICY The purpose of this section is to provide the basic criteria when ‘non-kill weight packer fluids’ can be used in completion design. high density oil mud. APPLICATION The use of non-kill weight packer fluid will be considered in the following situations: • • • When a brine with a gradient lower than the formation gradient has already been used as completion fluid. i. does not require the presence of an overbalance fluid. The main reasons are: • The integrity of the annulus. i. . it should not be classified as a barrier. however tubing leaks and deterioration of the fluid cannot be guaranteed.e. Over and above this. The use of non-kill weight packer fluid has been thoroughly evaluated and is permitted for the wells which have pressure gradients above 1. with regard to double barrier protection is mechanically obtained by means of the wellhead.30kg/Lt/10m where it is still considered good practice to use overbalance completion fluids. A hydrostatic overbalance fluid can only be considered a barrier on a long term basis if it is fully maintained.
. RISK ASSESSMENT 0 REVISION 11. Completions Similar to above. prior to commencing a well test using non-kill weight packer fluid. a risk assessment should be carried out to ensure.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 275 OF 295 ENI S. The worst possible case being immediately above the packer.A. the casing design must be able to withstand full well pressure in conjunction with the completion fluid hydrostatic pressure at respective depth. 11. as contingency against a tubing/packer envelope leak. However. that the completion design will keep the formation pressure off the production casing.4.4. if an underbalance completion fluid is to be used.1. in order to identify and evaluate the operative risks associated with downhole equipment functionality. a risk analysis evaluation (HAZOP) must be carried out by the District Drilling & Completion Engineering Department. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 11.4.p.2. Well Testing For exploration wells.
REPORT FORMS To enable the contents of this completion manual and other operating procedures manuals to be improved. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 276 OF 295 ENI S. workover and well testing operations are available and must be filled in and returned to head office for distribution to the relevant responsible departments as soon as possible as per instructions.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX A . it is essential that ENI . To this end a feed-back reporting system is in use which satisfies this requirement. The forms relevant to completion operations are: • • • • • • • • • • ARPO 01 ARPO 02 ARPO 06 ARPO 07 ARPO 08 ARPO 09 ARPO 11 ARPO 12 ARPO 13 ARPO 20 Initial Activity Report Daily Report Waste Disposal Management Report Perforating Report Gravel Pack Report Matrix Stimulation/Hydraulic fracturing Report Wireline Report Pressure/Temperature Survey Report Well Problem Report Well Situation Report Behind each report form are instructions on how to fill in the forms. As the first section is generic to all the forms it is only shown in ARPO 01 instructions.p.Agip Division and Affiliates obtain feed-back from the field. completion. Feed-back reports for drilling.
L . Rig RKB . INITIAL ACTIVITY REPORT (ARPO 01) 0 REVISION District/Affiliate Company DATE: Permit/Concession N° General Data On shore Latitude: Longitude Reference Rig Name Rig Type Contractor Rig Heading [°] Offset FROM the proposed location Distance [m] Direction [°] Off shore INITIAL ACTIVITY REPORT ARPO 01 Well Code Depth Above S.[m] First Flange[m] Top housing [m] Reference Rig Ref.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 277 OF 295 ENI S. Ground Level[m] Water Depth [m] Rotary Table Elev.p. Fluids Cementation Waste treatment Operating Time Moving Positioning Anchorage Rig-up Delay Lost-time Accidents Company Contract N° Type of Service Company Contract N° Jack-up leg Penetration [gg:hh] [hh:min] [hh:min] [hh:min] [hh:min] [hh:min] Rig Anchorage Leg N° Air gap [m] Penetration [m] N° Supply Vessel for Positioning Name Horse Power Bollard pull [t] Anchor Bow N° 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Note: Angle Type & Manufacturer Weight [t] Mooring Line Length Cable [m] Chain [m] Piggy Back Weight N° [t] Length [m] Mooring Line Chain Ø [mm] Cable Length [m] Ø [mm] Tension Operative [Tested] [t] Tension [t] Total Time [hh:min] Supervisor Superintendent . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A. & C.1.A.1st Flange Cellar Pit Depth [m] Length [m] Width [m]: Manufacturer Type Liner avaible [in] Major Contractors WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center Joint venture AGIP: % % % Type of Operation % % % Program TD (Measured) Program TD (Vertical) Rig Pump [m] [m] Type of Service Mud Logging D.
[psi] Reduce Pump Strockes Pressure Pump N° Liner [in] Strokes Press.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 278 OF 295 ENI S.P. Hrs.A. Gel 10"/10' Water Loss HP/HT Press. R. Stock Quantity UM Supply vessel Total Cost O G D O L R I B O G D O L R Daily Progr.B. Y. (24:00) Total Drilled Rotating Hrs R.1st flange / Top Housing BOP Stack Diverter Annular Annular Upper Rams Middle Rams Middle Rams Middle Rams Lower Rams Last Test Type Ø ARPO 02 [m] [m] [m] WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center Well Code Report N° Permit / Concession N° M.IFT [kg/l] 1 2 at m at m 3 Last casing Next Casing RT Elevation Ground Lelel / Water Depth RT . Progressive Rot. DAILY REPORT (ARPO 02) 0 REVISION DAILY REPORT Drilling District/Affiliate Company DATE: Rig Name Type of Rig Contractor Well Ø nom.M.[in] Top [m] Bottom [m] Top of Cmt [m] Last Survey [°] LOT . Sand pm/pom pf mf Daily Losses Progr.O.p.2.P. L Progr.O. Type Serial No. [psi] Lithology Shows From (hr) To (hr) Op.V.V. Jet vel. Nozzle/TFA From [m] To [m] Drilled [m] Rot. W.[t] Flow Rate Pressure Ann.D. HHP Bit HSI I [m 3] [m 3] B N° Run N° N° Run N° Bottom Hole Assembly N° __________ Rot. Supervisor: .L Partial Progr. hours Ø Description Part. Code OPERATION DESCRIPTION Operation at 07:00 Mud type Density Viscosity P. IADC Diam.D. Losses [kg/l] [s/l] [cP] [g/100cm2] / [cc/30"] [cc/30"] [kg/cm2] [°C] [g/l] [g/l] [kg/m3] [%] [%] Bit Data Manuf. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A. hrs Back reaming Hrs Personnel Agip Rig Others Total Agip Rig Other Total [m] [m] [m] [hh:mm] [m / h] [hh:mm] [hh:mm] Injured of w. ClSalt pH/ES MBT Solid Oil/water Ratio. (24:00) T. Temp.P. vel.p.
3. WASTE DISPOSAL MANAGEMENT REPORT (ARPO 06) 0 REVISION WASTE DISPOSAL Management Report District/Affiliate Company DATE: Report N° From [m] To [m] Phase size [in] Water consumption Usage Mixing Mud Others Total Readings / Truck Mud Volume [m ] Mixed Lost Dumped Transported IN Trans orted OUT Waste Disposal Water base cuttings Oil base cuttings Dried Water base cuttings Dried oil base cuttings Water base mud Oil base mud transported IN Oil base mud transported OUT Drill potable water Dehidrated water base mud Dehidrated oil base mud Sewage water Transported Brine Period [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] Cumulative 3 WELL NAME FIELD NAME ARPO-06 Cost center Depth (m) Interval Drilled (m) 3 Drilled Volume [m ] Cumulative volume [m ] Phase /Period [m ] Fresh water Recycled Total Fresh water 3 3 Mud Type Density (kg/l) Cl.A.concentration (g/l ) Cumulative [m ] Recycled Total 3 Fresh water [m ] Phase Cumulative Service Mud Company Waste Disposal Transportation 3 Recycled [m ] Company Contract N° 3 Remarks Remarks Supervisor Superintendent . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 279 OF 295 ENI S.p.
Sea Level Workover Rig RKB .P.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 280 OF 295 ENI S.V.A. [m] Steel Grade Service Company Perforation System Wireline TCP Thru Tubing Data Gun Type Overbalance Underbalance Differential Pressure [kg/cm ] Gun Specific.D. T.1 Flange Workover Rig RKB .1 Flange [°] [m] Workover Rig RKB .F 2 Completion fluid Fluid in front of Perforation Fluid Losses after Perforation Measured Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] Vertical Depth Top [m] Density Density [kg/l] [kg/l] [m3] Pool Remarks Bottom [m] Note: Supervisor Superintendent . [m] T.Sea Bottom Thickness [lb/ft] Measured Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] st st Final Completion Report [date] Final Workover Report [date] Reference Logs: Recorded on: Vertical Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] Cement Top M. PERFORATING REPORT (ARPO 07) 0 REVISION District/Affiliate Company DATE: Well location Onshore Offshore Total Depth Well Type Vertical Deviated Horizontal Well Situation Liner Casing Casing Tubing Packer Tubing shoe Size [Ø] M.D. inclination at Formation name: Lithology PERFORATING REPORT ARPO-07 WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center Pool: [m] Rotary Table Measurement [m] Drilling Rig RKB . Max. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.V.3.D.p. Gun Ø Charge Type S.D.
p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 281 OF 295 ENI S.A. GRAVEL PACK REPORT (ARPO 08) 0 REVISION Cannot Load File form supplied Eni-Agip Excel . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.4.
casing / liner Ø Shoe M. Starting Time Pumping Rate [bbl/1'] [m ] 3 Fluid Type Fluid Schedule Fluid Composition Density [kg/l] Mixed Volume [m3 ] Volume Progr.V. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Injected Circulated N° Fluid Ref.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 282 OF 295 ENI S. [m] Open hole Ø Prod. [in] String capacity [l] Packer . Volume [m ] 3 Pumping Parameter Progr.5.Top perforation Volume [l] Treatment Data Service Company HHP avaible Initial Shut-in pressure [psi] Annulus pressure [psi] Pressure test [psi] Max. [m] T. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.: Formation name: Pool: Lithology: Completion Data Bottom hole gauge [Y / N] Type Wellhead type Packer type Packer fluid Density Fluid in well at operation beginning String O. net perf.] Fracturing gradient [calculated] Fracturing gradient [tested] Porosity % SBHT [°C] 2 SBHP [kg/cm ] at m at m Open hole Perfor. injection rate [bpm] Max.09 WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center Interval to be Treated Tot. [psi] Injection Index [bbl/day/psi] Casing Press. [m] Top liner [m] Reservoir Parameters Reservoir fluid Density [Kg/l] 2 Gradient [Kg/cm /10 m.p. [m ] General Data M.D. injection pressure [psi] Pumping time [min] Pumping time [min] Equipment Coiled Tubing [Y / N] Ø Stimulation vessel / Other equipment Operation Description Fluid Ref. Proppant Initial Entering in Formation Concentr.D. 0 REVISION MATRIX STIMULATION/HYDRAULIC FRACTURE REPORT (APRO 09) MATRIX STIMULATION HYDRAULIC FRACTURING District/Affiliate Company DATE: Well Location Onshore Offshore Well Type Vertical Deviated Horizontal Treatment Type Matrix stimulation Acid Solvent Other Hydraulic Fracturing Foam Water base Oil base Other Acid Fracturing Acid Gelled acid Acid + Gel Other Main Frac Treatment Proppant type: API Mesh Size Amount of Propant [t] 3 Total Frac Fluid Vol.Vol.A. interval Slotted liner From [m] To [m] ARPO .D. [lb/gal] Press.D. [psi] Notes Notes / Remarks: Supervisor Superintendent . [psi] Final Press.
@ m. Tubing Size OD Tubing Size OD Tubing Shoe Ø Packer data Minimum I. Tbg Spool Top Flange Ø Flowing Flange Ø Kill Line Flange Ø BPV Type Psi Psi Psi Ø Wellhead Pressure Check [Kg/cm2] CHP / / / P P P THP Annulus Annulus Annulus POOL Perforated Zones [Kg/cm 2] [Kg/cm 2] [Kg/cm 2] [Kg/cm 2] Open Hole To [m] From [m] Note Operation Description Situation After the Job NO TOOLS IN HOLE TSV Note BPV SCSSV PLUG OTHER TOOLS Actual Bottom Hole: Max Size Run in Hole Ø Supervisor Superintendent @m . String Previous Bottom Hole Request Operation @ m. @ m.p. @ m.A.11 WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center SINGLE COMPLETION DUAL COMPLETION General Data RKB Elevation @ m. Weight [lb/ft] Weight [lb/ft] SELECTIVE SHORT STRING LONG STRING Well Code Flanges Base Flange @ m.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 283 OF 295 ENI S.D. @ m. WIRELINE REPORT (ARPO 11) 0 REVISION WIRE LINE REPORT District/Affiliate Company DATE: ARPO . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.6.
0 REVISION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE SURVEY REPORT (ARPO 12) Cannot Load File form supplied Eni-Agip Excel .7.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 284 OF 295 ENI S.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.
[kg/l]: Solutions Applied: Results Obtained: Solutions Applied: Results Obtained: Solutions Applied: Results Obtained: Solutions Applied: Results Obtained: Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Remarks at District level: Superintendent Lost Time Remarks at HQ level hh:mm Loss value [in currency] Pag. Of .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 285 OF 295 ENI S.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.8. WELL PROBLEM REPORT (ARPO 13) 0 REVISION District/Affiliate Company WELL PROBLEM REPORT DATE: ARPO -13 Top [m] Bottom [m] FIELD NAME WELL NAME Cost center Start date End date Problem Code Well Situation Open hole Last casing Well problem Description Ø Measured Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] Vertical Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] KOP [m] Type Mud in hole Max inclination [°] @m DROP OFF [m] Dens.p.
A. m SHORT STRING Note Joint n° m LONG STRING Progr. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.p. m Note Remarks: Supervisor Superintendent pag. m DUAL COMPLETION Note Joint n° m Progr.: of: .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 286 OF 295 ENI S. WELL SITUATION REPORT (ARPO 20) 0 REVISION WELL SITUATION (COMPLETION TALLY) District/Affiliate Company DATE: ARPO 20 / E FIELD NAME WELL NAME Cost center SINGLE COMPLETION Joint n° m Progr.9.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 287 OF 295 ENI S.A.NOMENCLATURE FOR TUBING CALCULATIONS Ai Ao Ap As D d Dpb E F Fa * Fa Fa tp * Fa tp Ff * Ff I Ff II Ff Ff tp * Ff tp Fp Fso I L n Pi /pi Po /po R r t Tfinal Tinitial w ws wfi wfo α γfi γfo ∆Fa ∆Ff ∆L ∆L1 ∆L2 ∆L3 ∆L4 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Area inside tubing Area outside tubing Packer-bore area Resistant tubing area (Ao . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX B .Ai) External diameter of tubing Internal diameter of tubing Packer-bore diameter 7 Young’s module (3⋅10 psi for steel) Generic force applied to the tubing end Piston force at the packer depth Piston force above the packer with anchored tubing Piston force at well head conditions Piston force at well head conditions with anchored tubing Fictitious force Fictitious force above the packer with anchored tubing Fictitious force due to the effect of internal pressure Fictitious force due to the effect of external pressure Fictitious force at well head conditions Fictitious force at well head conditions with anchored tubing Tubing-packer force Slack-off force Moment of inertia of the resistant tubing section Tubing length Distance between the lower end of the tubing and the neutral point Pressure inside the tubing at packer depth / well head Pressure outside the tubing at packer depth / well head Ratio between the external and internal diameters of the tubing Tubing-casing radial distance (Douter casing -D)/2 Tubing wall thickness Final temperature of tubing Initial temperature of tubing Linear weight of the tubing immersed in fluid Linear weight of the tubing in air Linear weight of fluid inside the tubing Linear weight of fluid outside the tubing -6 Coefficient of thermal expansion (6.9⋅ 10 in/in/°F for steel) Specific gravity of fluid inside the tubing Specific gravity of fluid outside the tubing Variation in the piston force Variation in the fictitious force Generic variation in the tubing length Variation in length due to Hooke’s Law Variation in length due to buckling Variation in length due to ballooning Variation in length due to thermal effects .p.
3 for steel) Axial stress in the tubing section Axial stress in the tubing section due to buckling Equivalent axial stress Equivalent axial stress on the inner wall of the tubing Equivalent axial stress on the outer wall of the tubing Material yield axial stress σsn .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 288 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 ∆Lp ∆Lf ∆lso ∆ltot ∆Pi ∆pim ∆pom ∆TM ν σa σb σeq σi σo σsn Yp = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 0 REVISION Total variation in length prevented by the packer Variation in length generated by fictitious force Variation in length generated by slack-off force Total variation in length of the tubing (= .∆Lp) Variation in pressure inside the tubing Average variation in pressure inside the tubing Average variation in pressure outside the tubing Average variation in tubing temperature Poisson’s coefficient (0.p.A.
High Temperature International Drilling Contractor Inside Diameter .p.A.ABBREVIATIONS API BHA BHP BHT BOP BPD BPM BPV BSW BUR C/L CBL CCL CET CGR CRA C/T DC DE DHSV D&CM DP DST E/L ECD ECP EMW ESD ESP ETA FBHP FBHT FTHP FTHT GLR GOC GOR GP GPM GPS GR HAZOP HP/HT IADC ID American Petroleum Institute Bottom Hole Assembly Bottom Hole Pressure Bottom hole temperature Blow Out Preventer Barrel Per Day Barrels Per Minute Back Pressure Valve Base Sediment & Water Build Up Rate Control Line Cement Bond Log Casing Collar Locator Cement Evaluation Tool Condensate Gas Ratio Corrosion Resistant Alloy Coiled Tubing Drill Collar Diatomaceous Earth Down Hole Safety Valve Drilling & Completion Manager Drill Pipe Drill Stem Test Electric Line Equivalent Circulation Density External Casing Packer Equivalent Mud Weight Electric Shut-Down System Electrical Submersible Pump Expected Arrival Time Flowing Bottom Hole Pressure Flowing Bottom Hole Temperature Flowing Tubing Head Pressure Flowing Tubing Head Temperature Gas Liquid Ratio Gas Oil Contact Gas Oil Ratio Gravel Pack Gallon (US) per Minute Global Positioning System Gamma Ray Hazard and Operability High Pressure . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX C .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 289 OF 295 ENI S.
A. Quality Control Repeat Formation Test Rotary Kelly Bushing Radius of Exposure Rate Of Penetration Radios Of Uncertainty Remote Operated Vehicle 0 REVISION .p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 IPR JAM KOP LAT LCM LMRP LOT LWD MAASP MD MLH MLS MMS MODU MPI MSL MSS MWD NACE NDT NSG NTU OBM OD OIM ORP OWC P&A PBR PDC PDM PGB PI PLT POB PPB ppg ppm PVT Q Q/AQ RFT RKB ROE ROP ROU ROV Inflow Performance Relationship Joint Make-up Torque Analyser Kick Off Point Lowest Astronomical Tide Lost Circulation Materials Low Marine Riser Package Leak Off Test Log While Drilling Max Allowable Annular Surface Pressure Measured Depth Mud Line Hanger Mud Line Suspension Magnetic Multi Shot Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit Magnetic Particle Inspection Mean Sea Level Magnetic Single Shot Measurement While Drilling National Association of Corrosion Engineers Non Destructive Test North Seeking Gyro Nephelometric Turbidity Unit Oil Base Mud Outside Diameter Offshore Installation Manager Origin Reference Point Oil Water Contact Plugged & Abandoned Polished Bore Receptacle Polycrystalline Diamond Cutter Positive Displacement Motor Permanent Guide Base Productivity Index Production Logging Tool Personnel On Board Pounds per Barrel Pounds per Gallon Part Per Million Pressure Volume Temperature Flow Rate Quality Assurance.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 290 OF 295 ENI S.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 RPM RT S/N SAFE SBHP SBHT SCC SCSSV SDE SF SG SICP SIDPP SPM SSC SSD SSSV STHP STHT TCP TD TOC TOL TRSV TVD UHF VBR VDL VHF VSP W/L WBM WC WHP WHSIP WOB WOC WOW WP YP Revolutions Per Minute Rotary Table Serial Number Slapper Activated Firing Equipment Static Bottom Hole Pressure Static Bottom Hole Temperature Stress Corrosion Cracking Surface Controlled Subsurface Safety Valve Senior Drilling Engineer Safety Factor Specific Gravity Shut-in Casing Pressure Shut-in Drill Pipe Pressure Stroke per Minute Sulfide Stress Cracking Sliding Sleeve Door Valve Sub Surface Safety Valve Static Tubing Head Pressure Static Tubing Head Temperature Tubing Conveyed Perforations Total Depth Top of Cement Top of Liner Tubing Retrievable Safety Valve True Vertical Depth Ultra High Frequency Variable Bore Rams (BOP) Variable Density Log Very High Frequency Velocity Seismic Profile Wire Line Water Base Mud Water Cut Well Head Pressure Well Head Shut-in Pressure Weight On Bit Wait On Cement Wait On Weather Working Pressure Yield Point 0 REVISION .p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 291 OF 295 ENI S.A.
1961. 3 edition (Dec 1981) API RP 14E Fourth Edition: ‘Recommended Practice for Design and Installation of Offshore Production Platform Piping System’. M : ‘ Pressure drop in wells producing oil and gas’ (July Sept 1972). 53th annual Fall Technical Conference and Exhibition. D.BIBLIOGRAPHY Document: Drilling Design Manual Connection Procedures Manuals. MS Thesis. H D and Brill. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX D . Dallas. J. R C JR and Kersch K M : ‘ Analysis of short-time transient test data by typecurve matching’ (July 1974) 793 Eickmeier. October 8-11. 1994. October 1-4. Ponwell Publishing Company. Forces and Stresses Associated With Combination Tubing Strings Sealed in Packers’. Aziz. Boston. O H : ‘Use of short term multirate flow tests to predict performance of wells having turbulence’ (1976) Brown. The University Of Tulsa (1988) API BUL 5C3 Sixth Edition: ‘Formulas and Calculations for Casing Tubing Drill Pipe. Other References: Ansari. Duns. Houston. 1984. 607617 Blount. Covier. GW and Fogarasi. P . H JR and Ros.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 292 OF 295 ENI S. N C J : ‘ Vertical flow of gas and liquid mixtures in wells’ (1963). J P : ‘ A study of two-phase flow in inclined pipes’ (May 1973). M and Whiston. Tulsa. April 15. NY (1986) STAP Number STAP P-1-M-6100 STAP M-1-M 5006 . Journal of Petroleum Technology. and Line Pipe Properties’.P ‘ Wasserbewegung Durch Boden’ (1901) 45. Arthur Lubinsky: ‘Helical Buckling of Tubing Sealed in Packers’. J. W. Jones. J R : ‘ How To Accurately Predict Future Well Productivities’ ( May 1968) 99-106 Fetkovich. K. 126 Golan. 36th Annual Fall Meeting of SPE.A. February. 1977 Bruist. Hammerlind: ‘Movement. API RP 14E ‘Recommended Practices For Design And Installation Of Offshore Production rd Platform Piping Systems. E M. Vols 1 And 4. 451 Earlougher.E: ‘Flowing and Gas-Lift Well Performance’ API Drill and Prod Pract (1954). M J : ‘ The Isochronal Testing Oil Wells’ (1973) Forcheimer. 1978. 1977. K E : The Technology Of Artificial Lift Methods. 1781-1788 (in german) Gilbert. A ‘ A Comprehensive Mechanistic Model For Multiphase Flow In Wells’. E HY : ‘ Better performance of Gulf Coast wells’( 1974) D. L G and Glaze. 38-48 Beggs. International Human Resource Development Corporation. Hammerlind: ‘Basic Fluid and Pressure Forces on Oilwell Tubulars’. OK. October 1. C H: Well Performance.p.
R J and Hueni. (1936) Reinicke. Hagedoorn. No 37 Vogel. M G and Duckler. R J : ‘ Gravel pack design consideration’ (Feb 1974) Standing. E E and Warren D A JR : ‘ Drill stem test analysis utilising McKinley system of after flow dominated pressure build up’ (Oct. 1972) Orkiszewski. M B : ‘ Concerning The Calculation Of Inflow Performance Of Wells Producing From Solution Gas Drive Reservoirs’ (Sept 1971) 1141-1142 Texas Railroad Commission Rule 36 Turner. G E. A E : ‘ Analysis And Predictions Of Minimum Flow Rate For The Continuous Removal Of Liquid From Gas Wells’ (Nov 1969) Van Everdingen.A. H J JR : ‘ Short-Time Well Test Data Interpretation In The Presence Of Skin Effect And Wellbore Storage. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Gray. R E : ‘ Gas Well Operations With Liquid Production’ ( 1983) Milner. K E: ‘ Experimental study of pressure gradients occurring during continuous two-phase flow in small diameter vertical conduits’ ( April 1965) 475-484 Hagedorn and Brown (1967) Horner.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 293 OF 295 ENI S. Hubard. M D ‘ A field study of underbalance pressure necessary to obtain clean perforations using tubing-conveyed perforating’ ( June 1986) 662 Lea. Tulsa. F : ‘ The Skin Effect And Its Influence On The Productive Capacity Of A Well’ (Oct 1953) Van Poollen. E L and Schellhardt. OGCI. H K : ‘ Radius-Of-Drainage And Stabilisation Time Equations’ (Sept 1964) Vol 62. Remer. J : ‘ Predicting Two-Phase Pressure Drops In Vertical Pipes’ (June 1967). SSCSSV Sizing Computer Program. 38-40 H. K M. API 14B. J V : ‘ Inflow Performance Relationships For Solution Gas Drive Wells’.p. H E : ‘ Vertical Flow Correlation-Gas Wells’ API Man 14BM. 829838 Ramey. R G. M A : ‘ Back-Pressure Data On Natural Gas Wells And Their Application To Production Practices’ US Bureau Of Mines. W : ‘ Establishment of skin effect and its impediment to fluid flow into a wellbore’ (Oct 1953) King. Beggs: ‘Production Optimisation Using NODAL Analysis’. A R and Bingham. G : ‘ Comparison Of Measured And Predicted Pressure Drops In Tubing For High-Water-Cut Gas Wells’ (Aug 1987) 165-177 Saucier. D R : ‘ Pressure build up in wells’ (1951) Hurst. 1991. A R and Brown. Anderson. J F JR and Tighe. (Jan 1968) 83-93 . (Jan 1970) 97 Rawlins. D.
The application does not enable the user to independently assess dynamic situations such as with production or injection operations. The programme is generally considered to be reliable because the results of three years use have consistently matched actual well applications.TUBING MOVEMENT/STRESS COMPUTER PROGRAMMES E. which would enable users to design the string starting from an existing material. caused by temperature increases. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX E . with a string and a high number of packer’s as well (multiple zone completions) and takes into account the fact that packer setting can be mechanical or hydraulic. which results in extremely accurate results. possible to take into account the reduction in the performance of some CRA type steels.p. ‘Vertubing’ produces the results as numerical files. The programme is supported by VAX/VMS computer systems and is currently available at Head Office and in the Districts on the Company computer network. It is not.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 294 OF 295 ENI S. The ‘Vertubing’ programme provided a calculation tool which significantly reduced times for engineers involved in string calculations.A. It is necessary to calculate load losses during the relative operation and obtain the resulting fictitious hydrostatic gradient which then lets the user obtain the correct pressures for the various string sections. This application was based on a previous version designed by a company named ‘Tubmov’ which was run on Hewlett Packard 41CV computers. without any graphic display. The programme also enabled users to find an optimal solution by means of the iterative process using a number of approximations and producing results which were more reliable.1. ‘VERTUBING’ PROGRAMME The need to fast computing to carry out tubing movement/stress calculations led AGIP to produce the ‘Vertubing’ programme in 1989. It is also possible to check stress tubing’s with varying diameters (tapered string) and to consider materials with anisotropic characteristics. The programme does not incorporate a library or collection of data on commonly used tubing material. however. The programme’s architecture defines a rigid sequence for data entry. The application carries out all functions for tubing control in vertical or deviated wells. .
while the Govier-Aziz formula is used for single stage fluids. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 E. while the resulting stresses the casing is subject to are calculated using the WS-Casing module. . During processing it is also possible to display and print a simple drawing of the well and the completion. Duns & Ross). once the temperature profile and lithology of the formations are known. The calculation of load losses and the hydraulic conditions can be carried out using different correlations which are valid for two-stage flow (Beggs & Brill.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 295 OF 295 ENI S. The most interesting feature of the programme is its capability to evaluate temperatures during and after well operations. As ‘Vertubing’ had to be integrated with software in ENI-Agip Division and Affiliates expert system (Welcome) it seemed more appropriate to use a modern design programme such as ‘Wellcat’. During testing the results were compared to actual field data and a good match was obtained. which can be read. Gray. The ‘Wellcat’ programme was initially tested with the most typical cases (discussed in publications) and appropriate comparisons were made with data previously obtained using the ‘Vertubing’ programme with reasonable results. is due to this application’s limitations in terms of obtaining the trend of temperatures the string is subject to during various well operations. Hagedorn & Brown. printed or exported as graphic files. to completion and other various well operations. The WT-Circ and WT-Prod modules let the user evaluate the temperatures during standard production and circulation operations and the WS-Tube module lets the user calculate tubing movement and stress. and the inability to analyse dual completions. It is also possible to calibrate the average coefficients for thermal exchange and specific heat. The need to use an in-house company programme which was more complex compared to ‘Vertubing’.p.2. It is possible to evaluate the reduction in material rating due to temperature and any anistropy of materials. VAX Mainframe and UNIX versions. ranging from drilling. ‘Wellcat’ produces results in ASCII format. The WT-Drill module lets the user evaluate the temperatures and pressures during drilling and the casing installation stages.A. The programme incorporates five modules. The programme is now used in the company for completion string design and at present available in PC. The programme also assesses the installation of a hanger in the completion as well as hydraulic or mechanical packer setting. ‘WELLCAT’ PROGRAMME 0 REVISION Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates recently acquired Enertech’s (1994) ‘Wellcat’ programme which is an application integrating the most specialised software. Orkiszewski. selective completions with a maximum of five packers. ‘Wellcat’ can be used for single completions. dual completions with a maximum of two packer’s and dual selective completions. The brief description below only describes the parts of the application concerning tubing.
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
We've moved you to where you read on your other device.
Get the full title to continue listening from where you left off, or restart the preview.